MODULE - III

Index 01.| POINT 1

02.| STRAIGHT LINE 27

03.| CIRCLE 67

04.| PARABOLA 109

05.| ELLIPSE 145

06.| HYPERBOLA 165

 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 1
POINTS
1. SYSTEM OF CO-ORDINATES :

1.1 Co-ordinate Axes : The position of a point in a plane is determined with reference to two intersecting
straight lines called the co-ordinate axes and their point of intersection is called the origin of
co-ordinates. If these two axes of reference (generally we call them x and y axes) cut each other at right
angle, they are called rectangular axes otherwise they are called oblique axes. The axes divide the
co-ordinate plane in four quadrants.

Y
Y
II I is
II ax
quadrant quadrant ue I (a ¹ 90º)
y-axis

quadrant
iq quadrant
90º bl
X’ X X’ O a X
x-axis III O x-axis
III IV quadrant IV
quadrant quadrant quadrant
Y’
Y’

(a) Rectangular axes (b) Oblique axes

1.2 Rectangular - Cartesian Co-ordinates : The ordered pair of perpendicular distance from both axes
of a point P lying in the plane is called Cartesian Co-ordinates of P. If the cartesian co-ordinates of point
P are (x,y) then x is
called abscissa or x coordinate of P and y is called the ordinate Y

or y co-ordinate of point P. x
P(x,y)
y
Note: (i) Co-ordinates of the origin is (0, 0).
X' X
(ii) y co-ordinate on x axis is zero. O
(iii) x co-ordinate on y axis is zero.
Y'
1.3 Polar co-ordinate : Let OX be any fixed line which is usually called the initial line and O be a fixed point
on it.
y
If distance of any point P from the pole O is 'r' and ÐXOP = q, then (r, q) are called
P(r,q)
the polar co-ordinates of a point P. r
x' q x
O

y'
1.4 Relation between the Polar and Cartesian Co-ordinates : Let P(x,y) be the cartesian co-ordinates
with respect to axes OX and OY and (r,q) be its polar co-ordinates with respect to origin O and initial line
OX.

It is clear from figure

OM = x = r cos q ....(1)

and MP = y = r sin q ....(2)

Squaring and adding (1) and (2), we get

E
2 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

x2 + y2 = r2 or r = (x 2 + y 2 )

Dividing (2) by (1), then Y

P(x,y)
æyö
tan q = ç ÷ r
èxø y

q
O x M X
æyö
-1
or q = tan ç ÷
èxø

i.e. (r cos q, r sin q) Þ (x,y) ....(3)

æ 2 2 -1 æ y ö ö
and ç (x + y ), tan ç ÷ ÷ Þ (r,,q) ....(4)
è è x øø

If r and q are known then we can find (x,y) from (3) and if x and y are known then we can find (r,q)
from (4).

-1 æ y ö
Q q = tan ç ÷
èxø

y
If a = tan -1
x

Then values of q in four quadrants.

Quadrant I II III IV

q a p- a -p+a -a

Ex.1 If Cartesian co-ordinates of any point are ( 3,1) then its polar co-ordinates is :-

(1) (2, p/3) (2) ( 2, p / 6)

(3) (2, p/6) (4) None of these

Sol.(3) 3 = r cos q, 1 = r sin q

æ 1 ö
( 3)
2
r= + 12 = 2 , q = tan–1 çè ÷ = p/6 Þ (2, p/6)
3ø

Ex.2 If polar coordinates of any points are (2, p/3) then its cartesian coordinates is :-

(
(1) 1, - 3 ) (
(2) 1, 3 ) (3) ( 3,1 ) (4) None of these

Sol.(2) x = 2 cos p/3, y = 2sin p/3

x=1; y= (
3 Þ 1, 3 )
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 3
2. TRANSFORMATION OF AXES :
2.1 Parallel transformation :

Let origin O (0, 0) be shifted to a point (h,k) by moving Y Y’

x axis and y axis parallel to themselves. If the co- P(x,y) w.r.t
ordinate of point P with reference to old axis are (x, y) old axes
P(X,Y)
then co-ordinate of this point with respect to new axis Y
w.r.t new axes
y
will be (x – h, y – k), P(x,y) = P(x – h, y – k) X
O’ X’
N
from figure : h k
X
x=X+h O L M
x
y=Y+k

2.2 Rotational transformation :

Let OX and OY be the old axis and OX' and OY' be

the new axis obtained by rotating the old OX and OY
through an angle q . Again, if co-ordinates of any point
P (x, y) with reference to new axis will be (x', y'). then

x' = x cos q + y sin q

y' = –x sin q + y cos q
x = x' cos q – y' sin q
y = x' sin q+ y' cos q

The above relation between (x, y) and (x', y') can be easily obtained with the help of following table.

x¯ y¯
x' ® cosq sinq
y' ® –sinq cosq
Note : If rotation is in clockwise direction, then take (–q) in place of 'q'.
Ex.3 If axis are transformed from origin to the point (–2, 1) then new co-ordinates of (4, –5) is :-

(1) (6, 4) (2) (2, –6) (3) (6, –6) (4) (2, –4)

Sol.(3) [4 – (–2), – 5 – 1] = (6, –6)

Ex.4 Keeping the origin constant axis are rotated at an angle 30° in negative direction then coordinate of
(2, 1) with respect to new axis is :-

æ 2 + 3 3ö æ 2 3 + 1 -2 + 3 ö
(1) ç 2 , 2 ÷ (2) ç 2
,
2 ÷ø
è ø è

æ 2 3 +1 2 - 3ö æ 2 3 -1 2 + 3 ö
(3) ç , (4) çç , ÷
è 2 2 ÷ø è 2 2 ÷ø

E
4 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Sol.(4) 2 1

x' cos(–30°) sin(–30°)

y' –sin(–30°) cos(–30°)

2 3 -1
x' = 2 cos 30° – sin 30° =
2
2+ 3
y' = 2 sin 30° + cos 30° =
2

Ex.5 If the new coordinates of a point after the rotation of axis in the negative direction by an angle of p/3 are
(4, 2) then coordinate with respect to old axis are :-

(1) ( -2 3 + 1,2 + 3) (2) (2 + 3, -2 3 - 1) (3) (2 + 3, -2 3 + 1) (4) (2 - 3, -2 3 - 1)

Sol.(3) x y

4 cos(–60°) sin(–60°)

2 –sin(–60°) cos(–60°)

\ x = x' cos a – y' sin a

= 4 cos (–60) – 2 sin (–60) = 2 + 3

y = x' sin a – y' cos a

= 4 sin (–60) + 2 cos (–60) = –2 3 +1

Hence the coordinates are (2 + 3, -2 3 + 1)

3. DISTANCE FORMULA :

The distance between two points P(x1,y1) and Q(x2 , y2) is given by y 2)
y-axis ( x 2,
Q
y2–y1

PQ = (x1 - x2 )2 + (y1 - y 2 )2 )
,y 1
P(x
1
y2
x2–x1
Note : y1
x-axis
O x1
(i) Distance of a point P(x1, y1) from the origin = x + y 2 2 x2
1 1

(ii) Distance between two polar co-ordinates A(r1, q1)

and B(r2, q2) is given by

AB = r12 + r22 - 2r1 r2 cos(q1 - q2 )

Ex.6 Find the distance between P(–2, 3) and Q(4, –1) :-

Sol. PQ = ( -2 - 4) 2 + (3 + 1)2 = 36 + 16 = 52

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 5
Ex.7 Distance of a point P (–8, 6) from origin is

Sol. ( -8)2 + 62 = 64 + 36 = 10

p æ pö
Ex.8 Find the distance between P æç 3, - ö÷ and Q ç 4, ÷
è 6ø è 3ø

æ p pö æ pö
Sol. PQ = 9 + 16 - 2.3.4 cos ç - - ÷ = 9 + 16 - 24 cos ç - ÷ = 25 - 24 ´ 0 = 5
è 6 3ø è 2ø

Ex.9 Distance between points (a, 0) and (0, a) is :-

(1) 2a (2) 2a2 (3) 2a (4) 2 2a

Sol.(1) D = (a - 0)2 + (0 - a)2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2 = 2a

Ex.10 If distance between the point (x, 2) and (3, 4) is 2, then the value of x is :-

(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 0

Sol.(3) 2 = (x - 3)2 + (2 - 4) 2 Þ 2 = (x - 3)2 + 4

Squaring both sides 4 = (x – 3)2 + 4 Þ x – 3 = 0 Þ x = 3

Ex.11 The point whose abscissa is equal to its ordinate and which is equidistant from the point (1, 0) and B(0, 3) is :-

(1) (3, 3) (2) (2, 2) (3) (1, 1) (4) (4, 4)

Sol.(2) Let the point P (k, k)

given

Þ PA = PB Þ (k - 1)2 + k 2 = k 2 + (k - 3)2

Þ 2k2 – 2k + 1 = 2k2 – 6k + 9 Þ 4k = 8 Þ k = 2

4. APPLICATIONS OF DISTANCE FORMULA :

4.1 Position of Three points : Three given points A, B, C are collinear, when sum of any two distance out of AB,

BC, CA is equal to remaining third distance. i.e. AB ± BC = AC Otherwise the points will be vertices of

a triangles.

4.1.1 Types of Triangle : If A, B and C are vertices of triangle then it would be.

(a) Equilateral triangle, when AB = BC = CA.

(b) Isosceles triangle, when any two sides are equal and their sum must be grater than third side.

(c) Right angle triangle, when sum of square of any two sides is equal to square of the third side.

E
6 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
(d) An Isosceles right angled triangle, when two of its sides are equal and the sum of the squares of two
equal sides is equal to the square of the third side.
(e) A Scalene triangle, when its all sides are unequal.
4.2 Position of four points :
Four given point A, B, C and D are vertices of a quadrilatral then it may be
(a) Square if AB = BC = CD = DA and AC = BD
(b) Rhombus if AB = BC = CD = DA and AC ¹ BD
(c) Parallelogram if AB = DC ; BC = AD and AC ¹ BD
(d) Rectangle if AB = CD ; BC = DA and AC = BD

Quadrilateral Diagonals Angle between diagonals

p
(i) Parallelogram Not equal q¹
2
p
(ii) Rectangle Equal q¹
2
p
(iii) Rhombus Not equal q=
2
p
(iv) Square Equal q=
2

Note: (i) Diagonal of square, rhombus, rectangle and parallelogram always bisect each other.
(ii) Diagonal of rhombus and square bisect each other at right angle.
(iii) Four given points are collinear, if area of quadrilateral is zero.

Ex.12 The triangle with vertices at A(2,4), B(2,6) and C (2 + 3 ,5) is-
(1) right angled (2) right angled and isosceles
(3) Equilateral (4) Obtuse angled

Sol.(3) AB = (2 - 2)2 + (4 - 6) 2 = 0 + 4 = 2

BC = (2 - (2 + 3))2 + (6 - 5)2 = 3 + 1 = 2

CA = (2 + 3 - 2)2 + (5 - 4)2 = 3 + 1 = 2

AB = BC = CA Hence the given vertices are of an Equilateral triangle.

Ex.13 Show that the point A (1,1), B (–2, 7) and C (3, –3) are collinear :-

Sol. AB = (1 + 2)2 + (1 - 7)2 = 9 + 36 = 3 5

BC = ( -2 - 3)2 + (7 + 3)2 = 25 + 100 = 5 5

CA = (3 - 1)2 + ( -3 - 1)2 = 4 + 16 = 2 5
Clearly BC = AB + AC. Hence A, B, C are collinear
5. SECTION FORMULA :
Co-ordinates of a point which divides the line segment joining two points P (x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) in the ratio
m : n are.
n
æ mx 2 + nx1 my2 + ny1 ö m Q
(i) For internal division R ç , R
è m+n m + n ÷ø P
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 7

m
n
R
æ mx2 - nx1 my 2 - ny1 ö Q
(ii) For external division R ç m - n , m - n ÷ P
è ø
m
n P
Q
R
æ x1 + x 2 y1 + y2 ö
(iii) Co-ordinates of mid point of PQ are ç , ÷ put m = n
è 2 2 ø

Note: (i) Co-ordinates of any point on the line segment joining two points P (x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2) are
æ x1 + lx 2 y1 + ly2 ö
çè 1 + l , 1 + l ÷ø , (l ¹ –1).
(ii) Lines joins (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is divided by
-y1
(a) x axis in the ratio l : 1 where l =
y2

- x1
(b) y axis in the ratio l : 1 where l =
x2

(iii) Line ax + by + c = 0 divides the line joining the points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) in the ratio l : 1

æ ax1 + by1 + c ö
where l = - ç
è ax2 + by 2 + c ÷ø

If ratio is positive divides internally, if ratio is negative divides externally.

Ex.14 Find the co-ordinates of point of internal division of the line segment joining two points (–3,2) and (3,–4) in the
ratio 3 : 2.

A 3:2 B
Sol.
(–3,2) R (3,–4)

æ 2(-3) + 3(3) 2(2) + 3(-4) ö

Rç , ÷
è 2+3 2+3 ø

æ -6 + 9 4 - 12 ö æ3 8ö
Rç , ÷ = R ç ,- ÷
è 5 5 ø è5 5ø

Ex.15 Find the coordinates of point of external division of the line segment joining two points (3,–1) and (3,4) in the
ratio 2 : 3 is-

æ 2(3) - 3(3) 2(4) - 3( -1) ö æ6 -9 8 +3ö

Sol. Rç , ÷ = Rç , Þ R(3,–11)
è 2-3 2-3 ø è -1 -1 ÷ø

Ex.16 Ratio in which the line 3x + 4y = 7 divides the line segment joining the points (1, 2) and (–2, 1) is :-
3(1) + 4(2) - 7 4 4
Sol. l=– =– = internally
3( -2) + 4(1) - 7 -9 9
Ex.17 The points of trisection of line joining the points A (2, 1) and B (5, 3) are :-
æ 5ö æ 7ö æ 7ö æ 5 ö æ 5 ö æ 7ö æ 7ö æ 7 ö
(1) ç 4, ÷ ç 3, ÷ (2) çè 3, ÷ø çè ,4÷ø (3) çè 3, ÷ø çè 4, ÷ø (4) çè 4, ÷ø çè 3, ÷ø
è 3ø è 3ø 3 3 3 3 3 3

E
8 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Sol.(3) 1 2
A(2,1) P1 P2 B (5,3)
2 1

æ 1 ´ 5 + 2 ´ 2 1 ´ 3 + 2 ´ 1ö æ 5ö
P1 (x, y) = ç , ÷ = çè 3, 3 ÷ø
è 1+2 1+2 ø

æ 2 ´ 5 + 1 ´ 2 2 ´ 3 + 1 ´ 1ö æ 7ö
P2 (x, y) = çè , ÷ = çè 4, 3 ÷ø
1+2 1+2 ø

Ex.18 The ratio in which the lines joining the (3, –4) and (–5, 6) is divided by y-axis :-
(1) 2 : 3 (2) 6 : 4
(3) 3 : 2 (4) 3 : 5

é3 ù
Sol.(1) = - ê ú = 3 : 5 internally
ë -5 û

6. PROPERTY OF TRIANGLES :
Let A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2) and C (x3, y3) are vertices of any triangle ABC, then A
6.1 Centroid :
The centroid is the point of intersection of the medians (Line joining the
mid point of sides and opposite vertices). Centroid divides the median F 2 E
in the ratio of 2 : 1. G
æ x + x2 + x3 y1 + y2 + y 3 ö 1
Co-ordinates of centroid G ç 1 , ÷ø
è 3 3 B D C
6.2 Incentre :
The incentre is the point of intersection of internal bisector of the A
angles. Also it is a centre of a circle touching all the sides of a
triangle.
F E
I
æ ax1 + bx2 + cx 3 ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 ö
Co-ordinates of incentre çè ,
a+b+c a + b + c ÷ø
where a,b,c are the sides of triangle ABC. B D C
BD AB c
Note: (i) Angle bisector divides the opposite sides in the ratio of remaining sides eg. = = .
DC AC b
(ii) Incentre divides the angle bisectors in the ratio (b + c) : a, (c + a) : b, and (a + b) : c
A(x,y)
1 1
6.3 Circumcentre :
It is the point of intersection of perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle. D O
It is also the centre of a circle passing through vertices of the triangle. If O is
(x,y) (x,y)
the circumcentre of any triangle ABC, then OA2 = OB2 = OC2
2 2
B E C 3 3

A(x1,y1)
6.4 Ortho Centre :
It is the point of intersection of perpendicular drawn from vertices on opposite D O
sides (called altitudes) of a triangle and can be obtained by solving the
equation of any two altitudes.
(x2,y2) (x3,y3)
B E C
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 9
6.5 Excentres of a triangle : This is the point of intersection of the two external angle bisectors and one
internal angle bisectors of a triangle. A is called the escribed circle opposite A or the circle escribed to the
side BC. If I1 is the point of intersection of internal bisector of ÐBAC and external bisector of ÐABC and
ÐACB then

æ - ax1 + bx 2 + cx 3 - ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 ö
I1 º ç , ÷
è -a + b + c -a + b + c ø

y1 )
1,
(x
æ ax1 - bx 2 + cx3 ay1 - by 2 + cy 3 ö I3 A I2
and I2 º ç , ÷
è a-b+c a-b+c ø
(x2,y2)B C(x3,y3)
æ ax1 + bx2 - cx 3 ay1 + by 2 - cy 3 ö
and I3 º ç , ÷ I1
è a+b-c a+b-c ø

when |BC| = a, |CA| = b and |AB| = c

Remarks :
(i) If the triangle is equilateral, then centroid, incentre, orthocentre, circumcentre coincide.
(ii) Ortho centre, centroid and circumcentre are always collinear and centroid divides the line joining orthocentre
and circumcentre in the ratio 2 :1.
(iii) In an isosceles triangle centroid, orthocentre, incentre, circumcentre lies on the same line.
(iv) If the triangle is right angle then circumcentre is the mid point of hypotenuse and orthocentre is the point
where right angle is formed.
Ex.19 Two vertices of a triangle are (–1,4) and (5,2). If its centroid is (0,–3), find the third vertex.
Sol. Let the third vertex be (x,y) then the co-ordinates of the centroid of triangle are

æ -1 + 5 + x 4 + 2 + y ö æ4+x 6+yö
ç , ÷ i.e., ç 3 , 3 ÷
è 3 3 ø è ø

æ4+x 6+yö
Now , ç 3 , 3 ÷ = (0,–3)
è ø

4+x 6+y
Þ = 0 and = –3 Þ 4 + x = 0 and y + 6 = –9
3 3
or x = – 4 and y = –15
Hence the third vertex is (–4,–15).

æ3 ö æ3 ö
Ex.20 If ç ,0 ÷ , ç ,6 ÷ and (–1,6) are mid points of the sides of a triangle, then find
è2 ø è2 ø

(i) Centroid of the triangle (ii) Incentre of the triangle

Sol. Let A º (a,b), then co-ordinates of
A(a, b)
B º (–2–a, 12–b) and co-ordinates of
C º (3 – a, 12 – b). But mid point of BC
3,6
æ3 ö F E
2
is ç ,0 ÷ (–1,6)
è2 ø

then 3 = –2 – a + 3 – a Þ a = – 1
B D C
and 0 = 12 – b + 12 – b Þ b = 12 (–2–a, 12– b) (3–a,12–b)
3,0
\ Co-ordinates of vertices are 2
A º (–1,12), B º (–1,0) and C º (4,0)
E
10 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

æ x + x2 + x 3 y1 + y 2 + y 3 ö æ -1 - 1 + 4 12 + 0 + 0 ö
(i) Centroid : The centroid of D ABC is ç 1 , ÷ = ç , ÷
è 3 3 ø è 3 3 ø

æ2 ö
i.e., ç ,4 ÷
è3 ø

(ii) Incentre : We have

a = BC = ( -1 - 4)2 + (0 - 0)2 = 5

b = CA = (4 + 1) 2 + (0 - 12)2 = 13

and c = AB = ( -1 + 1)2 + (12 - 0)2 = 12

æ ax1 + bx2 + cx 3 ay 1 + by 2 + cy 3 ö
\ The incentre of DABC is ç , ÷
è a+b+c a+b+c ø

æ 5 ´ ( -1) + 13 ´ (-1) + 12 ´ 4 5 ´ 12 + 13 ´ 0 + 12 ´ 0 ö
or ç , ÷
è 5 + 13 + 12 5 + 13 + 12 ø

i.e., (1,2)

æ3 3ö
Ex.21 If a triangle has its orthocentre at (1,1) and circumcentre at ç , ÷ then find the centroid.
è2 4ø

Sol. Since centroid divides the orthocentre and circumcentre in the ratio 2 : 1 (internally) and if centroid G(x,y),
then
2 1 æ3 3ö
O(1,1) G(x,y) Cç , ÷
è2 4ø

3 3
2´ + 1´1 2 ´ + 1´1
2 4 4 5
x= = and y = =
2 +1 3 2 + 1 6

æ4 5ö
\ Centroid is ç , ÷
è3 6ø

Ex.22 If (0, 1), (1, 1) and (1, 0) are middle points of the sides of a triangle then its incentre is :-

(1) (2 - 2, - 2 + 2) (2) (2 - 2, 2 - 2) (3) (2 + 2, 2 + 2) (4) (2 + 2, - 2 - 2)

Sol.(2) Let A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C (x3, y3) are vertices of a triangle, then
x1 + x2 = 0, x2 + x3 = 2, x3 + x1 = 2
y1 + y2 = 2, y2 + y3 = 2, y3 + y1 = 0
Solving these equations, we get
A (0, 0), B (0, 2) and C (2, 0)
Now a = BC = 2 2, , b = CA = 2, c = AB = 2
Thus incentre of DABC is
(2 - 2, 2 - 2)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 11
7. AREA OF TRIANGLE, QUADRILATERAL AND POLYGON :

7.1 Area of Triangle : Let A(x1, y1), B(x2, y2) and C(x3 , y3) are vertices of a triangle, then :

x1 y1 1
1 1
Area of Triangle ABC = x2 y2 1 = |[x (y – y ) + x (y – y ) + x (y – y )] |
2 2 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 2
x3 y3 1

Area of triangle can also be found by easy method

1 x1 y1 1 x2 y2 1 x3 y3
D =| + + |
2 x2 y2 2 x3 y3 2 x1 y1

Note: (i) If area of a triangle is zero, then the points are collinear
(ii) In an equilateral triangle
3 2
(a) having sides 'a' area is = a
4
p2
(b) having length of altitude as 'p' area is
3

(iii) If a triangle has polar co-ordinate (r1, q1), (r2, q2) and (r3, q3) then its area

1
D= [r r sin(q2 – q1 ) + r2r3 sin(q3 - q2 ) + r3r1sin( q1 - q3 )]
2 12
(iv) Area of the triangle formed by the lines of the form y = m1x + c1,y = m2x + c2 and y = m3x + c3 is

1 (c2 - c3 )2 (c - c1 )2 (c - c2 ) 2
D= + 3 + 1
2 (m2 - m 3 ) (m 3 - m1 ) (m1 - m2 )
7.2 Area of quadrilateral : If (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3 , y3) and (x4, y4) are vertices of a quadrilateral then its area

1
=
2
| [(x1y2 – x2y1) + (x2y3 – x3y2) + (x3y4 – x4y3) + (x4y1 – x1y4)] |
7.3 Area of polygon whose vertices are : (x1,y1), (x2,y2), (x3,y3),......, (xn,yn) is

1 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 xn yn
| + + + ..... + |
2 x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 x1 y1

Note: (i) If the area of quadrilateral joining four points is zero then those four points are collinear.

(ii) If two opposite vertex of rectangle are (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) then its area may be = |(y2 – y1) (x2 – x1)|

(iii) If two opposite vertex of a square are A (x1, y1) and C (x2, y2) then its area is

1 1
= AC2 = [(x2 – x1)2 + (y2 – y1)2]
2 2
Ex.23 Find the area of the pentagon whose vertices are A(1,1), B(7,21), C(7,–3), D(12,2) and E(0,–3).
Sol. The required area
1 1 1 7 21 7 -3 12 2 0 -3
= | + + + + |
2 7 21 7 -3 12 2 0 -3 1 1

1
= |(21 – 7) + (–21 – 147) + (14 + 36) + (–36–0) + (0 + 3)|
2

1 137
= |–137| = sq. units
2 2
E
12 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Ex.24 If (1, 1) (3, 4) (5, –2) and (4, –7) are vertices of a quadrilateral then its area :-
1
= [1 × 4 – 3 × 1 + 3 × (–2) – 5(4) + 5(–7) –4(–2) + 4(1) –1 (–7)]
2

1 41
= [4 – 3 – 6 – 20 – 35 + 8 + 4 + 7] = units
2 2
Ex.25 If the coordinates of two opposite vertex of a square are (a, b) and (b, a) then area of square is :-
(1) (a – b)2 (2) a2 + b2 (3) 2(a – b)2 (4) (a + b)2
1 1
Sol.(1) We known that area of square = d2 = [(a – b)2 + (b – a)2] = (a – b)2
2 2
8. LOCUS :
A locus is the curve traced out by a point which moves under certain geometrical condition. To find a locus of a
point first we assume the Co-ordinates of the moving point as (h, k) then try to find a relation between h and k
with the help of the given conditions of the problem. In the last we replace h by x and k by y and get the locus
of the point which will be an equation between x and y.

Note :
(i) Locus of a point P which is equidistant from the two point A and B is straight line and is a perpendicular
bisector of line AB.
(ii) In above case if
PA = kPB where k ¹ 1
then the locus of P is a circle.
(iii) Locus of P if A and B is fixed.
(a) Circle if ÐAPB = Constant = a {a ¹ 0,p}
p
(b) Circle with diameter AB if ÐAPB =
2
(c) Ellipse if PA + PB = Constant {constant > AB}
(d) Hyperbola if PA – PB = Constant {constant < AB}

Ex.26 Find the locus of a point which moves such that its distance from the point (0,0) is twice its distance from the y-
aixs.

Sol. Let P(h,k) be the moving point whose locus is required.

by hypothesis |OP| = 2 |PM| ( Q P lies in any quadrant)

Þ (h 2 + k 2 ) = 2|h|
Y
Squaring both sides then
M P(h,k)
h2 + k2 = 4h2

Þ 3h2 – k2 = 0

Changing (h,k) to (x,y) then X' X

O
3x2 – y2 = 0 Y'
which is the required locus of P.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 13
Ex.27 Find the locus of a point such that the sum of its distance from the points (0, 2) and (0, –2) is 6 :-
Sol. Let P (h, k) be any point on the locus and let A(0, 2) and B(0, –2) be the given points.

Þ (h - 0)2 + (k - 2) 2 + (h - 0)2 + (k + 2)2 = 6

Þ h2 + (k - 2)2 = 6 – h2 + (k + 2) 2 squaring both sides then

Þ h2 + (k – 2)2 = 36 – 12 h2 + (k + 2) 2 + h2 + (k + 2)2

Þ – 8k – 36 = – 12 h2 + (k + 2) 2 Þ (2k + 9)2 = 9(h2 + (k + 2)2)

Þ 4k2 + 36k + 81 = 9h2 + 9k2 + 36 k + 36 Þ 9h2 + 5k2 = 45

Hence, locus of (h, k) is 9x2 + 5y2 = 45
Ex.28 A (a, 0) and B (–a, 0) are two fixed points of D ABC. If its vertex C moves in such way that cotA + cotB = l , where
l is a constant, then the locus of the point C is :-
(1) yl = 2a (2) y = la (3) ya = 2l (4) None of these
Sol.(1) We may suppose that coordinates of two fixed points, A, B are (a, 0) and (–a, 0) and variable point C is (h, k).
From the adjoining figure

DA a - h
cot A = = y
CD k C(h,k)

BD a+h
cot B = =
CD k
But cot A + cot B = l, so we have
x
B OD A
a-h a+h 2a (–a,0) (a,0)
+ = lÞ =l
k k k
Hence locus of C is yl = 2a
Ex.29 A stick of length l rests against the floor and a wall of a room. If the stick begins to slide on the floor, find the
locus of its middle point.
Sol. Let the cross section of the floor and wall be taken as the co-ordinate axes and AB be one of the position of the
stick.
Let the mid point of AB be P(x1,y1) then co-ordinates of A and B are (2x1, 0) and (0, 2y1) respectively.
But given, |AB| = l
Þ (AB)2 = l2 Y
Þ (2x1 – 0)2 + (0 – 2y1)2 = l2 (0,2y1)
Þ 4x1 + 4y1 = l
2 2 2 B
Changing (x1,y1) by (x,y) then P(x1,y1)
4(x2 + y2) = l2
which is the required locus of P. X' X
O A(2x1,0)
Y'
9. SOME IMPORTANT POINTS :

(i) Quadrilateral containing two sides parallel is called as Trapezium whose area is given by
1
(sum of parallel sides) × (Distance between parallel sides)
2

E
14 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
(ii) A triangle having vertices (at12 , 2 at1), (at22 , 2 at2) and (at32 , 2 at3), then area is
D = a2 [(t1 – t2) (t2 – t3) (t3 – t1)]

c2
(iii) Area of triangle formed by Co-ordinate axis and the line ax + by + c = 0 is
2|ab|
(iv) When x co-ordinate or y co-ordinate of all vertex of triangle are equal then its area is zero.
(v) In a triangle ABC, of D, E, F are mid point of sides AB, BC and CA then
A
1
EF = BC and
2
F E
1
DDEF = (DABC) B C
4 D

2c 2
(vi) Area of Rhombus formed by ax ± by ± c = 0 is
|ab|

y 2 - y1 y - y2
(vii) Three points (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3) are collinear if = 3
x 2 - x1 x3 - x2

1
(viii) When one vertex is origin then area of triangle = (x y – x2y1)
2 1 2
(ix) To remove the term of xy in the equation ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0, the angle q through which the axis must be

1 æ 2h ö
turned (rotated) is given q = tan–1 çè a - b ÷ø .
2

1
(x) When one side of a triangle along x-axis then its area is D = |(x2 - x1 )y 3 |
2

1
(xi) When one side of a triangle along y-axis then its area is D = |(y2 - y1 )x 3 |
2

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 15

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 Which of the following statement is true ?
(1) The point A (0, –1), B (2, 1), C (0, 3) and D (–2, 1 ) are vertices of a rhombus.

(2) The points A (–4, –1), B (–2, –4), C (4, 0) and D (2, 3 ) are vertices of a square.

(3) The points A (–2, –1), B (1, 0), C (4, 3) and D (1, 2 ) are vertices of a parallelogram.

(4) None of these

Sol.(3) Here (i) A (0, –1), B (2, 1), C (0, 3), D (–2, 1) for a rhombus all four sides are equal but the diagonal are not
equal.

We see AC = 0 + 42 = 4, BD = 42 + 0 = 4
Hence it is a square, not rhombus

(ii) Here AB = 22 + 33 = 13 , BC = 62 + 42 = 52
AB ¹ BC Hence not square.

é 4 - 2 3 - 1ù
(iii) In this case mid point of AC is ê , or (1, 1)
ë 2 2 úû

æ 1 + 1 0 + 2ö
Also mid point of diagonal BD ç , or (1, 1)
è 2 2 ÷ø

Hence the point are vertices of a parallelogram.

Note : The students should note that the squares, rhombus and the rectangular are also parallelograms but every
parallelogram is not square etc. The desired answer should be pinpointed carefully.
Ex.2 If the middle point of the sides of a triangle ABC are (0, 0) (1, 2) and (–3, 4) then the area of triangle is :-
(1) 40 (2) 20 (3) 10 (4) 60
Sol.(2) If the given mid points be D,E,F; then the area of DDEF is given by

1 1
Þ [0 (2 – 4) + 1 (4 – 0) –3 (0 – 2)] Þ [0 + 4 + 6] = 5
2 2
\ Area of the triangle ABC = 4 × 5 = 20
Ex.3 The three vertices of a parallelogram taken in order are (–1, 0), (3, 1) and (2, 2) respectively. Find the
coordinate of the fourth vertex.

(1) (2, 1) (2) (–2, 1) (3) (1, 2) (4) (1, –2)

Sol.(2) Let A (–1, 0), B (3, 1), C (2, 2) and D (x, y) be the vertices of a parallelogram ABCD taken in order. Since, the
diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

\ Coordinates of the mid point of AC = Coordinates of the mid-point of BD

æ -1 + 2 0 + 2 ö æ 3 + x 1 + yö æ1 ö æ 3 + x y + 1ö
Þ ç , ÷ = çè , ÷ Þ ç ,1÷ = ç ,
è 2 2 ø 2 2 ø è2 ø è 2 2 ÷ø

3+ x 1 y +1
Þ = and = 1 Þ x = –2 and y = 1
2 2 2

Hence the fourth vertex of the parallelogram is (–2, 1)

E
16 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.4 The point A divides the join of the points (–5, 1) and (3, 5) in the ratio k : 1 and coordinates of points B and C
are (1, 5) and (7, –2) respectively. If the area of DABC be 2 units, then k equals :-
(1) 7, 9 (2) 6, 7 (3) 7, 31/9 (4) 9, 31/9

æ 3k - 5 5k + 1ö
Sol.(3) A= ç ,
è k + 1 k + 1 ÷ø

Area of DABC = 2 units

1 é 3k - 5 æ 5k + 1 ö æ 5k + 1 öù
Þ (5 + 2) + 1 ç -2 - + 7ç - 5÷ ú = ± 2
2 êë k + 1 è k + 1 ÷ø è k +1 øû

Þ 14 k – 66 = ± 4 (k + 1) Þ k = 7 or 31/9
Ex.5 The condition that the three points (a, 0), (at12 , 2at1) and (at22 , 2 at2) are Collinear if :-
(1) t1 + t2 = 0 (2) t1t2 = 2 (3) t1t2 = –1 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Here the points are collinear if the area of the triangle is zero.
Hence
1/2 [a(t12 – 1) 2 at2 – 2 at1 (at22 – a)] = 0
or t2 (t12 – 1) – t1 (t22 – 1) = 0
Þ t2 t12 – t2 – t1 t22 + t1 = 0 Þ (t1 – t2) (t1t2 + 1) = 0, t1 ¹ t2
\ t1t2 + 1 = 0 Þ t1 t2 = –1
Aliter : Points are collinear when
2at1 - 0 2a(t2 - t 1 )
Slope of points = (Q t2 ¹ t1)
(at12- a) a(t 22 - t12 )
t1t2 = –1
Note : The students should note that the points lie on the parabola y2 = 4ax, and (a, 0) is focus, the condition
t1t2 = –1 is well known condition for the extremities of a focal chord, as we shall see in parabola in our further
discussions.
Ex.6 Q,R and S are the points on the line joining the points P(a,x) and T(b,y) such that PQ = QR = RS = ST, then
æ 5a + 3b 5x + 3y ö
ç , ÷ is the mid point of the segment :
è 8 8 ø
(1) PQ (2) QR (3) RS (4) ST
æ 5a + 3b 5x + 3y ö
Sol.(2) The point L ç 8 , 8 ÷ divides PT in the ratio 3 : 5 and hence is the middle point of QR .
è ø
L
P(a,x) Q R S T(b,y)
Ex.7 The locus of the point, so that the join of (–5, 1) and (3, 2) subtends a right angle at the moving point is :-
(1) x2 + y2 + 2x – 3y – 13 = 0 (2) x2 – y2 + 2x + 3y – 13 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 2x + 3y – 13 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 2x – 3y – 13 = 0
Sol.(1) Let P (h, k) be moving point and let A (–5, 1) and B (3, 2) be given points.
By the given condition ÐAPB = 90°
\ DAPB is a right angled triangle.
Þ AB2 = AP2 + PB2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 17
Þ (3 + 5)2 + (2 – 1)2 = (h + 5)2 + (k – 1)2 + (h – 3)2 + (k – 2)2
Þ 65 = 2 (h2 + k2 + 2h – 3k) + 39
Þ h2 + k2 + 2h – 3k – 13 = 0
Hence locus of (h, k) is x2 + y2 + 2x – 3y – 13 = 0
Ex.8 A point P moves such that the sum of its distance from (ae, 0) and (–ae, 0) is always 2a then locus of P is
(when 0 < e < 1).

x2 y2 x2 y2 x2 y2
(1) 2
+ 2 =1 (2) - 2 =1 (3) + 2 =1 (4) none of these
a a (1 - e2 ) a 2
a (1 - e 2 ) 2 2
a (1 - e ) a

Sol.(1) Let P(h, k) be the moving point such that the sum of its distance from A(ae, 0) and B (–ae, 0) is 2a.

Then, PA + PB = 2a

Þ (h - ae)2 + (k - 0)2 + (h + ae) 2 + (k - 0) 2 = 2a

Þ (h - ae)2 + k 2 = 2a – (h + ae)2 + k 2

Þ (h – ae)2 + k2 = 4a2 + (h + ae)2 + k2 – 4a (h + ae)2 + k 2 [squaring both sides]

Þ –4aeh – 4a2 = –4a (h + ae)2 + k 2 Þ (eh + a) = (h + ae)2 + k 2

Þ (eh + a)2 = (h + ae)2 + k2 [squaring both sides]

Þ e2h2 + 2eah + a2 = h2 + 2eah + a2e2 + k2

h2 k2
Þ h2 (1 – e2) + k2 = a2 (1 – e2) Þ + =1
a2 a2 (1 - e2 )

x2 y2
Hence the locus of (h, k) is 2
+ 2 =1
a a (1 - e2 )

æ 3 - 1ö æ 1 1 ö æ 1ö
Ex.9 The orthocentre of triangle with vertices ç 2, 2 ÷ , ç , - ÷ and ç 2, - ÷ is :-
è ø è 2 2ø è 2ø

æ3 3 - 3ö é 1ù æ 1 1ö æ 5 3 - 2ö
(1) ç 2 , - 6 ÷ (2) ê2, - ú (3) çè , - ÷ø (4) ç 4 , 4 ÷
è ø ë 2û 2 2 è ø

Sol.(2) Here

2 2
æ 1ö æ 3ö
AB = çè 2 - ÷ +ç ÷ = 3
2ø è 2 ø

2 2
æ1 ö æ 1 1ö 3
BC = çè 2 - 2÷ø + çè - 2 + 2 ÷ø =
2

E
18 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
2
æ 1 3 - 1ö 3
CA = (2 - 2 )2 + ç - 2 - 2 ÷ø
=
è 2

Here BC2 + CA2 = AB2

\ DABC is right - angled triangle

æ 1ö
Thus point C ç 2, - ÷ is the ortho-centre
è 2ø

Ex.10 If t1,t2 and t3 are distinct, the points (t1,2at1 + at13), (t2, 2at2 + at23) and (t3, 2at3 + at33) are collinear if-
(1) t1 t3 t3 = 1 (2) t1 + t2 + t3 = t1 t2 t3 (3) t1 + t2 + t3 = 0 (4) t1 + t2 + t3 = –1
Sol.(3) The given points are collinear if

t1 2at1 + at13 1 t1 2t1 + t13 1

t2 2at 2 + at 23 1 = 0 Þ a t 2 2t2 + t23 1 = 0
t3 2at 3 + at33 1 t3 2t 3 + t 33 1

Applying R2 ® R2 – R1, R3 ® R3 – R1, we get

t1 2t1 + t13 1
(
t 2 - t1 2(t2 - t1 ) + t 23 - t13 ) 0 =0
3 2
t 3 - t1 2(t 3 - t1 ) + (t - t )
3 1 0

t1 2t1 + t13 1
2 2
1 2 + t2 + t1 + t 2 t1 0 = 0
Þ (t2 – t1) (t3 – t1)
1 2 + t 23 + t12 + t 3 t1 0

Þ (t2 – t1) (t3 – t1) (t3 – t2) (t3 + t2 + t1) = 0

Þ t1 + t2 + t3 [Q t1¹ t2 ¹ t3]

Ex.11 The vertices of a triangle are A (0, –6), B (–6, 0) and C (1, 1) respectively, then coordinates of the excentre
opposite to vertex A is :-
(1) (–3/2, –3/2) (2) (–4, 3/2) (3) (–3/2, 3/2) (4) (–4, –6)

Sol.(4) a = BC = ( -6 - 1)2 + (0 - 1)2 = 50 = 5 2

b = CA = (1 - 0)2 + (1 + 6)2 = 50 = 5 2

c = AB = (0 + 6)2 + ( -6 - 0)2 = 72 = 6 2
coordinates of Ex-centre opposite to vertex A are

-ax1 + bx 2 + cx3 -5 2 .0 + 5 2(-6) + 6 2(1) -24 2

x= = = =–4
-a + b + c -5 2 + 5 2 + 6 2 6 2

-ay1 + by 2 + cy 3 -5 2( -6) + 5 2 .0 + 6 2(1) 36 2

y= = = = 6
-a + b + c -5 2 + 5 2 + 6 2 6 2

Hence coordinates of ex-centre are (–4, 6)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 19
Ex.12 The coordinates of the foot of the perpendiculars from the vertices of a triangle on the opposite sides are
(20,25), (8,16) and (8,9). The orthocentre of the triangle lies at the point-
(1) (5,10) (2) (15,30) (3) (10,15) (4) (50,–5)
Sol.(3) Let ABC be the triangle and D,E,F represent the given A
points respectively, then DEF is the pedal triangle. From
geometry we know that orthocentre of the triangle ABC
is the incentre of the pedal triangle DEF. If O(h,k) denotes (8,9) F
the orthocentre of the triangle ABC, then from DDEF, E (8,16)

DE = (20 - 8)2 + (25 - 16)2 = 122 + 92 = 15 B D C

(20,25)
EF = 7 and FD = 20

20 ´ 8 + 7 ´ 20 + 15 ´ 8 160 + 140 + 120

so that h = = = 10
7 + 15 + 20 42

20 ´ 16 + 7 ´ 25 + 15 ´ 9
and k = = 15
7 + 15 + 20

Ex.13 The line joining A (b cos a, b sin a) and B (a cos b, a sin b) is produced to the point M(x,y) so that

a+b a+b
AM : MB = b : a, then x cos + y sin =
2 2
(1) –1 (2) 0 (3) 1 (4) a2 + b2
Sol.(2) As M divides AB externally in the ratio b : a

b(a cos b) - a(b cos a ) b(a sin b) - a(b sin a )

x= and y=
b-a b-a

a+b a -b
2sin sin
x cos b - cos a 2 2 a+b a +b
Þ = = Þ x cos + y sin =0
y sin b - sin a a+b b-a 2 2
2 cos sin
2 2

Ex.14 If the origin is shifted to (1, –2) and axis are rotated through an angle of 30° the co-ordinate of (1, 1) in the
new position are.
æ 3 3 3ö æ 3 3 3ö æ 3 3 2ö
(1) ç 2 , 2 ÷ (2) ç 2 , 2 ÷ (3) ç 2 , 2 ÷ (4) none of these
è ø è ø è ø
Sol.(2) If coordinates are (x' , y') then
x = h + x' cos a – y' sin a
y = k + x' sin a + y' cos a
where, (x, y) = (1, 1), (h, k) = (1, –2), a = 30°
\ 1 = 1 + x' cos 30 – y' sin 30

Þ x' 3 - y ' = 0

and 1 = – 2 + x' sin 30 + y' cos 30

x '+ y ' 3 3 3 3
Þ 3= Þ x' = , y' =
2 2 2
E
20 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.15 The co-ordinates of A,B,C are (6,3) (–3,5), (4,–2) respectively and P is any point (x,y). Show that the ratio of

x + y -2
the areas of DPBC and DABC is .
7

Sol. Area of triangle PBC

1
= |5x + 3y + 6 – 20 + 4y + 2x|
2
x y
1 1 –3 5
= |7x + 7y – 14|
2 2 4 –2
x y
7
= |x + y – 2|
2
and area of DABC
6 3

1 1 –3 5
= |30 + 9 + 6 – 20 + 12 + 12| 2 4 –2
2
6 3
49
=
2
7
|x + y - 2|
area of DPBC 2
=
\ area of DABC 49
2
x+ y -2
= , as required.
7

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 21

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the distance between the points :

(i) A(2, –3) and B(–6, 3)

(ii) C(–1, –1) and D(8, 11)

(iii) P(–8, –3) and Q(–2, –5)

(iv) R(a+b, a–b) and S(a–b, a + b)

2. Find a point on the x-axis which is equidistant from the points A(7, 6) and B(–3, 4).

3. A is a point on the x-axis with abscissa –8 and B is a point on the y-axis with ordinate 15. Find the distance AB.

4. Find a point on the y-axis which is equidistant from A(–4, 3) and B(5,2).

5. Show that the points A(7, 10), B(–2, 5) and C(3, –4) are the vertices of an isosceles right - angled triangle.

6. Show that the points A(2, –2), B(8, 4), C(5, 7) and D(–1, 1) are the vertices of a rectangle.

7. Show that A(3, 2), B(0, 5), C(–3, 2) and D(0, –1) are the vertices of a square.

8. Show that A(1,–2), B(3, 6), C(5, 10) and D(3, 2) are the vertices of a parallelogram.

9. Show that the points A(2, –1), B(3, 4), C(–2, 3) and D(–3, –2) are the vertices of a rhombus.

10. If the points A(–2, –1), B(1, 0), C(x, 3) and D(1, y) are the vertices of a parallelogram, find the values of x and
y.

11. Find the area of DABC whose vertices are A(–3, –5), B(5, 2) and C(–9, –3).

12. Show that the points A(–5, 1), B(5, 5) and C(10, 7) are collinear.

13. Find the value of k for which the points A(–2, 3), B(1, 2) and C(k, 0) are collinear.

14. Find the area of the quadrilateral whose vertices are A(–4, 5), B(0, 7), C(5, –5) and D(–4, –2).

15. Find the coordinates of the point which divides the join of A(–5, 11) and B(4, –7) internally in the ratio 2 : 7.

16. Find the ratio in which the x-axis cuts the join of the points A(4, 5) and B(–10, –2). Also, find the point of
intersection.

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

1. (i) 10 units (ii) 15 units (iii) 2 10 units ( )

(iv) 2 2b units 2. (3, 0) 3. 17

4. (0, –2) 10. x = 4, y = 2 11. 29 sq. units 13. k=7

14. 60.5 sq. units 15. (–3, 7) 16. 5 : 2, (–6, 0)

E
22 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
CHECK YOUR GRASP POINT EXERCISE-I
SYSTEM OF CO-ORDINATES 10. The triangle with vertices (–2, 2) ; (8,–2) and
(–4,–3) is:-
1. (
The polar coordinates of a point - 3,1 are:- ) (1) isosceles (2) equilateral
(3) right angle (4) none of these
(1) (2, 5p/6) (2) (2, 7p/6)
11. If the points (1, 1), (–1, –1) and ( - 3,k) are vertices
(3) (2, p/6) (4) (2, 11p/6)
of an equilateral triangle then the value of k will
3p ö
be-
æ
2. If polar coordinate of a point are ç 2, – then
è 4 ÷ø (1) –1 (2) 1 (3) 3 (4) - 3
12. If vertices of a triangle are (0, 4), (4, 1) and (7, 5),
its Cartesian coordinates are :- then its perimeter is :-
(1) (1, –1) (2) (–1, –1)
(1) 5( 2 + 5) (2) 2 2
(3) (–1, 1) (4) (1, 1)
(3) 5(2 + 2) (4) 2 5
3. The polar coordinates of (– 3 , –1) are :-
13. The triangle with vertices A (2,7), B(4,y) and
(1) (2, p/6) (2) (2, 5p/6) C(–2,6) is right angled at A if-
(3) (2, –5p/6) (4) none of these (1) y = – 1 (2) y = 0
(3) y = 1 (4) none of these
4. Cartesian coordinates of (2, p/4) are :-
SECTION FORMULA
(1) (2, 2) (2) ( 2,2)
14. If the middle point of the line segment joining the
(3) ( 2, 2) (4) ( - 2, - 2) points (5, a) and (b, 7) be (3, 5), then (a, b) is :-
(1) (3, 1) (2) (–2, –2)
DISTANCE FORMULA (3) (1 , 3) (4) (–3, –1)
15. The point (5, –1) divides the line segment joining
5. The distance between the points (2, 15°) and
points A and B in the ratio 2 : 3. If A is (11, –3),
(1, 75°) is:- then B will be :-
(1) 3 (2) 1 (1) (4, –2) (2) (4, 2)
(3) 2 3 (3) (–4, 2) (4) (–4,–2)
(4) 3
16. The line segment joining the points (–3, –4) and
6. The coordinates of a point are (0, 1) and the ordinate (1, 2) is divided by y-axis in the ratio :-
of another point is –3. If distance between the two (1) 2 : 3 (2) 1 : 3 (3) 3 : 1 (4) 3 : 2
points is 5 then the abscissa of another point is- 17. If P,Q,R are collinear points such that P (7, 7),
(1) –3 (2) 3 Q (3, 4) and PR = 10, then R is :-
(1) (1, 1) (2) (1, –1)
(3) ±3 (4) 1
(3) (–1, 1) (4) (–1, –1)
7. The distance of the point (6,8) from x-axis is-
18. The coordinates of the point which divides the line
(1) 10 (2) 6 segment joining (–3, –4) and (–8, 7) externally in
(3) 8 (4) None the ratio 7 : 5 are :-
8. The number of points on x-axis which are at a (1) (41/2, 69/2) (2) (–41/2, –69/2)
distance c units (c < 3 ) from (2,3) is- (3) (–41/2, 69/2) (4) none of these
(1) 1 (2) 2 19. The ratio in which the point (8, 4) divides the line
segment joining the points (5, –2) and (9, 6) is :-
(3) 0 (4) 3
(1) 2 : 1 (2) 3 : 1
APPLICATIONS OF DISTANCE FORMULA (3) 2 : 3 (4) 1 : 2
9. The points (0, –1) ; (2, 1) ; (0, 3) and (–2, 1) are 20. If x-axis divides the line joining (3, 4) and (5, 6) in
vertices of a :- the ratio l : 1 then l is :-
(1) rectangle (2) square 3 2 3 1
(3) rhombus (4) parallelogram (1) - (2) - (3) (4)
2 3 4 3
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 23
21. Coordinates of trisection of line joining points 31. If the orthocentre and centroid of a triangle are
(–3, –3) and (6, 6) is :-
(–3,5) and (3,3) then its circumcentre is-
(1) (0, 0), (3, –3) (2) (0, 0), (3, 3)
(3) (1, 1), (3, 3) (4) (1, 1), (–3, 3) (1) (6,2) (2) (3,–1)
22. The line segment joining the points (3, 4) and (3) (–3,5) (4) (–3,1)
(7, 8) is divided by the line 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 in the
32. Orthocentre of a triangle whose vertex are (8, –2),
ratio :-
(1) 1/5 : 9 externally (2) 5 : 9 internally (2, –2) and (8, 6) is :-
(3) 5 : 1/9 externally (4) 5 : 9 externally (1) (8, –2) (2) (8, 6)
23. A(–3, 4) and B(2, 1) be any two given points. If C
æ 18 2 ö
be a point on AB produced such that AC = 2BC, (3) ç , ÷ (4) (0, 0)
è 3 3ø
then the coordinates of C are :-
33. A triangle whose vertex are (2, 3), (4, 5) and
(1) (3, 7) (2) (2 , 4)
(–2, 11) distance between circumcentre and vertex
(3) (7, –2) (4) (–1/2, –5/2)
(4, 5) is-
PROPERTY OF TRIANGLE
24. If the vertices of a triangle be (0, 0), (6, 0) and (1) 2 (2) 4 5 (3) 2 5 (4) 4

(6, 8) then its incentre will be :- 34. If A (4, –3), B(3, –2) and C (2, 8) are vertices of a
(1) (1, 2) (2) (2, 1) (3) (4, 2) (4) (2, 4) triangle, then the distance of its centroid from
25. The circumcentre of the triangle with vertices y-axis is :-
(0, 0), (3, 0) and (0, 4) is :- (1) 9/2 (2) 1 (3) 3 (4) 1/2
(1) (1, 1) (2) (2, 3/2) 35. A triangle whose vertex are (2, –2), (8, –2), (8, 6)
(3) (3/2, 2) (4) none of these excentre opposite to vertex (2, –2) is :-
26. The distance of the centroid from the origin of the (1) (–4, 10) (2) (4, 6)
triangle formed by the points (1, 1), (0, –7) and (3) (14, 4) (4) (4, 14)
(–4, 0) is:- AREA OF TRIANGLE & QUADRILATERAL
(1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4) 5 36. Area of the triangle with vertices (4, 4), (3, –2) and
27. If two vertices joining the hypotenuse of a right (3, –16) is :-
angled triangle are (0, 0) and (3, 4), then the length (1) 7 (2) 18
of the median through the vertex having right (3) 15 (4) 27
angle is- 37. If (5, –4) and (–3, 2) are two opposite vertices of a
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 5/2 (4) 7/2 square then its area is :-
28. The co-ordinates of the middle points of the sides (1) 50 (2) 75
of a triangle are (4,2), (3,3) and (2,2), then (3) 25 (4) 100
co-ordinates of centroid are : 38. For what value of k the points (k, 2 – 2k), (1 – k, 2k)
(1) (3, 7/3) (2) (3,3) and (–4 – k, 6 – 2k) are collinear
(3) (4,3) (4) (3,4) (1) 1, –1/2 (2) 1, 1/2
29. If the vertices of a triangle be (a, b – c), (b, c – a) (3) –1, 1/2 (4) –1, –1/2
and (c, a – b), then the centroid of the triangle lies- 39. The condition that three points (a, 0), (0, b) and
(1) On y-axis (2) On x-axis (1, 1) are collinear is :-
(3) at origin (4) none of these
1 1 1 1
30. If (–4, 6), (2, 3) and (–2, –5) are vertices of a triangle, (1) + =2 (2) + =1
a b a b
then its incentre is :- 1 1 1 1
(3) + =0 (4) =
(1) (–1, 2) (2) (2, –1) a b a b
(3) (1, 2) (4) (2, 1)
E
24 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
40. The area of the triangle formed by the points TRANSFORMATION OF AXES
(a, b + c), (b, c + a), (c, a + b) is :-
(1) a2 + b2 + c2 (2) abc 46. On shifting the origin to the point (2, –5) and keeping

(3) ab + bc + ca (4) 0 the axis parallel, the new coordinates of the point (–5,

LOCUS 3) will be :-

41. If the distance of any point P from the point (1) (7, –8) (2) (–3, –2)
A (a + b, b – a) and B (a – b, a + b) are equal, then (3) (–7, 8) (4) none of these
locus of P is :- 47. Reflecting the point (2, –1) about y-axis, coordinate
(1) ax – by = 0 (2) bx – ay = 0 axis are rotated at 45° angle in negative direction
(3) bx + ay = 0 (4) ax + by = 0 without shifting the origin. The new coordinates
42. If A (cosa, sin a), B (sina, –cos a), C (1, 2) are the of the point are :-
vertices of a DABC, then as a varies, the locus of
its centroid is :- æ 1 3 ö æ 1 3 ö
(1) çè - ,- ÷ (2) çè , ÷
(1) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 3 = 0 2 2ø 2 2ø
(2) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0
(3) 3 (x2 + y2) – 2x – 4y + 1 = 0 æ 3 1 ö
(3) çè - , ÷ (4) none of these
(4) none of these 2 2ø
43. If A (c, 0) and B (–c, 0) are two points, then the
48. The reflection of the point (1, –2) with respect to
locus of a point P which moves such that
y-axis is :-
PA2 + PB2 = AB2 is :-
(1) x2 – y2 = c2 (2) y2 = 4cx (1) (–1, –2) (2) (–1, 2)

(3) x2 + y2 = c2 (4) none of these (3) (1, 2) (4) none of these

44. If sum of square of distance of a point from axes is 49. The image of (4, –5) w.r.t the line y = x is-
4, then its locus is :- (1) (–4, –5) (2) (4, 5)
(1) x + y = 2 (2) x2 + y2 = 16 (3) (–4, 5) (4) (–5,4)
(3) x + y = 4 (4) x + y = 4
2 2
50. If the axes are rotated through an angle of 30° in
45. The locus of the moving point P, such that the anti-clockwise direction, the coordinates of
2PA = 3PB where A is (0, 0) and B is (4, –3) is :- points (4, -2 3 ) with respect to new axes are :-
(1) 5x2 + 5y2 + 72x + 54y + 225 = 0
(2) 5x2 – 5y2 + 72x + 54y + 225 = 0 (1) (2, 3) (2) ( 3, -5)
(3) 5x2 – 5y2 – 72x + 54y + 225 = 0
(3) (2 , 3) (4) ( 3,2)
(4) 5x2 + 5y2 – 72x + 54y + 225 = 0

CHECK YOUR GRASP ANSWER KEY Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 1 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 2 3
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 2 4 3 3 3 4 3 1 2 1
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 4
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. 2 3 3 4 4 3 1 1 4 2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 25

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS POINT EXERCISE-II

1. The points (–a,–b), (0,0), (a,b) and (a2,ab) are- 8. Let A(h,k), B(1,1) and C(2,1) be the vertices of a
[AIEEE-2002] right angled triangle with AC as its hypotenuse. If
(1) collinear the area of the triangle is 1, then the set of values
(2) concyclic which 'k' can take is given by- [AIEEE - 2007]
(3) vertices of a rectangle (1) {1,3} (2) {0,2}
(4) vertices of a parallelogram (3) {–1,3} (4) {–3,–2}
2. The centroid of a triangle is (2,3) and two of its 9. If the sum of the distance of a point from two
vertices are (5,6) and (–1,4). The third vertex of perpendicular lines in a plane is 1, then its locus
the triangle is- [AIEEE-2002]
is- [IIT-1992]
(1) (2,1) (2) (2,–1)
(1) square (2) circle
(3) (1,2) (4) (1,–2)
(3) straight line (4) two intersecting lines
3. Locus of centroid of the triangle whose vertices are
(a cos t, a sin t), (b sin t, – b cos t) and (1,0), where 10. If P(1,0), Q(–1,0) and R(2,0) are three given points,
t is a parameter, is- [AIEEE 2003] then the locus of S satisfying the relation
2 2
(1) (3x + 1) + (3y) = a – b 2 2 SQ2 + SR2 = 2SP2 is- [IIT-1993]

(2) (3x – 1)2 + (3y)2 = a2 – b2 (1) a st. line || to x-axis

(3) (3x – 1)2 + (3y)2 = a2 + b2 (2) a circle thro' the origin
(4) (3x + 1)2 + (3y)2 = a2 + b2 (3) a circle with centre at the origin
4. If the equation of the locus of a point equidistant (4) a st. line || to y-axis
from the points (a1 ,b 1 ) and (a 2 ,b 2 ) is 11. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by the lines
(a1–a2)x + (b1–b2)y + c = 0, then the value of 'c' xy=0 and x + y = 1 is- [IIT-1995]
is- [AIEEE 2003]
æ1 1ö æ1 1ö æ1 1ö
(1) a12 + b12 - a22 - b22 (1) ç , ÷ (2) ç , ÷ (3) (0,0) (4) ç , ÷
è2 2ø è3 3ø è4 4ø
1 12. If the vertices P,Q,R of a triangle PQR are rational
(2) (a 2 + b22 – a12 – b12) points, which of the following points of the triangle
2 2
PQR is (are) not always rational points (s) ?
(3) a12 – a22 + b12 – b22 [IIT-1998]
(1) Centroid (2) Incentre
1
(4) (a 2 + a22 + b12 + b12) (3) Circumcentre (4) Orthocentre
2 1
13. If P(1,2), Q(4,6) R(5,7) and S(a,b) are the vertices
5. Let A(2,–3) and B(–2,1) be vertices of a triangle
of a parallelogram PQRS, then- [IIT-1998]
ABC. If the centroid of this triangle moves on the
line 2x + 3y = 1, then the locus of the vertex C is (1) a = b, b = 4 (2) a = 3, b = 4
the line- [AIEEE-2004, 2011] (3) a = 2, b = 3 (4) a = 3, b = 5
(1) 2x + 3y = 9 (2) 2x – 3y = 7 14. If x1,x2,x3 as well as y1,y2,y3 are in G.P. with the
same common ratio, then the points (x1,y1) , (x2,y2)
(3) 3x + 2y = 5 (4) 3x –2y = 3
and (x3,y3) - [IIT-1999]
6. Let P be the point (1,0) and Q a point on the curve
(1) lie on a straight line
y2 = 8x. The locus of mid point of PQ is-
(2) lie on an ellipse
[AIEEE-2005]
(1) y2 – 4x + 2 = 0 (2) y2 + 4x + 2 = 0 (3) lie on a circle
(3) x + 4y + 2 = 0
2
(4) x2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (4) None of these
7. If a vertex of a triangle is (1,1) and the mid points 15. The incentre of the triangle with vertices (1, 3) ,
of two sides through this vertex are (–1,2) and (3,2),
(0,0) and (2,0) is- [IIT-2000, AIEEE-2002]
then the centroid of the triangle is- [AIEEE - 2005]
æ 3ö æ2 1 ö
æ 7ö æ -1 7 ö (1) çç 1, 2 ÷÷ (2) ç , ÷
(1) ç -1, ÷ (2) ç , ÷ è ø è3 3ø
è 3ø è 3 3ø

æ2 3ö æ 1 ö
æ 7ö æ1 7ö
(3) ç 1, ÷ (4) ç , ÷ (3) çç 3 , 2 ÷÷ (4) ç 1, ÷
è 3ø è3 3ø è ø è 3ø

E
26 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
16. Orthocentre of the triangle whose vertices are 23. Two vertices of a triangle are (0,2) and (4,3). If its
A(0,0), B(3,4) & C(4,0) is- [IIT-2003] orthocentre is at the origin, then its third vertex lies
in which quadrant ? [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
æ 3ö æ 5ö
(1) ç 3, ÷ (2) ç 3, ÷ (1) Fourth (2) Second
è 4ø è 4ø
(3) Third (4) First
(3) (3,12) (4) (2,0)
24. Let O(0, 0) and A(0, 1) be two fixed points. Then
17. Let O(0,0), P(3,4), Q(6,0) be the vertices of the
the locus of a point P such that the perimeter of
triangle OPQ. The point R inside the triangle OPQ
DAOP is 4, is : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
is such that the triangles OPR, PQR, OQR are of
(1) 8x – 9y + 9y = 18
2 2
equal area. The coordinates of R are- [IIT-2007]
(2) 9x2 + 8y2 – 8y = 16
æ4 ö æ 2ö æ 4ö æ4 2ö (3) 8x2 + 9y2 – 9y = 18
(1) ç ,3 ÷ (2) ç 3, ÷ (3) ç 3, ÷ (4) ç , ÷
è3 ø è 3ø è 3ø è3 3ø (4) 9x2 – 8y2 + 8y = 16
25. Some identical balls are arranged in rows to form
18. If two vertices of a triangle are (5, –1) and(–2, 3)
an equilateral triangle. The first row consists of one
and its orthocentre is at (0, 0), then the third vertex
ball, the second row consists of two balls and so on.
is :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
If 99 more identical balls are addded to the total
(1) (4, –7) (2) (–4, 7)
number of balls used in forming the equilaterial
(3) (–4, –7) (4) (4, 7)
triangle, then all these balls can be arranged in a
19. The x-coordinate of the incentre of the triangle that square whose each side contains exactly 2 balls less
has the coordinates of mid points of its sides as than the number of balls each side of the triangle
(0, 1)(1, 1) and (1, 0) is : [JEE(Main)-2013] contains. Then the number of balls used to form the
(1) 2 + 2 (2) 2 - 2 equilateral triangle is :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(1) 190 (2) 262
(3) 1 + 2 (4) 1 - 2
(3) 225 (4) 157
20. The number of points, having both co-ordinates as
26. A triangle has a vertex at (1, 2) and the mid points
integers, that lie in the interior of the triangle with
of the two sides through it are (–1, 1) and (2,3). Then
vertices (0, 0), (0, 41) and (41, 0) is :
the centroid of this triangle is :
[JEE(Main)-2015]
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(1) 820 (2) 780 (3) 901 (4) 861
21. Let S be the set of all triangles in the xy-plane, each æ1 ö æ1 ö
(1) ç ,1 ÷ (2) ç ,2 ÷
having one vertex at the origin and the other two è3 ø è3 ø
vertices lie on coordinate axes with integral
coordinates. If each triangle in S has area 50sq. æ 7ö æ1 5ö
(3) ç 1, ÷ (4) ç , ÷
units, then the number of elements in the set S is:- è 3ø è3 3ø
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
æ3 ö
(1) 9 (2) 18 (3) 32 (4) 36 27. Let A(1, 0), B(6, 2) and C ç ,6 ÷ be the vertices
è2 ø
22. A point P moves on the line 2x – 3y + 4 = 0. of a triangle ABC. If P is a point inside the
IfQ(1,4) and R(3,–2) are fixed points, then the locus triangle ABC such that the triangles APC, APB and
of the centroid of DPQR is a line : BPC have equal areas, then the length of the line
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
2 æ 7 1ö
segment PQ, where Q is the point ç - , - ÷ , is
(1) parallel to x-axis (2) with slope è 6 3ø
3 __________.
3 [JEE(Main)-January,2020]
(3) with slope (4) parallel to y-axis
2
PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS ANSWER KEY Exercise-II
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 1 2 3 2 1 1 3 3 1 4
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 3 1 4 1 3 3 2 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Ans. 4 2 2 2 1 2 5.00

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 27
STRAIGHT LINE
DEFINITION :

A Straight line is defined as the curve which is such that the line segment joining any two
points on it lies wholly on it.

1. EQUATION OF STRAIGHT LINE :

A relation between x and y which is satisfied by co-ordinates y-axis

of every point lying on a line is called the equation of Straight
x=0
Line. Every linear equation in two variable x and y always
represents a straight line. y=0
x-axis
O
eg. 2x + 3y = 4, 3x – 5y + 1 = 0 etc.
General form of straight line is given by
ax + by + c = 0

2. EQUATION OF STRAIGHT LINE PARALLEL TO AXES :

y
(i) Equation of x axis Þ y = 0 y=a
Equation of a line parallel to x axis

x=0
a
(or perpendicular to y axis) at a distance 'a' from it Þ y = |a| x' x
O y=0

y=–a
y'

y
a x=a
(ii) Equation of y axis Þ x = 0
Equation of a line parallel to y axis x' x=0 x
O y=0
(or perpendicular to x axis) at a distance 'a' from it Þ x = |a| x=–a
y'
y
eg. Equation of a line which is parallel to y-axis and at a distance of 4 units
in the negative direction is x = –4.
x' x
O
x=–4
y'
3. SLOPE OF A LINE :
Y
If q is the angle made by a line with the positive direction of x axis in B
anticlockwise sense, then the value of tanq is called the slope (also called
gradient) of the line and is denoted by m or slope Þ m = tan q
eg. A line which is making an angle of 45° with the x axis then its slope p+q
is m = tan 45° = 1 q
X' O X
p-q
Note : Y' A
(i) Slope of x axis or a line parallel to x axis is tan 0° = 0 Y
(ii) Slope of y axis or a line parallel to y axis is tan 90° = ¥
(x2,y2)Q
(iii) Slope of the line which is equalls inclined with coordinate axes is ± 1
(iv) The slope of a line joining two points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is given by (x1,y1)P q y2
N
y 2 - y1 y1
m= A q
x 2 - x1 X'
O L M X
x1
2 -1 1 x2
eg. Slope of a line joining two points (5,1) and (9, 2) is = =
9-5 4 Y'

E
28 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
4. DIFFERENT FORMS OF THE EQUATION OF STRAIGHT LINE :

4.1 Slope - Intercept Form :

Y
The equation of a line with slope m and making an inter-
B
cept c on y-axis is y = mx + c If the line passes through P(x,y)
the origin, then c = 0. Thus the equation of a line with slope q
Q M
m and passing through the origin y = mx . c
q
X' X
R O L
Ex.1 Find the equation of the straight line cutting off an inter-
A
cept of 3 units on negative direction of y-axis and inclined
æ3ö Y'
at an angle tan -1 ç ÷ to the axis of x.
è5ø
æ3ö 3
Sol. Here c=–3 and q = tan–1 ç ÷ or tan q = =m Hence the equation of the line y = mx + c
è5ø 5
3
i.e., y = x - 3 or 3x – 5y – 15 = 0
5
Ex.2 Equation of a line which is making an angle of 60° with the x axis and an intercept of 5 unit length in negative
direction of y axis is

Sol. y = mx + c here m = tan 60° = 3 , c = –5 equation is y = 3x–5

Ex.3 Equation of a line which is passing through origin and making an angle of 45° with the x axis is here
m = tan 45° = 1
Y B
So the equation is y = x or x – y = 0
4.2 Slope Point Form : P(x,y)
)
,y 1
The equation of a line with slope m and passing
Q (x 1 q
N
through a point (x1, y1) is y – y = m (x – x ) .
1 1

X' q X
O M L
Ex.4 Find the equation of the straight line bisecting the segment R
joining the points (5,3) and (4,4) and making an angle of A
45° with the positive direction of x-axis. Y'
Sol. Here, m = slope of the line = tan 45° = 1
æ5+4 3+4ö æ9 7ö
Let A be the mid point of (5,3) and (4,4). Then the co-ordinates of A are ç 2 , 2 ÷ i.e. ç , ÷ .
è ø è2 2ø
Hence the required equation of the line is

7 æ 9ö
y- = 1ç x - ÷ or x – y – 1 = 0
2 è 2ø

Ex.5 Equation of a line which is passing through (3, – 4) and making an angle Y B
of 45° with the x axis is- y 1)
(x 1, P(x,y)
Sol. y – (–4) = tan 45° (x – 3) Þ y + 4 = x – 3 Þ x – y – 7 = 0 Q H
y 2)
4.3 Two Point Form : ( x 2,
R K
(i) The equation of a line passing through two given points
(x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is
X' X
y 2 - y1 O N M L
y - y1 = (x - x1 )
x 2 - x1 A
Y'
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 29

(ii) Since points P(x,y), Q(x1,y1) and R(x2,y2) are collinear then area of DPQR = 0

x y 1 x y 1
1
|x y1 1|= 0 x1 y1 1 = 0
i.e., 2 1 or
x2 y2 1 x2 y2 1

which is the required equation of the line.

Ex.6 Equation of a line passing through (3, –4) and (4, 3) is

3+4
Sol. y+4= (x – 3) or y = 7x – 25
4-3
4.4 Intercept Form :

x y
The equation of a line which makes intercept a and b on the x axis and y axis respectively is + =1 .
a b

Here, the length of intercept between the co-ordinates axis = a 2 + b2 Y

(0,b)
B
1 1 P(x,y)
Area of ΔOAB = OA. OB = a.b b
2 2
(a,0)
Ex.7 Find the equation to the straight line which passes through O a A X
the points (3,4) and have intercepts on the axes:
(i) equal in magnitude but opposite in sign
(ii) such that their sum is 14
Sol. (i) Let intercepts on the axes be a and –a respectively.
\ The equation of the line in intercept form is
x y
+ = 1 or x – y = a ..... (1)
a -a
Since, Eq. (1) passes through (3,4), then
3–4=a
\ a = –1
From (1), x–y+1=0
Which is the required equation of the line.
x y
(ii) Let the equation of the line be + =1 ....(1)
a b
This passes through (3,4)
3 4
Therefore + =1 ....(2)
a b
It is given that a + b = 14
\ b = 14 – a
Putting b =14 – a in (2), we get
3 4
+ =1
a 14 - a
Þ 42 – 3a + 4a = 14a – a2 Þ a2–13a + 42 = 0
Þ (a–7) (a – 6) = 0
\ a = 6,7
Then, b = 8,7 (Q b=14–a)
Hence the required equations are
x y x y
+ = 1 and + = 1 i.e., 4x + 3y = 24 and x + y = 7
6 8 7 7
E
30 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
4.5 Normal (Perpendicular) Form of a Line : Y
If p is the length of perpendicular on a line from the origin B R
and a is the inclination of perpendicular with x axis then N
equation of this line is p P(x,y)

x cosa + y sina = p y a
a
X' O x X
L Q
Y' A

Ex.8 The length of perpendicular from the origin to a line is 9 and the line makes an angle of 120° with the positive
direction of y-axis. Find the equation of the line.
Sol. Here a = 60° and p = 9.
\ Equation of the required line is Y
x cos 60° + y sin 60° = 9 B 120°
60° N
æ1ö æ 3ö
Þ x ç 2 ÷ + y çç 2 ÷÷ = 9 9
è ø è ø 30°
60° A
X' O X
or x + y 3 =18
Y'
Ex.9 Equation of a line on which length of perpendicular from origin is 4 and inclination of this perpendicular is
30° with the positive direction of x axis is
x cos 30° + y sin 30° = 4

x 3 y
+ = 4 Þ 3x + y = 8
2 2
B
4.6 Parametric Form (Distance Form) : Y
r P(x,y)
If q be the angle made by a straight line with the positive , y 1)
x
Q( q
1
x axis measured in anticlockwise sense which is passing N
through the point (x1, y1) and r be the distance of any point
(x, y) on the line from the point (x1, y1) then X' q X
O R M L
x – x1 y – y1 A
= = ±r
cos q sin q
Y'

Ex.10 Equation of a line which passes through point A (2, 3) and makes an angle of 45° with x axis. If this line meet
the line x + y + 1 = 0 at point P then distance AP is.
Sol. Here x1 = 2, y1 = 3 and q = 45°

x-2 y-3 y
hence = =r
cos 45° sin 45°
from first two parts Þ x – 2 = y – 3 Þ x – y + 1 = 0 r A(2,3)
P
x' 45°
x
æ r r ö O
Co-ordinate of point P on this line is ç 2 + ,3 + ÷
è 2 2ø
x+y+1=0
If this point is on line x + y + 1 = 0 then y'
æ r ö æ r ö
çè 2 + ÷ø + çè 3 + ÷+1=0
2 2ø
Þr = -3 2
|r| = 3 2

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 31
5. REDUCTION OF GENERAL FORM OF EQUATIONS INTO STANDARD FORMS :
Let Ax + By + C = 0 be the general equation of a striaght line where A and B are not both zero.
(i) Reduction of 'Slope-Intercept' form
Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0
æ Aö æ Cö
Þ y = ç - ÷ x + ç - ÷ (Assuming B ¹ 0)
è B ø è Bø
Comparing it with y = mx + c

A coefficient of x C constant term

we get slope (m) = – =– and y intercept (c) = – = –
B coefficient of y B coefficient of y

(ii) Reduction to 'Intercept' Form

Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0
A B
Þ x+ y =1 (Assuming C ¹ 0)
-C -C
x y
Þ + = 1 (Assuming A ¹ 0, B ¹ 0)
( -C / A) ( -C / B)

x y
Comparing with + =1
a b
C constant term
we get x – intercept (a) = – =–
A coefficient of x

C constant term
and y – intercept (b) = – =–
B coefficient of y
(iii) Reduction to 'Normal' Form
Given equation is Ax + By + C = 0. Let its normal form be xcosa + ysina=p.
Clearly, equations Ax + By + C = 0 and x cos a + y sin a = p represent the same line. Therefore
A B C
= =
cos a sin a -p

Ap Bp
Þ cos a = – and sin a = – ...(1)
C C
2 2
æ Ap ö æ Bp ö
cos a + sin a = 1
2 2
ç- C ÷ + ç- C ÷ =1
è ø è ø

C2 |C|
or p2 = Þ P=
A + B2
2
(A 2 + B2 )

|C| A |C| B
From (1) , cos a = – . , sin a = –
C 2 2
(A + B ) C (A + B2 )
2

Putting the values of cos a, sin a and p in x cos a + y sin a = p, we get

æ - |C| A ö æ -|C| B ö |C|

xç . ÷ + yç . ÷=
ç C (A 2 + B 2 ) ÷ø ç C (A 2 + B 2 ) ÷ø (A 2 + B2 )
è è

æ A ö æ B ö C
Þ çç - 2 ÷
÷x + ç-
ç
÷y =
è (A + B ) ø
2
è (A + B ) ÷ø
2 2
(A + B2 )
2

This is the normal form of the line Ax + By + C = 0.

E
32 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.11 Reduce x + 3y + 4 = 0 to the :
(i) Slope intercept form and find its slope and y-intercept
(ii) Intercept form and find its intercepts on the axes
(iii) Normal form and find the values of p and a.
æ 1 ö æ 4 ö
Sol. (i) Given equations is x+ 3 y + 4 = 0 y = ç- ÷x + ç- ÷
3 y = –x –4 è 3 ø è 3ø
Which is in the slope intercept form y = mx + c,
1
whose slope (m) = - and y- intercept (c) = - 4
3 3
x y
(ii) Given x+ 3 y + 4 = 0 Þ x + 3 y = –4 Þ -4 + -4 / 3 = 1

x y
which is in the intercept form + =1
a b
4
where x-intercept (a) = –4 and y-intercept (b) = -
3
(iii) Given equation is x + 3y+4=0
Þ x+ 3 y = – 4 Þ –x – 3y= 4 (make RHS positive)

æ 1ö æ 3ö
- x + ç - y =2
Dividing both sides by 2
( -1) + ( - 3) = 2 , we
2 get ç
è 2ø
÷ ç 2 ÷÷
è ø
Which is the normal form x cos a + y sin a = p.
1
where cos a = – = –cos 60° = cos (180° – 60°) or cos(180° + 60°)
2
\ a = 120° or 240°

3
and sin a = – = sin60° = sin (180° + 60°) or sin (360° – 60°)
2
\ a = 240° or 300° Hence, a = 240°, p =2
\ Required normal form is x cos 240° + y sin 240° = 2
Ex.12 Equation of a line which passes through (1, –2) and makes equal intercept on axes is :-
(1) x – y – 3 = 0 (2) x + y + 2 = 0 (3) x + y – 1 = 0 (4) x + y + 1 = 0
x y
Sol.(4) Let the equation is + = 1 , given a = b
a b

Q Line passes through (1, –2) \ 1 + -2 = 1 Þ a = – 1

a a
x y
equation is + =1 x + y + 1 = 0
-1 -1
Ex.13 Find the equation of the line equidistant from x = 3 and x = 8.
Sol. Clearly, both the lines are parallel to the Y
Y-axis Fig. The line equidistant from them
x=3 x=8
must also be parallel to the Y-axis. Let the k
line be x = k. Then, k – 3 = 8 – k. 8
11
Þ 2k = 11 Þ k = 3
2
Thus, the required line is
X
O
11
x= or , 2x – 11 = 0
2 l
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 33
Ex.14 x and y intercepts of line 2x – 3y = 6 are :-
1 1 1 1
(1) , (2) 2, –3 (3) 3, –2 (4) ,
2 3 3 2
Sol.(3) 2x – 3y = 6
2x 3y x y x y
- =1 Þ - =1 Þ + =1
6 6 3 2 3 -2
a = 3, b = –2
Ex.15 The vertices of a triangle are A(4,–2), B(2,3) and C(5,–4). Find the equation of the median through C.
æ2+4 3-2ö æ 1ö
Sol. Coordinates of the mid-point D (Fig) of AB are ç , ÷ i.e., ç 3, 2 ÷
è 2 2 ø è ø
A(4,–2)
Thus, the median through C is
1
- ( -4)
y - ( -4) = 2 (x - 5) (Two-point form) D
3-5
9
B
2 C
or, y + 4 = (x – 5) or, 9(x – 5) = –4(y + 4) (2,3)
(5,–4)
-2
or, 9x + 4y – 29 = 0
Ex.16 Determine the point of intersection of the straight line 3x – 2y – 6 = 0 with the axes of coordinates.
Sol. For the point on the X-axis, we have y = 0.
\ 3x – 2 × 0 – 6 = 0 Þ x = 2. Thus, the coordinates of the point where the line intersects the X-axis are
(2,0).
Now, for the point where the line meets the Y-axis, we have x = 0 \ 3 × 0 – 2y – 6 = 0 Þ y = –3
\ The point of intersection of the line with the Y-axis is (0,–3).
Ex.17 Length of perpendicular from the origin to the line 3x + 4y = 10 is :-
(1) 5 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) 4

3x 4y 10 3x 4y
Sol.(3) Converting the given equation into normal form by dividing 32 + 42 = 5 is + = Þ + =2
5 5 5 5 5
comparing with x cos a + y sin a = p Þ p = 2
Ex.18 Coordinates of a point which is at +3 distance from points (1, –3) of line 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is :-
æ 9 6 ö æ 9 6 ö æ 9 6 ö æ 9 6 ö
(1) çè 1 + ,3 - ÷ø (2) çè 1 - , -3 + ÷ø (3) çè 1 + , -3 + ÷ø (4) çè 1 - ,3 - ÷
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 ø

2
Sol.(2) Slope of given line is = -
3
2
\ tan q = - Hence 90° < q < 180°
3
2 3
\ sin q = , cos q = –
13 13

x -1 y+3
Distance from of line 2x + 3y + 7 = 0 is = =r
æ 3 ö æ 2 ö
çè - ÷ ç ÷
13 ø è 13 ø
9 6
Putting r = 3 we get the co-ordinates of desired points as x – 1 = - ,y+3=
13 13
9 6
or x = 1 – , y = –3 +
13 13
E
34 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
æ 5ö
Ex.19 A line passes through ç 2, ÷ and is such that the portion of it intercepted between the axes is divided at the
è 3ø
point internally in the ratio 5 : 4. Find its equation.
x y
Sol. Let the equation be + = 1 and let it cut the X-axis at A and Y-axis at B. Then, the coordinates of A and B
a b
are (a,0) and (0,b) respectively. The coordinates of the point C which divides AB internally in the ratio 5 : 4
(Fig.) are given by
5.0 + 4.a 4a Y
x= =
5+4 9
5.b + 4.0 5b l
y= = B
5+4 9 (0,b)
2, 5
4a 5b 5 4 3
Given that , = 2 and = C
9 9 3 5
X
9 O A
\ a= and b = 3 (a,0)
2
x y
Hence equation + = 1 Þ 2x + 3y = 9
9/2 3
Ex.20 Normal form of line x + 3 y – 4 = 0 is :-
(1) x cosp/3 – y sinp/3 = 2 (2) x cosp/6 – y sinp/6 = 2
(3) x cosp/3 + y sinp/3 = 2 (4) x cosp/6 + y sinp/6 = 2
Sol.(3) Given line x + 3 y = 4

( 3)
2
dividing both side by + 12 = 2

x 3y
we get + =2
2 2
or x cos p/3 + y sin p/3 = 2

6. POSITION OF POINT RELATIVE TO A LINE :

(i) The point (x1,y1) lies on the line ax + by + c = 0, if ax1 + by1 + c = 0

(ii) The points P(x1,y1) and Q(x2,y2) lie on the same or opposite sides of the line ax + by + c = 0 according

as (ax1 + by1 + c) (ax2 + by2 + c) > 0 or < 0.

Note :
(i) A point (a,b) will lie on origin side of the line ax + by + c = 0, if aa + bb + c and c have same sign.
(ii) A point (a,b) will lie on non-origin side of the line ax + by + c = 0, if aa + bb + c and c have opposite
sign.
Ex.21 Point (3, –4) lies in which side of line 3x – 4y + 5 = 0 :-
Sol. Putting the given point in the equation
3 × 3 – 4 (–4) + 5 = 30
as c and ax1 + by1 + c both are positive, point is on origin side.
Ex.22 Point (3, 4) and (–9, 6) lies on the side of line 7x + 5y – 9 = 0 :-
Sol. Putting both the points in the given equation
Þ 7 × 3 + 5 × 4 – 9 = 32
and 7 × (–9) + 5(6) – 9 = – 42
as both are of opposite sign so they lies opposite side of the given line.
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 35
7. ANGLE BETWEEN TWO STRAIGHT LINES :
The angle between two straight lines y = m1x + c1 and y Y
A
m1 - m2
C
= m2x + c2 is given by tan q = p-q
1 + m1m2 q
q1 q2
X' X
D B

\ m1 = tan q1 & m 2 = tan q 2 Y'

Note :
(i) If any one line is parallel to y axis then the angle between two straight line is given by

1
cotq =|m|or tanq =
|m|
Where m is the slope of other straight line
(ii) If the equation of lines are a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 then above formula would be.

a1 b2 - b1a 2
tanq =
a1a2 + b1 b2

(iii) Here two angles between two lines, but generally we consider the acute angle as the angle between them,
so in all the above formula we take only positive value of tan q.
(iv) If any one line is parallel to x-axis then angle between two straight line is given by tanq =|m|
7.1 Parallel Lines :
Two lines are parallel, then angle between them is 0
m1 - m2
Þ = tan0° = 0 Þ m1 = m2
1 + m1 m 2

a1 b1
Note : Lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 are parallel Û =
a 2 b2
7.2 Perpendicular Lines :
Two lines are perpendicular, then angle between them is 90°
m1 - m2
Þ 1 + m m = tan 90° = ¥ Þ m1m2 = –1
1 2

Note : Lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 are perpendicular then a1a 2 + b1 b2 = 0
7.3 Coincident Lines :
a1 b1 c1
Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 are coincident only and only if Þ a = b = c
2 2 2

Ex.23 Angle between y = x + 5 and y = 3 x – 4 is :-

Sol. here m1 = 1 m2 = 3

1- 3 1- 3
tan q = Þ q = tan–1 = 15°
1+ 3 1+ 3

Ex.24 Angle between x = 9 and x - 3y + 7 = 0 is

1
here one line is parallel to y axis and slope of second line is
3
1
hence tan q = Þ q = 60°
1/ 3
E
36 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.25 Find the angle between the lines joining the points (0,0), (2,3), (2,–2) and (3,5)
Sol. Let the given points be A = (0,0), B = (2,3) and C = (2,–2), D = (3,5).
Let m1 and m2 be the slopes of the lines AB and CD respectively
3-0 3 5 - (-2)
m1 = = , m2 = =7
2-0 2 3 -2

3
-7
m1 - m2 2 11 11 q = tan -1 æ 11 ö
Let q be the acute angle between the lines tan q = = = - = , ç 23 ÷
1 + m1 m 2 æ3ö 23 23 è ø
1 + ç ÷ .7
è2ø
Ex.26 A line passes through the points A(2,–3) and B(6,3). Find the slopes of the lines which are-
(i) parallel to AB (ii) perpendicular to AB
3 - ( -3) 6 3
Sol. Let m be the slope of AB. Then m = = =
6 -2 4 2
(i) Let m1 be the slope of a line parallel to AB, then m1 = m Þ m1 = 3/2
3 2
(ii) Let m be slope of a line perpendicular to AB then m m2 = –1 Þ m = –k Þ m2 = –
2 2 3

Ex.27 If 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 and 4x + ky – 8 = 0 are two parallel lines then k is :-

(1) 3/16 (2) 4/3 (3) 16/3 (4) –4
3 4
Sol. m1 = – m2 = –
4 k
3 4 16
Two lines are parallel if m1= m2 Þ - =- Þk =
4 k 3
Ex.28 If 7x + 3y + 9 = 0 and y = kx + 7 are two perpendicular lines then k is :-
(1) 3/7 (2) –7/3 (3) 3 (4) 7
7
Sol. m1 = – m2 = k
3
7
Two lines are perpendicular if m1m2 =–1 - × k =–1 Þ k = 3/7
3

8. EQUATION OF PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR LINES :

(i) Equation of a line which is parallel to ax + by + c = 0 is ax + by + k = 0

(ii) Equation of a line which is perpendicular to ax + by + c = 0 is bx – ay + k = 0

The value of k in both cases is obtained with the help of additional information given in the problem.

(iii) The equation of the line parallel to ax + by + c = 0 and passing through (x 1,y1) is a(x – x1 ) + b(y – y1 ) = 0

(iv) The equation of the line through (x1,y1) and perpendicular to ax + by + c = 0 is b(x – x1 ) – a(y – y1 ) = 0

Ex.29 Find the general equation of the line which is parallel to 3x – 4y + 5 = 0. Also find such line through the
point (–1,2).
Sol. Equation of any line parallel to 3x – 4y + 5 = 0 is
3x – 4y + l = 0 ...(1)
which is general equation of the line.
Also (1) passes through (–1,2) then
3(–1) –4(2) + l = 0 Þ \ l = 11
Then from (1) required line is 3x – 4y + 11 = 0
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 37
Ex.30 Equation of a line which passes through (4, 6) and parallel to 3x – 7y + 2 = 0 is :-
Sol. Let the equation is 3x – 7y + k = 0 this line passes through (4, 6)
Hence 3(4) – 7(6) + k = 0 Þ k = 30 The required equation is 3x – 7y + 30 = 0
Ex.31 Find the general equation of the line which is perpendicular to x + y + 4 = 0. Also find such line through
the point (1,2).
Sol. Equation of any line perpendicular to x + y + 4 = 0 is
x–y+l=0 ...(1)
which is general equation of the line,
Also (1) passes through (1,2) then
1–2+l=0
\ l=1
Then from (1), required line is
x–y+1=0

9. EQUATION OF STRAIGHT LINES THROUGH (x1 , y1) MAKING AN ANGLE a WITH

y = mx + c : Y
m m tan a P(x1,y1)
If m1 is the slope of the line then m1 =
1 ± m tan a a

m m tan a
Equation of line is (y – y1 ) = (x – x1 )
1± m tan a a
X
c
x+
m
y=
Ex.32 Find the equation of the straight lines passing through the point (2,3) and inclined at p/4 radians to the line
2x + 3y = 5.
Sol. Let slope of the given line 2x + 3y = 5 is m

2
Then m=–
3
\ Equations of required lines are

2
m tan 45°
-
y-3= 3 (x - 2)
æ 2ö
1 ± ç - ÷ tan 45°
è 3ø

1
y–3= (x–2) and y – 3 = –5(x–2)
5
i.e, x – 5y + 13 = 0 and 5x + y – 13 = 0
Ex.33 One vertex of an equilateral triangle is (2, 3) and the equation of the line opposite to the vertex is x+y=2,
then equation of remaining two sides are :-
(1) y – 3 = ± 2 (x – 2) (2) y – 3 = ( )
3 ± 1 (x – 2)

(
(3) y – 3 = 2 ± 3 (x – 2) ) (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Since the two sides make an angle of 60° each with side x + y = 2. Therefore equations of these sides will be

-1 ± tan 60°
y–3= (x – 2)
1 m ( -1) tan 60°

-1 ± 3
= (x – 2) Þ y – 3 = (2 ± 3 ) (x – 2)
1± 3

E
38 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
10. LENGTH OF PERPENDICULAR :

The length P of the perpendicular from the point (x1, y1) on the line ax + by + c = 0 is given by

|ax1 + by1 + c|
P=
a 2 + b2

Note :
(i) Length of perpendicular from origin on the line ax + by + c = 0 is |c / a2 + b2 |
(ii) Length of perpendicular from the point (x1, y1) on the line x cosa + y sina = p is-
|x1cos a + y1sin a – p|
Ex.34 Length of the perpendicular from the point (3, 4) on the line 3x + 4y + 10 = 0 is -

3 ´ 3 + 4 ´ 4 + 10 35
Sol. = =7
3 +42 2 5

10.1 Distance between Two Parallel Lines :

c1 - c2
The distance between two parallel lines ax + by + c1 = 0 and ax + by + c2 = 0 is
a 2 + b2
Note :
c2
c1 -
(i) Distance between two parallel lines ax + by + c1 = 0 and kax + kby + c2 = 0 is k
a 2 + b2
(ii) Distance between two non parallel lines is always zero.
Ex.35 Distance between 3x + 4y + 7 = 0 and 3x + 4y + 22 = 0 is :-

22 - 7 15
Sol. =3 =
3 +4 2 5 2

Ex.36 The points on the line x + y = 4 which lie at a unit distance from the line 4x + 3y = 10 are :-
(1) (–3, 1), (–7,11) (2) (3, 1), (7,11) (3) (3, 1), (–7,11) (4) (1,3), (–7,11)
Sol.(3) Let required point be (x1, y1), then
x1 + y1 = 4 ............(1)
4x + 3y1 - 10
Also as given ± 1 =1
16 + 9
Þ 4x1 + 3y1 = 15 ............(2)
Þ 4x1 + 3y1 = 5 ............(3)
Now (1) and (2) gives x1 = 3, y1 = 1
(1) and (3) gives x1 = –7, y1 = 11
\ required points are (3,1), (–7, 11)
Ex.37 Distance between 3x + 2y + 7 = 0 and 6x + 4y + 3 = 0 is :-

11 11 11
(1) (2) (3) 11 13 (4)
13 2 13 2

3
|7 - |
Sol.(2) 2 = 11/ 2 = 11
3 + 22
2
13 2 3

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 39
11. POINT OF INTERSECTION OF TWO LINES :
Let a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 be two non-parallel lines. If (x1,y1) be the co-ordinates of their
point of intersection,
then a1x1 + b1y1 + c1 = 0
and a2x1 + b2y1 + c2 = 0
Solving these two by cross multiplication, then

x1 y1 1
= =
b1c2 - b2 c1 c1a2 - c2 a1 a1 b2 - a2 b1

æ b1c2 - b2 c1 c1a2 - c2 a1 ö
we get (x1,y1) º ç a b - a b , a b - a b ÷
è 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 ø

æ b1 b2 c1 c2 ö
ç ÷
ç c1 c2 a1 a 2 ÷
,
º ç a1 a2 a1 a 2 ÷
çç ÷
è b1 b2 b1 b2 ÷ø

Note : Here lines are not parallel, they have unequal slopes, then a1b2 – a2b1 ¹ 0.
CONCURRENT LINES
The three given lines are concurrent, if they meet in a point. Hence to prove that three given lines are concurrent,
we proceed as follows :
I Method : Find the point of intersection of any two lines by solving them simultaneously. If this pont satisfies
the third equation also, then the given lines are concurrent.
II Method : The three lines aix + biy + ci = 0, i = 1,2,3 are concurrent if

a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2 = 0
a3 b3 c3

III Method : The condition for the lines P = 0, Q = 0 and R = 0 to be concurrent is that three constants
l,m,n (not all zeros at the same time) can be obtained such that
lP + mQ + nR = 0
Note :
1. The students are advised to follows method I in numerical problems.
2. For finding unknown quantity applying method II.
Ex.38 If three lines 2x + y = 4, 3x + 2y = 3 and ax + 3y = 2 are concurrent then a is -

2 1 -4
Sol. 3 2 -3 = 0 Þ a = 4
a 3 -2

12. BISECTORS OF ANGLES BETWEEN TWO LINES :

(i) Equation of the bisector of angles between the lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 are
a1 x + b1 y + c1 a 2 x + b2 y + c 2
=±
2 2
a +b
1 1 a22 + b22

(ii) To discriminate between the acute angle bisector and the obtuse angle bisector : If q be the
angle between one of the lines and one of the bisector, find tanq. If |tan q|< 1 then 2q < 90° so that
this bisector is the acute angle bisector, If |tanq| > 1, then we get the bisector to be the obtuse angle
bisector.

E
40 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
(iii) For finding Acute (Internal) and Obtuse (External) Angle Bisectors :
Let the equations of the two lines be
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
Taking c1 > 0, c2 > 0 and a1b2 ¹ a2b1
Then equations of the bisectors are

(a1 x + b1 y + c1 ) (a2 x + b 2 y + c2 )
=±
2 2
(a + b )
1 1 (a22 + b 22 )

Conditions Acute angle bisector obtuse angle bisector

a1a2 + b1b2 > 0 – +
a1a2 + b1b2 < 0 + –

Note :
(i) Bisectors are perpendiculars to each other.
(ii) '+' sign gives the bisector of the angle containing origin.

(iii) If a1a2 + b1b2 > 0 then the origin lies in obtuse angle and if a1a2 + b1b2 < 0, then the origin lies in
acute angle.
Ex.39 Find the equation of the bisector of the acute angle between the lines 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x + 5y – 2 = 0.
Sol. The given equation can be written as
3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and –12x – 5y + 2 = 0
Here a1a2 + b1b2 = 3 (–12) –4 (–5) < 0, so positive sign gives the acute angle bisector which is
3x - 4y + 7 -12x - 5y + 2
=
5 13
Þ 99x – 27y + 81 = 0 Þ 11x – 3y + 9 = 0

Note : This is also the bisector of the angle in which origin lies (since c1, c2 are positive and it has been obtained
by taking positive sign)
Ex.40 Find the equation of the bisector of the obtuse angle between the lines 3x–4y+7=0 and 12x+5y–2=0.
Sol. Firstly make the constant terms (c1,c2) positive
3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and –12x – 5y + 2 = 0
Q a1a2 + b1b2 = (3)(–12) + (–4)(–5) = –36 + 20 = –16
\ a1a2 + b1b2 < 0
hence "-" sign gives the obtuse bisector.
(3x - 4y + 7) ( -12x - 5y + 2)
\ Obtuse bisector is =-
2 2
(3) + ( -4) (-12)2 + ( -5)2
Þ 13(3x – 4y + 7) = –5(–12x –5y + 2)
Þ 21x + 77y – 101 = 0
is the obtuse angle bisector.

13. LINES PASSING THROUGH THE POINT OF INTERSECTION OF TWO LINES :

If equation of two lines are P = a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and Q = a2x + b2y + c2 = 0, then the equation of the
lines passing through the point of intersection of these lines is P + lQ = 0 or (a1x + b1y + c ) + l(a2x + b2y + c2) = 0,
Value of l is obtained with the help of the additional information given in the problem.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 41
Ex.41 Equation of a line passing through the point of intersection of x + y – 3 = 0 and 2x – y + 1 = 0 and a
point (2, –3) is :-
Sol. (x + y – 3) + l(2x – y + 1) = 0
as this line also passes through (2, –3)
Hence (2 – 3 – 3) + l(2 × 2 – (–3) + 1) = 0
–4 + 8l = 0 Þ l = 1/2
equation is (x + y – 3) + 1/2(2x – y + 1) = 0
4x + y – 5 = 0

14. HOMOGENEOUS EQUATION :

A Homogeneous equation of degree two of the type ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 always represents a pair of straight
lines passing through the origin and if
(i) h2 > ab Þ Lines are real and distinct

(ii) h2 = ab Þ Lines are real and coincident

(iii) h2 < ab Þ Lines are imaginary with real point of intersection i.e. (0, 0)

Note :

(i) If y = m1x and y = m2x be the two equation represented by ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 then

m1 + m 2 = -2h/b and m1m 2 = a/b

(ii) If q is the acute angle between the pair of straight lines represented by ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0, then

2 h 2 - ab
tanq = and if
a+b

(a) a + b = 0 Þ Lines are perpendicular

(b) h = 0 Þ Lines are equally inclined to the axis

(iii) The equation of the straight lines bisecting the angles between the straight lines,

x 2 - y2 xy
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 is =
a-b h
Ex.42 Lines represented by 2x – 7xy + 3y = 0 are
2 2

Sol. 2x2 – 7xy + 3y2 = 0 = (2x – y) (x – 3y)

\ 2x – y = 0, x – 3y = 0
Ex.43 Angle between the lines 2x2 – 7xy + 3y2 = 0 are
2 ( -7/ 2)2 - 2 ´ 3
Sol. tan q = Þ tan q = 1 Þ q = 45°
2+3

15. GENERAL EQUATION OF SECOND DEGREE :

An equation of the form ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is called the general equation of second

a h g
degree in x and y it represent a pair of two Straight lines if D = h b f = 0
g f c
or Þ abc + 2fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0
E
42 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Note : The angle q between the two lines representing by a general equation is the same as that between
2 h2 - ab
the lines represented by its homogeneous part only i.e. tan q = .
a+b
Ex.44 If lx2 – 10 xy + 12y2 + 5x – 16y – 3 = 0 representes two lines then l is
Sol. here a = l, b = 12, c = –3, h = –5, g = 5/2, f = –8
D = l.12(–3) + 2(–8) (5/2) (–5) –l (–8)2 – 12 (5/2)2 – (–3) (–5)2 = 0
Þl= 2

TO FIND POINT OF INTERSECTION OF LINES REPRESENTED BY

ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 WITH THE HELP OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIATIOIN -
Let f(x,y) º ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
¶f
\ = 2ax + 2hy + 2g (Treating y as constant)
¶x
¶f
and = 2hx + 2by + 2f (Treating x as constant)
¶y
For point of intersection

¶f ¶f
=0 and =0
¶x ¶y
we obtain ax + hy + g = 0 and hx + by + f = 0
x y 1
Solving them = =
fh - bg gh - af ab - h2

æ bg - fh af - gh ö
(x, y) = ç 2 , 2 ÷
è h - ab h - ab ø
Ex.45 Find the point of intersection of lines represented by
2x2 – 7xy – 4y2 – x + 22y – 10 = 0
Sol. Let f = 2x2 – 7xy – 4y2 – x + 22y – 10 = 0
¶f
= 4x – 7y – 1 = 0
¶x

¶f
and = –7x –8y + 22 = 0
¶y
then the point of intersection is (x,y) = (2,1).
16. EQUATION OF LINES JOINING THE INTERSECTION POINTS OF A LINE & A CURVE
TO THE ORIGIN :

Let the line PQ lx + my + n = 0 .............(1) and the second

degree curve ax2 + 2hxy +by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 .....(2)

then equation of lines OP and OQ is

2
æ lx + my ö æ lx + my ö æ lx + my ö
ax + 2hxy + by + 2gx ç + 2fy ç + cç ÷ =0
2 2
÷ ÷
è -n ø è -n ø è -n ø
i.e. making the equation (2) homogeneous using equation (1)
Ex.46 Prove that the angle between the lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of the straight line
y = 3x + 2 with the curve

æ
-1 2 2
ö
x2 + 2xy + 3y2 + 4x + 8y – 11 = 0 is tan çç ÷÷
è 3 ø

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 43

Sol. Equation of curve is

x2 + 2xy + 3y2 + 4x + 8y – 11 = 0 .....(1)
and line y = 3x + 2
y - 3x
Þ =1 .....(2)
2
Making (1) homogeneous with the help of (2), then
2
æ y - 3x ö æ y - 3x ö æ y - 3x ö
x + 2xy + 3y + 4x ç
2 2
÷ + 8y ç ÷ - 11 ç ÷ =0
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 ø

11
or x2 + 2xy + 3y2 + 2xy – 6x2 + 4y2 – 12xy - (y – 3x)2 = 0
4
11 2
Þ –5x2 – 8xy + 7y2 – (y – 6xy + 9x2) = 0
4
Þ –20x2 – 32xy + 28y2 – 11y2 + 66xy – 99x2 = 0
Þ 119x2 – 34xy – 17y2 = 0
or 7x2 – 2xy – y2 = 0 .....(3)
This is the equation of lines joining the origin to the points of intersection of (1) and (2). Comparing (3) with
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0
a = 7, h = –1,b = –1
If q is the acute angle between pair of lines of (3), then
2 h2 - ab 2 (1 + 7) 2 8 4 2 2 2
tan q = = = = =
|a + b| |7 - 1| 6 6 3
æ2 2 ö
\ q = tan–1 çç 3 ÷÷
è ø
Ex.47 If the lines (p – q) x2 + 2 (p + q) xy + (q – p) y2 = 0 are perpendicular to each other then :-
(1) p = q (2) q = 0 (3) p = 0 (4) p and q can take any value
Sol.(4) The condition of perpendicularity for two lines represented by homogeneous equation of second degree is
coeff. of x2 + coeff. of y2 = 0 Þ p – q + q – p = 0
\ p and q can take any value.

Ex.48 For what value of k, the equation kx2 – 10xy + 12y2 + 5x – 16y – 3 = 0 represents a pair of straight lines.
Sol. Here a = k, b = 12, c = –3 h = –5, g = 5/2, f = –8
\ D = k(12) (–3) + 2(–8) (5/2) (–5) –k (–8)2 – 12(5/2)2 – (–3) (–5)2 = 0
Þk=2
Ex.49 Find angle and equation of bisectors of angle between the lines represented by the equation 2x2 – 7xy + 3y2 = 0.
Sol. Q 2x2 – 7xy + 3y2 = (2x – y) (x – 3y)
\ given lines are 2x – y = 0 and x – 3y = 0
since a = 2, h = –7/2, b = 3.
2 ( -7 / 2)2 - 6
Therefore angle between lines given by tan q = = 1 Þ q = 45°
2+3
Again equations of bisectors are given by
x2 - y2 xy
= Þ 7x2 – 2xy – 7y2 = 0
2-3 -7 / 2
Ex.50 Find the combined equation of lines joining origin and points of intersection of circle x2 + y2 = 4 and
2x + 3y – 4 = 0.
Sol. Making equation x2 + y2 = 4 homogeneous with the help 2x + 3y – 4 = 0
2
æ 2x + 3y ö
x2 + y2 = 4 ç Þ 4x2 + 4y2 = 4x2 + 9y2 + 12xy Þ 5y2 + 12xy = 0
è 4 ÷ø

E
44 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
17. SOME IMPORTANT POINTS :

(i) A line passes through (x1, y1) if intercept between the axes divides in n

nx my P(x1,y1)
the ratio m : n at this point then the equation is + =m+n
x1 y1 m
(ii) A line of gradiant m is equally inclined with the two lines of
m1 - m m2 - m
gradient m1 and m2 then =–
1 + m1m 1 + m2 m
(iii) If a + b + c = 0 then line ax + by + c = 0 passes through (1, 1)
(iv) If y = m1x + c1, y = m1x + c2, y = m2x + d1 and y = m2x + d2 are the sides of a parallelogram then
its area is
(c1 - c2 )(d1 - d2 )
m1 - m2
y-axis
(v) Image or Reflection of a Point in different cases :
Let P(a,b) be any point and Q(x,y) be its image
P(a,b)
(vi) The image or reflection of a point w.r.t x-axis
x=a y = -b x-axis
Þ Q (a,-b)
i.e. sign change of ordinate Q(x,y)

(vii) The image or reflection of a point w.r.t y-axis y-axis

x = -a y=b
Q(x,y) P(a,b)
Þ Q (-a,b)
i.e. sign change of abscissae
x-axis

y-axis

P(a,b)

(viii) The image or reflection of a point w.r.t origin x-axis

O
x = -a y = -b
Þ Q (-a,-b)
Q(x,y)
i.e. sign change of abscissae and ordinate

(ix) The image or reflection of a point w.r.t the line y = x

x=b y=a
Þ Q (b,a)

i.e. interchange of x and y co-ordinate

y-axis P (a,b)
(x) The image or reflection w.r.t the line ax + by + c = 0

x–a y–b æ aa + bb + c ö Q (x,y)

= = -2 ç ÷ x-axis
a b 2
è a +b
2
ø O
0
=
c
+
by
+
ax

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 45
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 If p1,p2 denotes the lengths of the perpendiculars from the origin on the lines x sec a + y cosec a = 2a

2
æ p1 p2 ö
and x cos a + y sin a = a cos 2a respectively, then ç + ÷ is equal to-
è p2 p1 ø

(1) 4 sin2 4a (2) 4 cos2 4a (3) 4 cosec2 4a (4) 4 sec2 4a

4a 2 a 2 cos 2 2a
Sol.(3) p12 + p22 = +
sec2 a + cos ec2a cos2 a + sin2 a

= a2(sin2 2a + cos2 2a) = a2

and p12p22 = a4 sin2 2a cos2 2a = (1/4)a4 sin2 4a
2
æ p1 p2 ö (p12 + p22 )2 4
\ ç + ÷ = 2 2
= 2 = 4 cosec2 4a.
è p2 p1 ø p1 p2 sin 4a

Ex.2 The sides AB, BC, CD and DA of a quadrilateral have the equations x + 2y = 3, x = 1, x – 3y = 4,
5x + y + 12 = 0 respectively, then the angle between the diagonals AC and BD is :-
(1) 60° (2) 45° (3) 90° (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Solving for A,
x + 2y – 3 = 0 C
5x + y + 12 = 0
=4

x=
3y

1
x y 1
x–

Þ = = D B
+24 + 3 -15 - 12 -9
5x

\ A (–3, 3) =3
+y

2y
=1

x+

Similarly B (1, 1), C (1, –1), D (–2, –2)

2

A
Now m1 = slope of AC = –1
m2 = slope of BD = 1
m1m2 = –1 \ the angle required is 90°

Ex.3 A line through A(–5,–4) meets the lines x + 3y + 2 = 0, 2x + y + 4 =0 and x – y – 5 = 0 at the points
2 2 2
æ 15 ö æ 10 ö æ 6 ö
B,C and D respectively if ç
AB ÷ + ç AC ÷ = ç AD ÷
è ø è ø è ø
find the equation of the line.

Sol. The given lines are x + 3y + 2 = 0 ...(1)

2x + y + 4 = 0 ...(2)
x–y–5=0 ....(3)
Equation of the line passing through A(–5,–4) and making an angle q with the positive direction of x-axis is
x+5 y+4
= = r (AB,AC,AD) ....(4)
cos q sin q
\ Points (–5 + AB cos q, – 4 + AB sin q), (–5 + AC cos q, – 4 + AC sin q) and (–5 + AD cos q, – 4 + AD
sin q) lie on (1), (2) and (3) respectively.
(– 5 + AB cos q) + 3(–4 + AB sin q) + 2 = 0
Þ AB (cos q + 3 sin q) = 15
15
Þ = cos q + 3 sin q
AB
E
46 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
10
Similarly, = 2 cos q + sin q
AC
6
and = cos q – sin q
AD
2 2 2
æ 15 ö æ 10 ö æ 6 ö
From given condition ç ÷ +ç ÷ =ç ÷
è AB ø è AC ø è AD ø
we get (cos q + 3 sin q)2 + (2 cos q + sin q)2 = (cos q – sin q)2
Þ 4 cos2 q + 9 sin2 q + 12 sin q cos q = 0
Þ (2 cos q + 3 sin q)2 = 0
2
\ tan q = -
3
Hence the equation of the line from (4) is
2
y+4= - (x + 5)
3
Þ 2x + 3y + 22 = 0
Ex.4 If the lines x + 2ay + a = 0, x + 3by + b = 0 and x + 4cy + c = 0 are concurrent, then a, b and c are
in :-
(1) A.P. (2) G.P. (3) H.P. (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Given lines will be concurrent if

1 2a a
2ac
1 3b b = 0 Þ –bc + 2ac – ab = 0 Þ b = Þ a,b,c are in H.P..
a+c
1 4c c

Ex.5 If the sides of triangle are x + y – 5 = 0, x – y + 1 = 0 and y – 1 = 0, then its circumcentre is :-

(1) (2, 1) (2) (2, –2) (3) (1, 2) (4) (1, –2)
Sol.(1) Here the sides x + y – 5 = 0 and x – y + 1 are perpendicular to each other, therefore y = 1 will be hypotenouse
of the triangle. Now its middle point will be the circumcentre.
Now solving the pair of equations
x + y – 5 = 0, y – 1 = 0
and x – y + 1 = 0, y – 1 = 0, we get
P º (4, 1), Q º (0, 1)
Mid point of PQ or circumcentre = (2, 1)
Ex.6 If P1 and P2 be perpendicular from the origin upon the straight lines x secq + y cosecq = a and x cosq – y
sinq = a cos2q respectively, then the value of 4P12 + P22 is :-
(1) a2 (2) 2a2 (3) 3a2 (4) 4a2
Sol.(1) We have P1 = length of perpendicular from (0, 0) on x secq + y cosecq = a
a
i.e. P1 = = a sinq cosq
sec q + cos ec2q
2

a
= sin 2q or 2P1 = asin2q
2
P2 = Length of the perpendicular from (0, 0) on x cosq – y sinq = a cos2q

a cos 2q
P2 = = a cos2q Þ 4P12 + P22 = a2 sin2 2q + a2 cos2 2q = a2
2 2
cos q + sin q

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 47
Ex.7 The equation of a line through the point of intersection of the lines x – 3y + 1 = 0 and 2x + 5y – 9 = 0 and

whose distance from the origin is 5 is :-

(1) 2x + y – 5 = 0 (2) 2x – y + 5 = 0 (3) 2x + y –10 = 0 (4) 2x – y – 10 = 0
Sol.(1) Let the required line by method P + lQ = 0 be (x – 3y + 1) + l(2x + 5y – 9) = 0
\ Perpendicular from (0, 0) = 5 gives

1 - 9l
= 5,
(1 + 2l )2 + (5l - 3)2

squaring and simplifying (8l – 7)2 = 0 Þ l = 7/8

Hence the line required is
(x – 3y + 1) + 7/8 (2x + 5y – 9) = 0
or 22x + 11y – 55 = 0 Þ 2x + y – 5 = 0
Ex.8 The distance of the point (2, 3) from the line 2x – 3y + 9 = 0 measured along a line x – y + 1 = 0, is :-

(1) 2 (2) 4 2 (3) 8 (4) 3 2

Sol.(2) The slope of the line x – y + 1 = 0 is 1. So it makes an angle of 45° with x axis.
The equation of a line passing through (2, 3) and making an angle of 45° is

x -2 y-3 é x - x 1 y - y1 ù
= =r ê U sin g cos q = sin q = r ú
cos 45° sin 45° ë û
coordinats of any point on this line are
æ r r ö
(2 + r cos45°, 3 + r sin45°) or çè 2 + ,3 + ÷
2 2ø
3r
If this point lies on the line 2x – 3y + 9 = 0, then 4 + r 2 – 9 – +9=0
2
Þ r= 4 2
So the required distance = 4 2
Ex.9 If A (–2, 1), B (2, 3) and C (–2, –4) are three points, then the angle between BA and BC is :-

æ 3ö æ 2ö æ 7ö
(1) tan–1 ç ÷ (2) tan–1 ç ÷ (3) tan–1 ç ÷ (4) None of these
è 2ø è 3ø è 4ø
Sol.(2) Let m1 and m2 be the slopes of BA and BC respectively. Then

3 –1 2 1 -4 - 3 7
m1 = = = and m2 = =
2 – ( -2) 4 2 -2 - 2 4
Let q be the angle between BA and BC. Then

7 1 10
- 2 æ 2ö
m2 - m1 4 2 8
tanq = = = =± Þ q = tan–1 ç ÷
1 + m1m2 7 1 15 3 è 3ø
1+ ´
4 2 8

Ex.10 Find the angle between the lines represented by the equation x2 – 2pxy + y2 = 0 :-
(1) sec–1 (p) (2) tan–1 (p) (3) cos–1 (p) (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Let q be the angle between the lines represented by x – 2pxy + y = 0
2 2

Comparing the given equation with ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0, we get a = 1, b = 1 and 2h = –2p

2 h2 - ab 2 p2 - 1
\ tanq = Þ tanq = = p2 - 1
a+b 1+1
Þ tan2q = p2 – 1 Þ p2 = 1 + tan2q Þ p2 = sec2q Þ secq = ± p Þ q = sec–1 (±p)
Hence, the required acute angle is sec–1(p)
E
48 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.11 An equation of a straight line passing through the intersection of the straight lines 3x – 4y + 1 = 0 and
5x + y – 1 = 0 and making non-zero, equal intercepts on the axes is-
(1) 22x + 22y =13 (2) 23x + 23y = 11 (3) 11x + 11y = 23 (4) 8x – 3y = 0
Sol.(2) Equation of any line through the point of intersection of the given lines is
(3x – 4y + 1) + k (5x + y – 1) = 0 ...(1)
or (3 + 5k) x + (k–4)y + 1 – k = 0
x y
or + =1
(k - 1) /(3 + 5k) (k - 1) /(k - 4)
Since x-intercept = y-intercept
k -1 k -1
Þ = Þ (k–1) (3 + 5k – k + 4) = 0
3 + 5k k - 4
Þ k = 1 or k = –7/4
For k = 1, (1) becomes 8x – 3y = 0 which makes zero intercepts on the axes.
\ k = –7/4 Þ The required equation is
4(3x – 4y + 1) – 7(5x + y – 1) = 0
Þ 23x + 23y = 11
Ex.12 Triangle formed by lines x + y = 0, 3x + y = 4 and x + 3y = 4 is :-
(1) Equilateral (2) Right angled (3) Isosceles (4) None of these
1
Sol.(3) Slope of the given lines are –1, –3, – respectively
3
1
Let m1 = – , m2 = –1, m3 = –3
3
1
-
+1 æ 1ö
\ tanA = 3 Þ A = tan–1 ç ÷
1 è 2ø
1 + .1
3
1
-3 +
-1 + 3 æ 1ö 3 Þ C = tan–1 æ - 4 ö
tanB = Þ B = tan–1 ç ÷ and tanC = çè 3 ÷ø
1 + 1.3 è 2ø 1
1 + 3.
3
Q ÐA = ÐB, Hence triangle is isosceles triangle
Ex.13 The area enclosed by 2|x| + 3|y| < 6 is-
(1) 3 sq. units (2) 4 sq. units (3) 12 sq. units (4) 24 sq. units
Sol.(3) The given inequality is
which represents a rhombus with sides (0,2)
2x ± 3y = 6 and 2x ± 3y = –6
||
|
|

||
||

Length of the diagonals is 6 and 4 units along x-axis and y-axis.

||
||

(–3,0)
||
||
||
|| (3,0)
\ The required area ||
||

1 (0,–2)
= × 6 × 4 = 12 sq. units.
2
Ex.14 If the lines ax + by + c = 0, bx + cy + a = 0 and cx + ay + b = 0 are concurrent, then :-

(1) a – b – c = 0 (2) a + b + c = 0 (3) b + c – a = 0 (4) a + b – c = 0

a b c
Sol.(2) If the lines are concurrent, then b c a = 0 Þ 3abc – a3 – b3 – c3 = 0
c a b
Þ (a + b + c) (a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ca) = 0
Þ (a + b + c) [(a – b)2 + (b – c)2 + (c – a)2] = 0
Þ a+b+c=0 [\ (a – b)2 + (b – c)2 + (c – a)2 ¹ 0]

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 49

Ex.15 The distance between the lines represented by the equation, x2 + 2 2 xy + 2y2 + 4x + 4 2 y+ 1 = 0 is :-
4
(1) (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 2 3
3
Sol.(3) The given equation can be written as

x2 + 2 ( 2y + 2) x + (2y2 + 4 2y + 1 ) = 0

-2( 2y + 2) ± 4( 2y + 2)2 - 4(2y 2 + 4 2y + 1)

\x=
2

= – ( 2y + 2) ± 3 Therefore given lines are x + 2y + 2 + 3= 0

and x + 2y + 2 – 3 = 0 which are parallel lines

(2 + 3) - (2 - 3)
Therefore distance between them = =2
1+2

Ex.16 The equation of a line parallel to ax + by + c' = 0 and passing through the point (c.d) is :-
(1) a(x + c) – b(y + d) = 0 (2) a(x + c) + b(y + d) = 0
(3) a(x – c) + b(y – d) = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Equation of a line parallel to ax + by + c = 0 is written as
ax + by + k = 0 ..........(1)
if it passes through (c, d), then
ac + bd + k = 0 ..........(2)
Subtracting (2) and (1), we get
a(x – c) + b(y – d) = 0
Which is the required equation of the line.
Ex.17 A straight line L perpendicular to the line 5x – y = 1. The area of the triangle formed by the line L and
co-ordinates axes is 5, then the equation of line, is :-

(1) x + 5y = ± 5 (2) x + 5y = ± 5 2 (3) x + 5y = ± 2 (4) None of these

Sol.(2) Let the line L cut the axes at A and B say. OA = a, OB = b

1
\ Area D OAB = ab = 5 ..........(1)
2
Y
Now equation of line perpendicular to lines 5x – y = 1 is x + 5y = k L
=1

B
–y
5x

b x+
k 5y
putting x = 0, y = = b, y = 0, x = k = a =k
5 X
O a A

1
\ k. k/5 = 5 from (1)
2
k2 = 50 Þ k = ± 5 2

Hence the required line is x + 5y = ± 5 2

E
50 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.18 Two adjacent sides of a parallelogram are 4x + 5y = 0 and 7x + 2y = 0. If an equation to one of the diagonals
is 11x + 7y – 9 = 0, then an equation of the other diagonal is-
(1) x + y =0 (2) 7x – 11y = 0 (3) x – y = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Since the given lines intersect at the origin O, one of the vertex is O(0,0). Let A and B be the points of intersection
of the sides 4x + 5y = 0 and 7x + 2y = 0 respectively with the diagonal. 11x + 7y – 9 = 0, then the coordinates
æ 5 -4 ö æ 2 7ö æ1 1ö
of A and B are respectively ç , ÷ and ç - , ÷ . The coordinates of the mid point of AB are ç , ÷ .
è 3 3 ø è 3 3 ø è2 2ø
æ1 1ö
Since the other diagonal passes through the vertex (0,0) and the mid point ç , ÷ of AB, its equation is
è2 2ø
y =x.
Ex.19 If x + 2y = 3 is a line and A (–1, 3) ; B (2, –3) ; C (4, 9) are three points, then :-

(1) A is on one side and B, C are on other side of the line

(2) A, B are on one side and C is on other side of the line

(3) A, C on one side and B is on other side of the line

(4) All three points are on one side of the line

Sol.(3) Substituting the coordinates of points A, B and C in the expression x + 2y – 3 = 0 we get

The value of expression for A is
= –1 + 6 – 3 = 2 > 0
The value of expression for B is
=2–6–3=–7<0
The value of expression for C is
= 4 + 18 – 3 = 19 > 0
Q Signs of expressions for A, C are same while for B, the sign of expression is different
\ A, C are on one side and B is on other side of the line
Ex.20 The equation of two equal sides of an isosceles triangle are 7x – y + 3 = 0 and x + y – 3 = 0 and its third
side is passes through the point (1, –10). The equation of the third side is :-
(1) x – 3y – 31 = 0 but not 3x + y + 7 = 0
(2) neither 3x + y + 7 = 0 nor x – 3y – 31 = 0
(3) 3x + y + 7 = 0 or x – 3y – 31 = 0
(4) 3x + y + 7 = 0 but not x – 3y – 31 = 0

Sol.(3) Third side passes through (1. –10) so let its equation be y + 10 = m(x – 1)
If it makes equal angle, say q with given two sides, then

m-7 m - ( -1)
tan q = =
1 + 7m 1 + m(-1)
Þ m = –3 or 1/3
Hence possible equations of third side are

1
y + 10 = –3(x – 1) and y + 10 = (x - 1)
3

or 3x + y + 7 = 0 and x – 3y – 31 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 51

Ex.21 The equation of two straight lines through (7, 9) and making an angle of 60° with the line x – 3y - 2 3 =0 is :-

(1) x = 7, x + 3y = 7 + 9 3 (2) x = 3 , x + 3y = 7 + 9 3

(3) x = 7, x – 3y = 7 + 9 3 (4) x = 3 , x – 3y = 7 + 9 3

Sol.(1) We known that the equations of two straight lines which pass through a point (x1, y1) and make a given angle
a with the given straight line y = mx + c are
m ± tan a
y – y1 = (x – x1)
1 m m tan a

Here x1 = 7, y1 = 9, a = 60° and m = slope of the line x - 3 y - 2 3 = 0

1
So, m =
3
So, the equation of the required lines are

1 1
+ tan 60° - tan 60°
3 3
y–9= (x – 7) and y – 9 = (x – 7)
1 1
1- tan 60° 1+ tan 60°
3 3
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
or (y – 9) ç 1 - tan 60°÷ = ç + tan 60°÷ (x – 7) and (y – 9) ç 1 + tan 60°÷ = æ 1 - tan 60°ö (x – 7)
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø çè 3 ÷ø

æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
or 0 = ç + 3 ÷ (x – 7) Þ x – 7 = 0 Þ x = 7 and (y – 9) 2 = ç - 3 ÷ (x – 7) Þ x + 3y = 7 + 9 3
è 3 ø è 3 ø

Hence the required lines are x = 7 and x + 3y = 7 + 9 3

Ex.22 The vertices of DOBC are respectively (0, 0), (–3, –1) and (–1, –3). The equation of line parallel to BC and
at a distance 1/2 from O which intersects OB and OC is :-

(1) 2x + 2y + 2= 0 (2) 2x – 2y + 2 =0 (3) 2x + 2y – 2 =0 (4) None of these

-3 + 1
Sol.(1) Slope of BC = = –1
-1 + 3
Now equation of line parallel to BC is y = –x + k Þ y + x = k
k 1 2
Now length of perpendicular from O on this line =± = Þk=–
2 2 2
\ Equation of required line is 2x + 2y + 2 = 0

Ex.23 If the intercept made by the line between the axes is bisected at the point (x1, y1), then its equation is :-
x y x y x y 1
(1) + =2 (2) + =1 (3) + = (4) none of these
x 1 y1 x1 y1 x1 y1 2
x y
Sol.(1) Let the equations of the line be + = 1 , then the coordinates of point of intersection of this line and
a b
x-axis and y-axis are respectively (a, 0), (0, b). Hence mid point of the intercept is (a/2, b/2).
\ a/2 = x1 Þ a = 2x1 and b/2 = y1 Þ b = 2y1
Hence required equation of the line is
x y x y
+ = 1Þ + =2
2x1 2y1 x1 y1
E
52 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.24 If a line passing through the point P(1,1) makes an angle q with the positive direction of x-axis, meets the
coordinate axes at A and B such that AB = OP, O being the origin, then tan q + cot q is equal to-
(1) 2 (2) 1– 3 (3) 1 + 3 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Equation of a line passing through P(1,1) and making an angle q with the positive direction of x-axis is-
x -1 y -1
=
cos q sin q
It meets x-axis at A(1– cot q, 0) and y-axis at B(0,1– tan q)

so that (AB)2 = (1 – cot q)2 + (1 – tan q)2 and OP2 = ( 1 + 1)2 =2

Since AB = OP (given), we have 2 – 2(cot q + tan q) + (cot2 q + tan2 q) = 2

2± 4+8
Þ (cot q + tan q)2 – 2 (cot q + tan q) – 2 = 0 Þ cot q + tan q = =1± 3
2
1
But cot q + tan q = 1 – 3 is not possible as x + > 2 or < –2 " x ¹ 0
x

Hence, tan q + cot q = 1 + 3 .

Ex.25 If q is the angle between the lines represented by x2 – 3xy + ly2 + 3x – 5y + 2 = 0, where l is a real number,

then cosec2q equals :-

(1) 9 (2) 3 (3) 10 (4) 100
Sol.(3) Since given equation represents a pair of lines, therefore applying

abc + 2fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0,

3 3 5
Here a = 1, b = l , c = 2, h = - ,g= ,f=–
2 2 2
æ 5 3 3 ö 25 9 18
We get (1 ´ l ´ 2) + 2 ç - ´ ´ - ÷ - - l- = 0Þ l = 2
è 2 2 2 ø 4 4 4
2 h2 - ab 1
Now tan q = =
a+b 3

\ cosec2q = 1 + cot2q = 1 + 9 = 10
Ex.26 The bisector of the acute angle between the lines 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x + 5y – 2 = 0, is :-
(1) 11x + 3y – 9 = 0 (2) 21x + 77y – 101 = 0 (3) 11x – 3y + 9 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Here equation of bisectors
3x - 4y + 7 12x + 5y – 2
=±
5 13
Which give, 11x – 3y + 9 = 0 and 21x + 77y – 101 = 0
Now angle between the line 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and one bisector 11x – 3y + 9 = 0 is

3 11
m1 = , m2 =
4 3

–9 + 44 35
|tan q|= = <1
33 + 12 45
Hence the bisector is the required one (3) is correct option.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 53
Ex.27 The length of the perpendicular from the origin to a line is 7 and the line makes an angle of 150° with
positive direction of y axis. The equation of the line is :-

(1) 3 x + y = 14 (2) 3 x – y = 14

(3) 3 x + y + 14 = 0 (4) 3 x – y + 14 = 0

Sol.(1) Here p = 7 and a = 30° y

150°
\ Equation of the required line is
xcos 30° + y sin 30° = 7 30°

3 Q
or x +y =7 60°
2
30° x
x'
O
or 3x + y = 14 y'

Ex.28 Find the condition that the pair of straight lines joining the origin to the intersections of the line
y = mx + c and the circle x2 + y2 = a2 may be at right angles :-
Sol. The equation of the given straight line and the given curve are :

y - mx
y = mx + c Þ = 1 .............(1) and x2 + y2 = a2 ............(2)
c

The combined equation of the straight lines joining the origin to the point of intersection of (1) and (2) is

2
æ y - mx ö
x + y = ç
2 2
.a2
è c ÷ø

Þ x2(c2 – a2m2) + 2a2 mxy + y2 (c2 – a2) = 0 ............(3)

The lines given by (3) are at right angles, if
Coeff. of x2 + Coeff. of y2 = 0
Þ (c2 – a2m2) + (c2 – a2) = 0 Þ 2c2 = a2 (1 + m2), which is the required condition.
Ex.29 If sum and product of the slopes of lines represented by 4x2 + 2hxy – 7y2 = 0 is equal then h is equal to:-
(1) –6 (2) –2 (3) –4 (4) 4
Sol.(2) Let the equations are y = m1x and y = m2x
\ 4x2 + 2hxy – 7y2 = (y – m1x) (y – m2x)

4 2h
\ m1m2 = – , m1 + m2 = given m1 + m2 = m1m2
7 7

2h 4
Þ =– Þh=–2
7 7

E
54 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the slope of a line whose inclination is

(i) 30° (ii) 120° (iii) 135°

2. Find the inclination of a line whose slope is :

1
(i) 3 (ii) (iii) 1 (iv) –1
3
3. Find the slope of a line which passes through the points
(i) (0, 0) and (4, –2) (ii) (0, –3) and (2, 1)
(iii) (2, 5) and (–4, –4) (iv) (–2, 3) and (4, –6)

-5
4. If the slope of the line joining the points A(x, 2) and B(6, –8) is , find the value of x.
4
5. Show that the line through the points (5, 6) and (2, 3) is parallel to the line through the points (9, –2) and
(6, –5).
6. Find the value of x so that the line through (3, x) and (2, 7) is parallel to the line through (–1, 4) and
(0, 6).
7. Show that the line through the points (2, 6) and (–4, 8) is perpendicular to the line through the points
(3, 3) and (5, 9).
8. If A(2, –5), B(–2, 5), C(x, 3) and D(1, 1) be four points such that AB and CD are perpendicular to each
other, find the value of x.
9. Using slopes, show that the points A(7, 1), B(5, 2) and C(3, 3) are collinear.

1
10. Find the angle between the lines whose slopes are 3 and .
3

11. Find the angle between the lines whose slopes are (2 – 3 ) and (2 + 3 ).
12. Find the equation of a line parallel to the x-axis and having intercept –3 on the y-axis.
13. Find the equation of a horizontal line passing through the point (4, –2).
14. Find the equation of a vertical line passing through the point (–5, 6).
15. Find the equation of a line which is equidistant from the lines x = –2 and x = 6.
16. Find the equation of a line
(i) Whose slope is 4 and which passes through the point (5, –7);
(ii) whose slope is –3 and which passes through the point (–2, 3);
2p
(iii) Which makes an angle of with the positive direction of the x-axis and passes through the point
3
(0, 2).
17. Find the equation of a line whose inclination with the x-axis is 30° and which passes through the point
(0, 5).
18. Find the equation of a line passing through the origin and making an angle of 120° with the positive direction
of the x-axis.
19. Find the slope and the equation of the line passing through the points :
(i) (3, –2) and (–5, –7) (ii) (–1, 1) and (2, –4)
(iii) (5, 3) and (–5, –3) (iv) (a, b) and (–a, b)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 55
20. Find the equation of the line whose
(i) slope = 3 and y-intercept = 5 (ii) slope = –1 and y-intercept = 4

2
(iii) slope = – and y-intercept = –3
5
21. Find the equation of the line which makes an angle of 30° with the positive direction of the
x-axis and cuts off an intercept of 4 units with the negative direction of the y-axis.
22. Find the equation of the line which is parallel to the line 2x – 3y = 8 and whose y-intercept is 5 units.
23. Find the equation of the line passing through the point (2, 3) and perpendicular to the line
4x + 3y = 10.
24. Find the equation of the line which cuts off intercepts -3 and 5 on the x-axis and y-axis respectively.
25. Find the equation of the line that cuts off equal intercepts on the coordinate axes and passes through the
point (4, 7).
26. Find the equation of the line which passes through the point (22, –6) and whose intercept on the x-axis
exceeds the intercept on the y-axis by 5.
27. Find the equation of the line for which
(i) p = 3 and a = 45° (ii) p = 5 and a = 135°
28. The length of the perpendicular segment from the origin to a line is 2 units and the inclination of this
1
perpendicular is a such that sin a = and a is acute. Find the equation of the line.
3
29. Reduce the equation 2x – 3y – 5 = 0 to slope - intercept form, and find from it the slope and y-intercept.

30. Reduce the equation 5x + 7y – 35 = 0 to slope - intercept form, and hence find the slope and the y-intercept
of the line.
31. Reduce the equation 3x – 4y + 12 = 0 to intercepts form. Hence, find the length of the portion of the
line intercepted between the axes.
32. Find the inclination of the line :

(i) x + 3 y + 6 = 0 (ii) 3x + 3y + 8 = 0 (iii) 3x – y– 4 = 0

33. Reduce each of the following equations to normal form :
(i) x + y – 2 = 0 (ii) x + y + 2 = 0
34. Find the distance of the point (3, –5) from the line 3x – 4y = 27.
35. Find the distance of the point (–2, 3) from the line 12x = 5y + 13.
36. Find the distance of the point (4, 2) from the line joining the points (4, 1) and (2, 3).
37. Find the length of perpendicular from the origin to the line 4x + 3y = 9
38. Find all the points on the line x + y = 4 that lie at a unit distance from the line 4x + 3y = 10.
39. Find the distance between the parallel lines 8x + 15y – 36 = 0 and 8x + 15y + 32 = 0.
40. Find the points of intersection of the lines
4x + 3y = 5 and x = 2y – 7.
41. Show that the lines 3x – 4y + 5 = 0, 7x – 8y + 5 = 0 and 4x + 5y = 45 are concurrent. Also find their
point of intersection.
42. Find the equation of the perpendicular drawn from the origin to the line 4x – 3y + 5 = 0. Also, find the
coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular.

E
56 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

1
1. (i) (ii) - 3 (iii) –1
3

2. (i) 60° (ii) 30° (iii) 45° (iv) 135°

1 3 3
3. (i) – (ii) 2 (iii) (iv) –
2 2 2

4. x = –2 6. x = 9 8. x = 6 10. 30° 11. 60°

12. y +3= 0 13. y + 2 = 0 14. x + 5 = 0 15. x = 2

16. (i) 4x – y – 27 = 0 (ii) 3x + y + 3 = 0 (iii) 3x + y– 2 = 0

17. x– 3y+ 5 3 = 0 18. 3x+ y= 0

5 -5
19. (i) , 5x – 8y – 31 = 0 (ii) , 5x + 3y + 2 = 0
8 3

3
(iii) , 3x – 5y = 0 (iv) 0, y = b
5

20. (i) 3x – y + 5 = 0 (ii) x + y – 4 = 0 (iii) 2x + 5y + 15 = 0

21. x– 3y– 4 3 = 0 22. 2x – 3y + 15 = 0

23. 3x – 4y + 6 = 0 24. 5x – 3y + 15 = 0

25. x + y – 11 = 0 26. 6x + 11 y – 66 = 0 or x + 2y – 10 = 0

27. (i) x + y – 3 2 = 0 (ii) x – y + 5 2 = 0

2 5 2 -5
28. 2 2x +y – 6= 0 29. y = x– , m= and c =
3 3 3 3

-5 -5 x y
30. y= x + 5, m = and c = 5 31. + = 1 , 5 units
7 7 -4 3

32. (i) 150° (ii) 135° (iii) 60°

33. (i) xcos45° + y sin45° = 2 (ii) xcos225° + ysin225° = 1

2 2 9
34. unit 35. 4 units 36. units 37. units
5 2 5

38. (3, 1) and (–7, 11) 39. 4 units 40. (–1, 3) 41. (5, 5)

æ 4 3ö
42. 3x + 4y = 0, ç - , ÷
è 5 5ø

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 57

CHECK YOUR GRASP STRAIGHT LINE EXERCISE-I

DIFFERENT FORMS OF EQUATION 10. The equatio n of the lines o n which the
OF STRAIGHT LINE perpendiculars from the origin make 30° angle with
1. If the slope of a line is 2 and it cuts an intercept 50
x axis and which form a triangle of area with
–4 on y axis, then its equation will be- 3
axes, are-
(1) y – 2x = 4 (2) x = 2y – 4
(3) y = 2x – 4 (4) None of these (1) x ± 3 y – 10 = 0 (2) 3 x + y – 10 = 0
2. If A (2,3), B(3, 1) and C (5, 3) are three points,
(3) x + 3 y ± 10 = 0 (4) None of these
then the slope of the line passing through A and
bisecting BC is- 11. The area of the triangle formed by the lines x = 0,

(1) 1/2 (2) –2 (3) –1/2 (4) 2 y = 0 and x/a + y/b = 1 is-

3. The line bx + ay = 3ab cuts the coordinate axes at (1) ab (2) ab/2 (3) 2ab (4) ab/3

A and B, then centroid of D OAB is- 12. The intercept made by a line on yaxis is double to
the intercept made by it on x axis. If it passes
(1) (b, a) (2) (a, b) (3) (a/3, b/3) (4) (3a, 3b)
through (1, 2) then its equation-
4. The equation of a line passing through the origin
and the point (a cosq, a sinq) is- (1) 2x + y = 4 (2) 2x + y + 4 = 0

(1) y = x sin q (2) y = x tan q (3) 2x – y = 4 (4) 2x – y + 4 = 0

(3) y = x cos q (4) y = x cot q 13. If the point (3, –4) divides the line between the x
5. The angle made by the line joining the points and y axis in the ratio 2 : 3 then the equation of
(1, 0) and (–2, the line will be-
3 ) with x axis is-
(1) 120° (2) 60° (3) 150° (4) 135° (1) 2x + y = 10 (2) 2x – y = 10
6. The equation of the line cutting of an intercept (3) x + 2y = 10 (4) x – 2y = 10
3 14. The intercept made by line x cosa + y sina = a
–3 from the y axis and inclined at an angle tan –1
5 on y axis is-
to the x axis is- (1) a (2) a coseca (3) a seca (4) a sina
(1) 5y – 3x + 15 = 0 (2) 5y – 3x = 15 15. If the point (5, 2) bisects the intercept of a line
(3) 3y – 5x + 15 = 0 (4) None of these between the axes, then its equation is-
7. Slope of a line which cuts intercepts of equal lengths (1) 5x + 2y = 20 (2) 2x + 5y = 20
on the axes is- (3) 5x – 2y = 20 (4) 2x – 5y = 20
(1) –1 (2) 2 (3) 0 (4) 3 16. If the line y = mx + c passes through the points
(2, 4) and (3, –5), then-
8. The equation to a line passing through the point
(2, –3) and sum of whose intercept on the axes is (1) m = –9, c = –22 (2) m = 9, c = 22

equal to –2 is- (3) m = –9, c = 22 (4) m = 9, c = –22

(1) x + y + 2 = 0 or 3x + 3y = 7 17. The equation of a line passing through the point
(2) x + y + 1 = 0 or 3x – 2y = 12 (–3, 2) and parallel to x-axis is-
(3) x + y + 3 = 0 or 3x – 3y = 5 (1) x – 3 = 0 (2) x + 3 = 0
(4) x – y + 2 = 0 or 3x + 2y = 12 (3) y – 2 = 0 (4) y + 2 = 0
9. The equation of the line inclined at an angle of 60° POSITION OF A POINT RELATIVE TO A LINE
with x axis and cutting y axis at the point (0, –2) 18. The position of the point (8, –9) with respect to
is- the lines 2x + 3y – 4 = 0 and 6x + 9y + 8 = 0 is-
(1) point lies out side the lines
(1) 3y=x–2 3 (2) y = 3x–2
(2) point lies on one of the lines
(3) 3y=x+2 3 (4) y = 3x+2 (3) point lies between the lines
(4) None of these

E
58 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
19. If the point (1,2) and (3,4) are to be on the opposite 30. A line is perpendicular to 3x + y = 3 and passes
side of the line 3x – 5y + a = 0, then- through a point (2, 2). Its y intercept is-
(1) 7 < a < 11 (2) b = 7 (1) 2/3 (2) 1/3 (3) 1 (4) 4/3
(3) a = 11 (4) a < 7 or a > 11 31. The equation of a line parallel to x + 2y = 1 and
ANGLE BETWEEN TWO STRAIGHT LINES passing through the point of intersection of the lines
20. The angle between the lines x cos a1 + y sin a1 = p1 x – y = 4 and 3x + y = 7 is-
and x cos a2 + y sin a2 = p2 is- (1) x + 2y = 5 (2) 4x + 8y – 1 = 0
(1) (a1 + a2) (2) |(a1 – a2)|(3) 2a2 (4) 2a1 (3) 4x + 8y + 1 = 0 (4) None of these
21. The angle between the lines y – x + 5 = 0 and 32. The line passes through (1, –2) and perpendicular
3 x – y + 7 = 0 is- to y-axis is-
(1) 15° (2) 60° (3) 45° (4) 75°
(1) x + 1 = 0 (2) x – 1 = 0
22. The angle between the lines 2x – y + 5 = 0 and
(3) y – 2 = 0 (4) y + 2 = 0
3x + y + 4 = 0 is-
33. The equation of a line parallel to 2x – 3y = 4 which
(1) 30° (2) 90° (3) 45° (4) 60°
makes with the axes a triangle of area 12 square
23. The acute angle between the lines y = 3 and
units, is-
y = 3 x + 9 is-
(1) 3x + 2y = 12 (2) 2x – 3y = 12
(1) 30° (2) 60° (3) 45° (4) 90°
(3) 2x – 3y = 6 (4) 3x + 2y = 6
24. The angle between the line x – 3 y + 5 = 0 and
34. The equation of line passing through (2, 3) and
y axis is- perpendicular to the line adjoining the points
(1) 90° (2) 60° (3) 30° (4) 45°
(–5, 6) and (–6, 5) is-
25. If the line passing through the points (4, 3) and
(1) x + y + 5 = 0 (2) x – y + 5 = 0
(2, l) is perpendicular to the line y = 2x + 3, then
(3) x – y – 5 = 0 (4) x + y – 5 = 0
l is equal to-
35. The co-ordinate of foot of a perpendicular drawn
(1) 4 (2) –4 (3) 1 (4) –1
on line 3x – 4y – 5 = 0 to the point (0, 5) is-
26. The obtuse between the line y = –2 and y = x + 2
is- (1) (1, 3) (2) (2, 3) (3) (3, 2) (4) (3, 1)

(1) 120° (2) 135° (3) 150° (4) 160° 36. Equation of the line passing through the point
27. If the lines mx+2y+1=0 and 2x + 3y + 5 = 0 are (1, –1) and perpendicular to the line 2x–3y=5 is-
perpendicular then the value of m is- (1) 3x + 2y – 1 = 0 (2) 2x + 3y + 1 = 0
(1) 3 (2) –3 (3) –1/3 (4) 1/3 (3) 3x + 2y – 3 = 0 (4) 3x + 2y + 5 = 0
28. The equation of perpendicular bisector of the line 37. The equation of a line passing through (a, b) and
segment joining the points (1, 2) and (–2, 0) is- parallel to the line x/a + y/b = 1 is-
(1) 5x + 2y = 1 (2) 4x + 6y = 1 (1) x/a + y/b = 0 (2) x/a + y/b = 2
(3) 6x + 4y = 1 (4) None of these (3) x/a + y/b = 3 (4) x/a + y/b + 2 = 0
EQUATION OF PARALLEL AND 38. The equation of a line passing through the point
PERPENDICULAR LINES (a, b) and perpendicular to the line ax + by + c = 0
29. If the foot of the perpendicular from the origin to a is-
straight line is at the point (3, –4). Then the equation (1) bx – ay + (a2 – b2) = 0

of the line is- (2) bx – ay – (a2 – b2) = 0

(1) 3x – 4y = 25 (2) 3x – 4y + 25 = 0 (3) bx – ay = 0

(3) 4x + 3y – 25 = 0 (4) 4x – 3y + 25 = 0 (4) None of these

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 59
LENGTH OF PERPENDICULAR 48. The equation of a line perpendicular to the line
39. The length of perpendicular from the origin on the 5x – 2y + 7 = 0 and passing through the point of
line x/a + y/b = 1 is-
intersection of lines y = x + 7 and x + 2y + 1 = 0,
b a
(1) (2) is-
a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
(1) 2x + 5y = 0 (2) 2x + 5y = 20
ab
(3) (4) None of these
a 2 + b2 (3) 2x + 5y = 10 (4) None of these
40. The length of perpendicular from (2, 1) on line BISECTOR OF ANGLES BETWEEN TWO LINES
3x – 4y + 8 = 0 is- 49. The equation of the bisector of the angle between
(1) 5 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4) 2
the lines 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 and 12x – 5y – 8 = 0 is-
41. The length of the perpendicular from the origin on
(1) 99x – 77y + 51 = 0, 21x + 27y – 131 = 0
the line 3x - y + 2 = 0 is-
(1) 3 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4) 2.5 (2) 99x – 77y + 51 = 0, 21x + 27y + 131 = 0
42. The distance between the lines 5x+12y+13=0 and (3) 99x – 77y + 131 = 0, 21x + 27y – 51 = 0
5x + 12y = 9 is- (4) None of these
(1) 11/13 (2) 22/17 (3) 22/13 (4) 13/22
50. If the vertices of the triangle A (–1, –7), B (5, 1)
43. The distance between the parallel lines y = 2x + 4
and 6x = 3y + 5 is- and C (1, 4) then the equation of bisector of the
(1) 17/ 3 (2) 1 angle ÐABC is-
(3) 3 / 5 (4) 17 5 /15 (1) x – 7y – 2 = 0 (2) x – 7y + 2 = 0
44. If length of perpendicular drawn from origin on the (3) x + 7y + 2 = 0 (4) none of these
line x/a + y/b = 1 is 2p, then a2, 8p2, b2 are in-
(1) H.P. (2) G.P. HOMOGENOUS EQUATION AND GENERAL
(3) A.P. (4) None of these EQUATION OF SECOND DEGREE
51. If the equation 12x2 + 7xy – py2 – 18x+qy + 6 = 0
EQUATION OF STRAIGHT LINES PASSING
represents a pair of perpendicular straight lines,
THROUGH THE POINT OF INTERSECTION
OF TWO LINES then-
45. The line passing through the point of intersection (1) p = 12, q = 1 (2) p = 1, q = –12
of lines x + y – 2 = 0 and 2x – y + 1 = 0 and origin (3) p = 1, q = 12 (4) p = –1, q = 12
is- 52. If the equation x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + 1 = 0 represent
(1) 5x – y = 0 (2) 5x + y = 0 a pair of lines, then-
(3) x + 5y = 0 (4) x – 5y = 0 (1) f2 + g2 = 1 (2) g2 – f2 = 1
46. The equation of the line through the point of (3) f2 - g2 = 1 (4) f2 + g2 = 1/2
intersection of the line y = 3 and x + y = 0 and 53. The angle between the lines represented by
parallel to the line 2x – y = 4 is- ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 is-
(1) 2x – y + 9 = 0 (2) 2x – y – 9 = 0
æ h2 - ab ö æ
-1 2 h - ab
2 ö
(3) 2x – y + 1 = 0 (4) None of these -1
(1) tan ç a + b ÷ (2) tan ç a + b ÷
è ø è ø
47. The equation of the line passing through the point
of intersection of the line 4x – 3y – 1 = 0 and -1
æ h2 - 4ab ö æ
-1 4 h - ab
2 ö
(3) tan ç a + b ÷ (4) tan ç a + b ÷
5x – 2y – 3 = 0 and parallel to the line è ø è ø
2x – 3y + 2 = 0 is- 54. The angle between the lines represented by
(1) x – 3y = 1 (2) 3x – 2y = 1 x2 + xy = 0 is-
(3) 2x – 3y + 1 = 0 (4) 2x – y = 1 (1) 60° (2) 90°
(3) 45° (4) None of these
E
60 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
55. If the two lines are represented by equation 57. Th e angle between the stra ight lines
lx2 + 2y2 – 5xy + 5x – 7y + 3 = 0, then l equal to- x2 – y2 – 2y – 1 = 0-
(1) 3 (2) –3 (1) 90° (2) 75°
(3) 2 (4) –2 (3) 60° (4) 36°
56. The angle between the pair of lines x +2xy–y =0 is-
2 2

(1) p/6 (2) p/3

(3) p/2 (4) 0

Check Your Grasp ANSWER KEY Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 2
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 4
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 2 4 2 4 4 1 2 3 3 4
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. 2 3 4 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
Que. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Ans. 1 1 2 3 3 3 1
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 61

NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE QUESTIONS EXERCISE-II

1. A man starts from the point P(–3, 4) and reaches 6. Let the medians of a tr iang le meet at
the point Q(0, 1) touching the x-axis is R(a, 0) such (5, 4) and two of its vertices are (1, 2) &
t hat PR + RQ is minimum. Then |a| = (–2, 0) then absolute difference of abscissa and
__________. ordinate of third vertex is
2. Let 'H' is the orthocentre of DABC, where A(4,–3),
7. A straight line with negative slope passing through
B(–1,2) and C(5,1). If (p,q) is orthocentre of DHBC,
the point (2,8) cuts the coordinate axes at A & B,
then the value of (p2 + q2) is-
3. Given A(0,0), ABCD is a rhombus of side then minimum value of OA + OB (where O is origin)
is equal to
4
10 units where slope of AB is and slope of AD
3 8. A point P is 3units away from line
3
is . The sum of abscissa and ordinate of point C L1º 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and 4 units away from the line L2
4
(where C lies in first quadrant) is- º 8x – 6y + 9 = 0. The reflection of P on L1 is P1;
4. Let P be any point inside DABC as shown in figure. the reflection of P1 on L2 is P2; the reflection of P2
Let length of perpendiculars from P on BC, CA on L1 is P3; and the reflection of P3 on L2 is P4.
and AB is respectively x,y & z. If the length of side Then the area (in sq. units) of figure formed by joining
BC, CA and AB are 5,4 and 3, then the greatest P1,P2,P3 and P4 is
value of x5y4z3 is
9. If lin e L belo ngs to f amily of lin es
C x(2 + l) + y(1 + 5l) + (5 – 2l) = 0 and is at
maximum distance from A(–1,–3), then area of
b=4
x
a=5 triangle formed by L with coordinate axis is D, where
y
P 4D
z is equal to
5
A c=3 B
10. Consider two points A(4,3) & B(6,0). Let P be a point
5. The ratio in which the line 3x + y – 9 = 0 divides on the line x + y = 4, such that |PA – PB| is minimum
the line segment joining the points (1, 3) and (2, 7) m
is a : b (where a and b are coprime numbers), then & area of DAPB is , where m & n are co-primes,
n
|b – a| is equal to then (m – n) is equal to

ANSWER KEY Exercise-II

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 0.6 25 28 1 1 5 18 48 5 9
E
62 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS STRAIGHT LINE EXERCISE-III
1. A straight line passing through the point A(3,4) is such 7. Lines L1 : y – x = 0 and L2 : 2x + y = 0 intersect
that its intercept between the axes is bisected at A. Then the line L3 : y + 2 = 0 at P and Q, respectively.
its equation is- [AIEEE 2006] The bisector of the acute angle between L1 and L2
(1) 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 (2) 4x + 3y = 24 intersects L3 at R. [IIT- 2007]

(3) 3x + 4y = 25 (4) x + y = 7
Statement-1 : The ratio PR : RQ equals 2 2 : 5
2. Let P(–1,0) Q=(0,0) and R(3, 3 3 ) be three points. because
The equation of the bisector of the angle PQR is- Statement-2 : In any triangle, bisector of an angle
[AIEEE 2007], [IIT Scr. 2002] divides the triangle into two similar triangles
(1) Both Statement-1 and Statement-2 are
3
(1) 3x+ y= 0 (2) x + y=0 individually true and Statement-2 is the correct
2
explanation of Statement-1
3 (2) Both Statement-1 and Statement-2 are
(3) x+y=0 (4) x + 3 y = 0
2 individually true but Statement-2 is the not
3. The perpendicular bisector of the line segment correct explanation of Statement-1
joining P(1, 4) and Q(k, 3) has y-intercept –4. Then (3) Statement-1 is true but Statement-2 is false
a possible value of k is- [AIEEE-2008] (4) Statement-1 is false but Statement-2 is true
(1) 1 (2) 2 8. A straight line L through the point (3, –2) is inclined
(3) –2 (4) –4 at an angle 60° to the line 3x + y = 1 . If L also
4. The lines p(p + 1) x – y + q = 0 and
2 intersect the x-axis, then the equation of L is
(p2 + 1)2x + (p2 + 1)y + 2q = 0 are [AIEEE 2009] (1) y + 3x + 2 - 3 3 = 0 [IIT-2011]
Perpendicular to a common line for :
(2) y - 3x + 2 + 3 3 = 0
(1) Exactly two values of p
(2) More than two values of p (3) 3y - x + 3 + 2 3 = 0
(3) No value of p (4) 3y + x - 3 + 2 3 = 0
(4) Exactly one value of p
9. A line is drawn through the point (1, 2) to meet
x y the coordinate axes at P and Q such that it forms
5. The line L given by + = 1 passes through the
5 b a triangle OPQ, where O is the origin. If the area
of the triangle OPQ is least, then the slope of the
point (13, 32). The line K is parallel to L and has
line PQ is : [AIEEE-2012]
x y
the equation + = 1 . Then the distance between 1 1
c 3 (1) - (2) - (3) –4 (4) –2
2 4
L and K is : [AIEEE-2010]
10. Consider the straight lines
23
(1) (2) 17 L1 : x – y = 1 [AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
15
L2 : x + y = 1
17 23
(3) (4) L3 : 2x + 2y = 5
15 17
L4 : 2x – 2y = 7
6. The lines x + y = |a| and ax – y = 1 intersect
The correct statement is :
each other in the first quadrant. Then the set of
all possible values of a is the interval : (1) L1 ^ L2, L2 || L3, L1 intersects L4
[AIEEE-2011] (2) L1 ^ L2, L1 || L3, L1 intersects L2
(1) (–1, 1] (2) (0, ¥) (3) L1 ^ L2, L1 ^ L3, L2 intersects L4
(3) (1, ¥) (4) (–1, ¥) (4) L1 || L4, L2 || L3, L2 intersects L3
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 63
11. If the straight lines x + 3y = 4, 3x + y = 4 and 16. For a point P in the plane, let d1(P) and d2(P) be
x + y = 0 form a triangle, then the triangle is:- the distances of the point P from the lines
(1) Scalene [AIEEE-2012 (Online)] x – y = 0 and x + y = 0 respectively. The area
(2) Equilateral of the region R consisting of all points P lying in

(3) Isosceles the first quadrant of the plane and satisfying

(4) Right angled isosceles 2 < d1(P) + d2(P) < 4, is

12. If the point (1, a) lies in between the straight lines [JEE(Advanced)-2014, 3]

x + y = 1 and 2(x + y) = 3 then 'a' lies in 17. Given three points P, Q, R with P(5, 3) and R lies
interval :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)] on the x-axis. If equation of RQ is
x – 2y = 2 and PQ is parallel to the x-axis, then
æ 3ö æ 1ö
(1) ç 1, ÷ (2) ç 0, ÷ the centroid of DPQR lies on the line:
è 2ø è 2ø
[JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)]

æ3 ö (1) x – 2y + 1 = 0 (2) 5x – 2y = 0
(3) (–¥, 0) (4) ç , ¥ ÷
è2 ø (3) 2x + y – 9 = 0 (4) 2x – 5y = 0
18. Let a and b be any two numbers satisfying
13. A ray of light along x + 3y = 3 gets reflected 1 1 1
2
+ 2 = . Then, the foot of perpendicular from
upon reaching x-axis, the equation of the reflected a b 4
x y
ray is : [JEE(Main)-2013] the origin on the variable line, + = 1 , lies on:
a b
[JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)]
(1) y = x + 3 (2) 3y = x - 3
(1) a circle of radius = 2
(3) y = 3x - 3 (4) 3y = x - 1 (2) a circle of radius = 2
14. Let a, b, c and d be non-zero numbers. If the point
(3) a hyperbola with each semi-axis = 2
of intersection of the lines 4ax + 2ay + c = 0 and
5bx + 2by + d = 0 lies in the fourth quadrant and (4) a hyperbola with each semi-axis = 2
is equidistant from the two axes then : 19. Ihe base of an equilateral triangle is along the line
[JEE(Main)-2014] given by 3x + 4y = 9. If a vertex of the triangle
(1) 2bc – 3ad = 0 is (1, 2), then the length of a side of the triangle
(2) 2bc + 3ad = 0 is : [JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)]

(3) 3bc – 2ad = 0

4 3 4 3 2 3 2 3
(4) 3bc + 2ad = 0 (1) (2) (3) (4)
15 5 15 5
15. Let PS be the median of the triangle with vertices
P (2, 2), Q (6, –1) and R (7, 3). The equation of 20. If the three distinct lines
the line passing through (1, –1) and parallel to PS x + 2ay + a = 0, x + 3by + b = 0 and
is : [JEE(Main)-2014] x + 4ay + a = 0 are concurrent, then the point
(1) 4x – 7y – 11 = 0 (a, b) lies on a :-
(2) 2x + 9y + 7 = 0 [JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)]

(3) 4x + 7y + 3 = 0 (1) circle (2) straight line

(4) 2x – 9y – 11 = 0 (3) parabola (4) hyperbola

E
64 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
21. The circumcentre of a triangle lies at the origin and 26. Consider the set of all lines px + qy + r = 0 such
its centroid is the mid point of the line segment that 3p + 2q + 4r = 0. Which one of the following
joining the points (a2 + l, a2 + l) and (2a, –2a), statements is true ?
a ¹ 0. Then for any a, the orthocentre of this triangle [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
lies on the line : [JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)] (1) The lines are all parallel.
(1) y – (a2 + 1) x = 0 (2) Each line passes through the origin.
(2) y + x = 0 (3) The lines are not concurrent
(3) (a – 1)2x – (a + 1)2 y = 0
æ 3 1ö
(4) y – 2ax = 0 (4) The lines are concurrent at the point ç , ÷
è 4 2ø
22. If a line L is perpendicular to the line 5x – y = l, 27. Let the equations of two sides of a triangle be
and the area of the triangle formed by the line L 3x – 2y + 6 = 0 and 4x + 5y – 20 = 0. If the
and the coordinate axes is 5, then the distance of orthocentre of this triangle is at (1,1), then the
line L from the line x + 5y = 0 is :- equation of its third side is :
[JEE (Main)-2014 (Online)] [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

7 5 (1) 122y – 26x – 1675 = 0

(1) (2)
5 13 (2) 26x + 61y + 1675 = 0
7 5 (3) 122y + 26x + 1675 = 0
(3) (4) (4) 26x – 122y – 1675 = 0
13 7
23. Locus of the image of the point (2, 3) in the line (2x 28. If the line 3x + 4y – 24 = 0 intersects the x-axis
– 3y + 4) + k (x – 2y + 3) = 0, k Î R, is a at the point A and the y-axis at the point B, then
the incentre of the triangle OAB, where O is the
(1) circle of radius 2 [JEE(Main)-2015]
origin, is [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(2) circle of radius 3 (1) (3, 4) (2) (2, 2)

(3) (4, 4) (4) (4, 3)
(3) straight line parallel to x-axis
29. Two sides of a parallelogram are along the lines,
(4) straight line parallel to y-axis
x + y = 3 and x – y + 3 = 0. If its diagonals intersect
24. Two sides of a rhombus are along the lines, at (2,4), then one of its vertex is :
x – y + 1 = 0 and 7x – y – 5 = 0. If its diagonals [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
intersect at (–1, –2), then which one of the following (1) (2,6) (2) (2,1)
is a vertex of this rhombus ? [JEE(Main)-2016]
(3) (3,5) (4) (3,6)
æ 10 7 ö 30. If in a parallelogram ABDC, the coordinates of A,
(1) ç - ,- ÷ (2) (–3, –9)
è 3 3ø B and C are respectively (1, 2), (3, 4) and (2, 5),
then the equation of the diagonal AD is:-
æ1 8ö
(3) (–3, –8) (4) ç , - ÷ [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
è3 3ø
(1) 5x + 3y – 11 = 0
25. Let k be an integer such that triangle with vertices (2) 3x – 5y + 7 = 0
(k, –3k), (5, k) and (–k, 2) has area 28 sq. units. Then (3) 3x + 5y – 13 = 0
the orthocentre of this triangle is at the point: (4) 5x – 3y + 1 = 0
[JEE(Main)-2017] 31. If the straight line, 2x–3y+17 = 0 is perpendicular
to the line passing through the points (7, 17) and
æ 1ö æ 1ö
(1) ç 2, ÷ (2) ç 2, - ÷ (15, b), then b equals :-
è 2ø è 2ø
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]

æ 3ö æ 3ö 35 35
(3) ç 1, ÷ (4) ç 1, - ÷ (1) –5 (2) – (3) (4) 5
è 4ø è 4ø 3 3

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 65
32. If a straight line passing thourgh the point 37. Lines are drawn parallel to the line 4x–3y+2= 0, at
P(–3, 4) is such that its intercepted portion between
3
the coordinate axes is bisected at P, then its equation a distance from the origin.
is : [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
5

(1) x – y + 7 = 0 Then which one of the following points lies on

any of these lines ? [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(2) 3x – 4y + 25 = 0
(3) 4x + 3y = 0 æ 1 2ö
(1) ç - , ÷
(4) 4x – 3y + 24 = 0 è 4 3ø
33. Suppose that the points (h,k), (1,2) and (–3,4) lie
on the line L1. If a line L2 passing through the points æ1 1ö
k (2) ç , ÷
(h,k) and (4,3) is perpendicular to L1, then è 4 3ø
h
equals:- [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
æ 1 2ö
1 (3) ç - , - ÷
è 4 3ø
(1) 3 (2) -
7
æ1 1ö
1 (4) ç , - ÷
(3) (4) 0 è4 3ø
3
34. A point on the straight line, 3x + 5y = 15 which 38. A straight line L at a distance of 4 units from the
is equidistant from the coordinate axes will lie only origin makes positive intercepts on the coordinate
in :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019] axes and the perpendicular from the origin to this
(1) 1st and 2nd quadrants line makes an angle of 60° with th e line
(2) 4th quadrant x + y = 0. Then an equation of the line L is :

(3) 1st, 2nd and 4th quadrant [JEE(Main)-April,2019]

(4) 1st quadrant

35. If the two lines x + (a – 1) y = 1 and (1) ( ) (
3 +1 x + )
3 -1 y = 8 2
2x + a2y = 1(aÎR – {0, 1}) are perpendicular, then
the distance of their point of intersection from the
origin is :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019] (2) ( ) (
3 -1 x + )
3 +1 y = 8 2

2 2
(1) (2) (3) 3x + y = 8
5 5

2 2 (4) x + 3y = 8
(3) (4)
5 5
39. The equation y = sinx sin(x + 2) – sin 2(x+1)
36. Slope of a line passing through P(2, 3) and represents a straight line lying in :
intersecting the line, x + y = 7 at a distance of 4
units from P, is [JEE(Main)-April,2019] [JEE(Main)-April,2019]

(1) second and third quadrants only

5 -1 1- 5
(1) (2)
5 +1 1+ 5 (2) third and fourth quadrants only

1- 7 7 -1 (3) first, third and fourth quadrants

(3) (4)
1+ 7 7 +1 (4) first, second and fourth quadrants

E
66 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
40. The locus of the mid-points of the perpendiculars 41. Let C be the centroid of the triangle with
drawn from points on the line, x = 2y to the line vertices (3, –1), (1, 3) and (2, 4). Let P be the
x = y is : [JEE(Main)-January,2020] point of intersection of the lines x + 3y – 1 = 0
and 3x – y + 1 = 0. Then the line passing through
(1) 2x – 3y = 0
the points C and P also passes through the point :
(2) 7x – 5y = 0 [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

(3) 5x – 7y = 0 (1) (7, 6) (2) (–9, –6)

(4) 3x – 2y = 0 (3) (–9, –7) (4) (9, 7)

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS ANSWER KEY Exercise-III

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 2 1 4 4 4 3 3 2 4 3
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 2 3 2 6 4 1 1 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 3 2 1 4 1 4 4 2 4 4
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 4 4 3 1 4 3 1 1 2 3
Que. 41
Ans. 2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 67
CIRCLE
1. DEFINITION :
A circle is the locus of a point which moves in a plane in such a way that its
distance from a fixed point is always constant. The fixed point is called the
centre and constant distance is called the radius of the circle.
i.e. CP = constant distance = Radius

Note : (i) If r (r > 0) is the radius of a circle, the diameter d = 2r is the maximum distance between any two points
on the given circle.
(ii) The length of the curve or perimeter (also called circumference) of circle is = 2pr or pd
pd2
(iii) The area of circle = pr2 or
4
(iv) Lines joining any two points of a circle is called chord of circle.
(v) Curved section of any two point of a circle is called arc of circle.
(vi) Angle subtended at the centre of a circle by any arc is given by = arc/radius.
(vii) Angle subtended at the centre of a circle by an arc is double of angle subtended at the circumference of
a circle.

Ex.1 Find the area of a circle which passes through (4, 6) and its centre is (1, 2).

Sol. Þ Radius r = b4 - 1g + b6 - 2g
2 2
=5

Area = pr2 = p. 52 = 25p

Equation of a Circle : the curve traced by the moving point is called its circumference. i.e., the equation of
any circle is satisfied by co-oridinates of all points on its circumference.
OR
The equation of the circle is meant the equation of the circumference.
OR
It is the set of all points lying on the circumference of the circle.

2. STANDARD FORMS OF EQUATION OF A CIRCLE :

2.1 Central Form of Equation of a circle :

The equation of a circle having centre (h, k) and radius r is r

(x,y)
(x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 (h,k)

Note : (i) If the centre is origin, then the equation of the cirlce is : x2 + y2 = r2
(ii) If r = 0 than circle is called point circle and its equation is : (x – h) 2 + (y – k)2 = 0
Ex.2 Find the equation of a circle whose centre is (3, 5) and radius is 4.
Sol. (x – 3)2 + (y – 5)2 = 42
Þ x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 – 20y + 25 = 16
Þ x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 18 = 0
Ex.3 Find the equation of the circle whose centre is the point of intersection of the lines 2x – 3y + 4 = 0 and
3x + 4y – 5 = 0 and passes through the origin
æ 1 22 ö
Sol. The point of intersection of the lines 2x – 3y + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 is ç - , ÷
è 17 17 ø
E
68 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
æ 1 22 ö
Therefore, the centre of the circle is a t ç - , ÷.
è 17 17 ø
Since the origin lies on the circle, its distance from the centre of the circle is radius of the circle, therefore,

2 2
æ 1 ö æ 22 ö 485
r= ç- - 0÷ + ç -0÷ =
è 17 ø è 17 ø 289

\ The equation of the circle becomes

2 2
æ 1 ö æ 22 ö 485
çx+ ÷ + çy- ÷ = 289
è 17 ø è 17 ø

or 17(x2 + y2) + 2x – 44y = 0

Ex.4 Find the equation of the circle concentrec with the circle x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y – 5 = 0 and passing through the
point (–2, –7).
Sol. The given equation of circle is x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y – 5 = 0
Therefore, the centre of the circle is at (4, –3). Since the required circle is concentric with this circle, therefore,
the centre of the required circle is also at (4, –3). Since the point (–2, –7) lies on the circle, the distance of the
centre from this point is the radius of the circle. therefore, we get

r= (4 + 2)2 + (–3 + 7)2 = 52

Hence, the equation of the circle becomes

(x – 4)2 + (y + 3)2 = 52
or x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y – 27 = 0
2.2 General Equation of a circle : The general equation of a circle is x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0,
Where g, f, c are constants.
(i) Centre of a general equation of a circle is (–g, –f)

1 1
i.e. (– coefficient of x, – coefficient of y)
2 2

(ii) Radius of a general equation of a circle is

g2 + f 2 - c

Note : (i) The general equation of second degree ax2 + by2 + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 represents a circle if
a = b ¹ 0 and h = 0
(ii) Locus of a point P represent a circle if its distance from two points A and B is not equal i.e. PA = kPB
respresent a circle if k ¹ 1
(iii) General equation of a circle represents
(a) A real circle if g2 + f2 – c > 0
(b) A point circle if g2 + f2 – c = 0
(c) An imaginary circle if g2 + f2 – c < 0
(iv) In General equation of a circle
(a) If c = 0 Þ The circle passes through origin
(b) If f = 0 Þ The centre is on x – axis
(c) If g = 0 Þ The centre is on y – axis

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 69
Ex.5 Find the centre and radius of the circle
2x2 + 2y2 = 3x – 5y + 7
Sol. The given equation of circle is
2x2 + 2y2 = 3x – 5y + 7

3 5 7
or x2 + y2 – x+ y– =0
2 2 2

1 æ 3ö 3 1 æ5ö 5
If centre (a, b), then a=– ç- ÷ = and b = – ç ÷ = –
2 è 2ø 4 2 è2ø 4

æ3 5ö
\ Centre of circle is (a, b) i.e., ç , - ÷
è4 4ø

9 25 7
and radius of the circle = a 2 + b2 - (constant term) = + +
16 16 2

9 + 25 + 56 3 10
= =
16 4
Ex. 6 If (6, –3) is the one extremity of diameter to the circle x2 + y2 – 3x + 8y – 4 = 0 then its other extremity is–

æ3 ö
(1) ç , -4÷ (2) (–3, –5) (3) (3, –5) (4) (3, 5)
è2 ø
æ3 ö
Sol.(2) Centre of circle is çè , -4÷ø
2
Let the other extremity is (h, k)

æ 6 + h ö 3 æ -3 + k ö
\ çè 2 ÷ø = 2 , çè 2 ÷ø = -4 Þ (–3, –5)

Ex.7 If y = 2x + K is a diameter to the circle 2(x 2 + y2) + 3x + 4y – 1 = 0, then K equals –

1
(1) 0 (2) 1 (3) 2 (4)
2
æ 3 ö
Sol.(4) Centre of circle = ç - , -1÷
è 4 ø
this lies on diameter y = 2x + K
3 1
Þ –1 = - × 2+KÞ K=
4 2
2.3 Diametral Form : If (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) be the extremities of a diameter, then the equation of circle is
(x – x1) (x – x2) + (y – y1) (y – y2) = 0

Ex.8 The sides of a square are x = 2, x = 3, y = 1 and y = 2. Find the equation of the circle drawn on the diagonals
of the square as its diameter.
Sol. Let ABCD be a square and equation of its sides AB, BC, CD and DA are y = 1, x = 3, y = 2 and x = 2
respectively.
Then A º (2, 1), B º (3, 1), C º (3, 2) and D º (2, 2)
Since diagonals of squares are the diameters of the circle,
then equation of circle is
(x – 2) (x – 3) + (y – 1) (y – 2) = 0
Þ x2 + y2 – 5x – 3y + 8 = 0 (If AC as diameter).

E
70 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.9 If (1, 2) and (3, 4) are end points of a diameter of circle, then its equation is –
(1) x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 11 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 11 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 11 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) (x – 1) (x – 3) + (y – 2) (y – 4) = 0 Þ x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 11 = 0

2.4 Parametric Equation of a Circle :

(i) The parametric equation of a circle x2 + y2 = r2 are x = rcosq, y = rsinq. Hence parametric coordinates
of any point lying on the circle x2 + y2 = r2 are (rcosq, rsinq)

(ii) The parametric equations of the circle (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2 are x = h + rcosq, y = k + rsinq. hence
parametric coordinates of any point lying on the circle are (h + rcosq, k + rsinq)

(iii) Parametric equations of the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is

x = –g + ( )
g2 + f 2 - c cos q ; y = –f + ( )
g2 + f 2 - c sin q

Ex.10 Parametric coordinates of any point of the circle x2 + y2 + 2x – 3y – 4 = 0 are –

æ 7 7 ö æ7 7 ö
(1) çè -1 + cos q, 3 + sin q÷ø (2) çè cos q, sin q÷ø
3 3 3 3

æ 7 3 7 ö
(3) çè -1 + cos q, + sin q÷ø (4) None of these
3 2 3

æ 3ö
Sol.(4) Centre = çè -1, ÷ø
2

9 29
radius = 1+ +4 =
4 2
æ 29 3 29 ö
\ Parametric coordinates of any point are çç -1 + 4 cos q, 2 + 4 sin q ÷÷
è ø
Ex.11 Cartesian equations of a circle whose parametric equation are x = –7 + 4cosq, y = 3 + 4sinq is –
(1) (x + 7)2 + (y – 3)2 = 16 (2) (x – 7)2 + (y – 3)2 = 16
(3) (x – 7)2 + (y + 3)2 = 16 (4) (x + 7)2 + (y + 3)2 = 16
Sol.(1) Q x = –7 + 4cosq, y = 3 + 4sinq or x + 7 = 4cosq, y – 3 = 4sinq squaring and adding
(x + 7)2 + (y – 3)2 = 16(cos2q + sin2 q) Þ (x + 7)2 + (y – 3)2 = 16

3. SOME PARTICULAR CASES OF THE CENTRAL FORM OF THE EQUATION OF CIRCLE :

(i) When the circle passes through the origin (0, 0) and has intercepts 2a and 2b on the X-axis
and Y-axis respectively :
then equation of circle is

(x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = a2 + b2

or x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2by = 0

Note : If a circle is passing through origin, then constant term is absent i.e,

x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 71
(ii) When the circle touches x-axis
Let (a, b) be the centre of the circle, then radius = |b|
\ equation of circle is (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = b2
Þ x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2by + a2 = 0
Note : If the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches the x-axis, then

|–f| = g 2 +f 2 - c or c = g2

(iii) When the circle touches y-axis

Let (a, b) be the centre of the circle, then radius = |a|
\ Equation of circle is (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = a2
Þ x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2by + b2 = 0
Note : If the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches the y-axis, then

|–g| = g2 + f 2 – c or c = f2

(iv) When the circle touches both axes :

Here |OM| = |ON|
\ Let centre is (a, a)
also radius = |a|
\ Equation of circle is (x – a)2 + (y – a)2 = a2
Þ x2 + y2 – 2ax – 2ay + a2 = 0
Note-1 : If the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches both the axes, then

|–g| = |–f| = g2 + f 2 - c

\ c = g 2 = f2

\ g=f=± c

\ Equation of circle is x2 + y2 ± 2 c x ± 2 cy + c = 0

Þ (x ± c )2 + (y ± c )2 = c
Note-2 : If a > 0 then centres for I, II, III and IV quadrants are (a, a), (–a, a), (,–a –a) and (a, –a)
respectively.
Then equation of circles in these quadrants are
(x – a)2 + (y – a)2 = a2, (x + a)2 + (y – a)2 = a2, (x + a)2 + (y + a)2 = a2 and (x – a)2 + (y + a)2 = a2,
respectively.
(v) When the circle touches x-axis and cut off intercepts on y-axis of length 2l :
Let centre be (a, b)
\ radius = |b|
CQ = CN = |b|

In DCMQ, b2 = a2 + l2, a = (b 2 - l 2 ) (for I quadrant)

\ Equation of circle is
2
é x – (b2 – l 2 ) ù + (y – b)2 = b 2
ë û

E
72 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Note : Q Length of intercepts on y-axis of the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is 2l = 2 (f - c)

2

i.e., l2 = f2 – c
and also circle touches x-axis then
c = g2
\ l2 = f2 – g2, l2 = (–f)2 – (–g)2
\ locus of centre is y2 – x2 = l2 (rectangular hyperbola)
(vi) When the circle touches y-axis and cut off intercept on x-axis of length 2k :
Let centre be (a, b)
\ radius = |a|
CN = CQ = |a|
In DCMQ, a2 = b2 + k2

b= (a2 - k 2 ) (for I quadrant)

\ Equation of circle is

( )
2
(x – a)2 + y – a 2 – k 2 = a2

2
Note : Length of intercept on x-axis of the circle x 2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is 2k = 2 (g - c)

i.e., k2 = g2 – c
and also circle touches y-axis
then c = f2 \ k2 = g2 – f2 = (– g)2 – (–f)2
\ locus of centre is x2 – y2 = k2 (rectangular hyperbola)
(vii) When the circle cut off intercepts on x-axis and y-axis of lengths 2l and 2k and not passing
through origin :
Let centre be (a, b)
\ radius = CP = CQ = l (say)
(CP)2 = (CQ)2 = l2
a2 + k2 = b2 + l2 = l2

\ a= l2 - k2 [for I quadrant]
and b = l2 - l2

(x – ) ( )
2 2
Q Equation of circle is l2 – k2 + y – l 2 – l2 = l2

(viii) When the circle passes through the origin and centre lies on x-axis :
Let centre of circle be C(a, 0)
\ radius = a
\ Equation of circle is
(x – a)2 + (y – 0)2 = a2
or x2 + y2 – 2ax = 0
(ix) When the circle passes through origin and centre lies on y-axis :
Let centre of circle be C(0, a)
\ radius = a
\ Equation of circle is
(x – 0)2 + (y – a)2 = a2
or x2 + y2 – 2ay = 0
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 73
Note : (i) Circumcircle of a triangle : If we are given sides of triangle, then first we should find vertices then we find
the equation using general form.
Alternate : If equation of the sides are L1 = 0, L2 = 0 and L3 = 0 then equation of circle is
(L1.L2) + l(L2.L3) + µ(L3.L1) = 0. Where l and µ are the constant which can be find out by the conditions.
Coefficient of x2 = coefficient of y2 and coefficient of xy = 0
(ii) If the triangle is right angled then its hypotenuse is the diameter of the circle. So using diameter form we
can find the equation.
(iii) Circle passing through three given points : By putting three points in general equation
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0. We get three equations solving these three equations we get value of g, f and
c. Putting these value in general equation we get the required equation.
Alternate : From given three point taking any two as extremities of Diameter of a circle S = 0 and
equation of straight lines passing through these two points is L = 0. Then required equation of circle is
S + lL = 0.
Where l is a parameter which can be find out by putting third point in the equation.
(iv) Circumcircle of a square or a rectangle : Diagonals of the square and rectangle will be diameters of the
circumcircle. Hence finding the vertices of a diagonal, we can easily determine the required equation.
Alternate : If sides of a quadrilateral are L1 = 0, L2 = 0, L3 = 0 and L4 = 0. Then equation of circume circle
is L1L3 + lL2L4 = 0, where l is a constant which can be find out be the condition of circle.
Ex.12 Find the equation of the circle which touches the axis of y at a distance of 4 units from the orgin and cuts the
intercept of 6 units from the axis of x.
Sol. CM = NO = 4
In DPCM, (PC)2 = (3)2 + (4)2
\ PC = 5
Radius of circle = 5
\ NC = 5
centre of circle is (5, 4)
\ Equation of circle, if centre in I quadrant (x – 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25
If centre in II, III and IV quadrant, then equation are
(x + 5)2 + (y – 4)2 = 25, (x + 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25 and (x – 5)2 + (y + 4)2 = 25
Hence, there are 4 circles which satisfy the given conditions. They are
(x ± 5)2 + (y ± 4)2 = 25
Ex.13 A circle touches x axis at +3 distance and cuts an intercept of 8 in +ve direction of y axis. Its equation is –
(1) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y – 9 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y – 9 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 9 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 + 6x + 10y + 9 = 0
Sol. From figure Y

Radius of Circle = 32 + 4 2 = 5 and centre is (3, 5) M 3 C

4
Hence equation is (x –3) + (y – 5) = 5
2 2 2
5 X
A
O T
Þ x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + 9 = 0

Ex.14 A circle of radius 5 units touches the co-ordinate axes in first quadrant. If the circle makes one complete roll
on x-axis along the positive direction of x-axis, find its equation in the new position.
E
74 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Sol. Let C be the centre of the circle in its initial position and D be its centre in the new position.

Since the circle touches the co-ordinates axes in first quadrant and the radius of circle be 5 units.

\ Centre of circle is (5, 5)

Moving length of circle = circumference of the

circle = 2pr = 2p(5) = 10p

Now centre of circle in new position is

(5 + 10p, 5) and radius is 5 units, therefore, its
equation will be

(x – 5 – 10p)2 + (y – 5)2 = 52

or x2 + y2 – 10(1 + 2p)x – 10y + 100p2 + 100p + 25 = 0

4. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT TO A CIRCLE :

A point (x1, y1) lies outside, on or inside a circle S º x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 according as
S1 º x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c is positive, zero or negative i.e.
S1 > 0 Þ Point is outside the circle.
S1 = 0 Þ Point is on the circle.
S1 < 0 Þ Point is inside the circle.
4.1 Maximum and minimum distance of a point from the circle :
Let any point P(x1, y1) and circle
S º x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
The centre and radius of the circle are
C(–g, –f) and (g2 + f 2 - c) respectively
Case-I : If P inside the circle
In this case S1 < 0

Q r= (g2 + f 2 - c) = CA = CB

The minimum distance of P from circle = PA = CA – CP = |r – CP|

and the maximum distance of P from circle = PB = CB + CP = |r + CP|
Case-II : If P outside the circle
In this case S1 > 0
the minimum distance of P from circle = PA = CP – CA = |CP – r|
and the maximum distance of P from the circle = PB = CP + CB = |r + CP|
Case-III : If P on the circle
In this case S1 = 0
the minimum distance of P from the circle = 0
and the maximum distance of P from the circle = PA = 2r

Ex.15 Point (6, –3) lies outside the circle x2 + y2 –3x + 4y + 5 = 0 becuase S1 = 36 + 9 – 18 – 12 + 5 = 20 > 0 and
point (1, –1) lies on the circle because S1 = 1 + 1 –3 –4 + 5 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 75
Ex.16 Find the least and greatest distance of point (6, 8) from circle x2 + y2 = 4 is
Sol. Here point is (6, 8), centre of circle is (0, 0) and radius is 2
hence AC = 36 + 64 = 10
greatest distance is = 10 + 2 = 12
least distance is = 10 – 2 = 8
5. LINE AND CIRCLE :

Let L = 0 be a line and S = 0 be a circle, if 'r' be the radius of a circle and p be the length of perpendicular from
the centre of circle on the line, then if
B
p > r Þ Line is outside the circle
p
p = r Þ Line touches the circle
r
p < r Þ Line is the chord of circle
A
p = 0 Þ Line is diameter of circle

Note : (i) Length of the intercept made by the circle on the line is = 2 r 2 - p2

a 2 (1 + m2 ) - c2
(ii) The length of the intercept made by line y = mx + c with the circle x 2 + y2 = a2 is 2
1 + m2
5.1 Condition of Tangency : A line L = 0 touches the circle S = 0, If length of perpendicular drawn from the
centre of the circle to the line is equal to radius of the circle i.e. p = r. This is the condition of tangency for the
line L = 0

Circle x2 + y2 = a2 will touch the line y = mx + c if c = ± a 1 + m2

Again
(a) If a 2 (1+m2) - c2 > 0 line will meet the circle at real and different points.
(b) If c2 = a2 (1 + m2) line will touch the circle.
(c) If a2 (1 + m2) – c2 < 0 line will meet circle at two imaginary points.
5.2 Intercepts made on coordinate axes by the circle :
The intercept made by the circle x2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 on
(i) x axis = 2 g2 - c (ii) y axis = 2 f 2 - c
Note : Circle x2 + y 2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 cuts
(i) x axis in two real, coincident or imaginary points according as g2 >, =, < c
(ii) y axis in two real, coincident or imaginary points according as f2 >, =, < c
Ex.17 For what value of m the line 3x + 4y = m touches the circle x 2 + y2 – 2x – 8 = 0
(1) –18, 12 (2) 18, 12 (3) 18, –12 (4) –18, –12

Sol.(3) Here centre is (1, 0) and radius is 12 + 8 = 3 given line will touch the circle if p = r

3-m
Þ = 3 Þ 3 – m = ± 15 Þ m = 18, –12
9 + 16
Ex.18 If the line x – y + 1 = 0 is a chord of the circle x 2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 4 = 0 then find the length of this chord –
Sol. Centre of the circle = (1, –2)
1+ 2 +1
radius = 1+ 4 + 4 = 3 here p = =2 2
2
\ Length of chord = 2 a 2 - p2 = 2 9 - 8 = 2

E
76 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.19 The length of intercept on y axis, by a circle whose diameter is the line joining the points (–4, 3) and
(12, –1) is-

(1) 2 13 (2) 13 (3) 4 13 (4) None of these

Sol.(3) Here equation of the circle (x + 4) (x – 12) + (y – 3) (y + 1) = 0

or x2 + y2 – 8x – 2y – 51 = 0

Hence intercept on y axis = 2 f 2 - c = 2 1 - (–51) = 4 13

6. EQUATION OF TANGENT & NORMAL :

6.1 Equation of Tangent : The equation of tangent to the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at a point
(x1, y1) is xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y +y1) + c = 0 or T = 0

Note : (i) The equation of tangent to circle x2 + y2 = a2 at point (x1, y1) is xx1+ yy1 = a2

(ii) Slope Form : From condition of tangency for every value of m, the line y = mx ± a 1 + m2 is a
F mam ±a I
tangent of the circle x2 + y2 = a2 and its point of contact is GH 1+ m 2
,
1+ m 2 JK
6.2 Equation of Normal : Normal to a curve at any point P of a curve is the straight line passes through P and
is perpendicular to the tangent at P.
The equation of normal to the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at any point (x1, y1) is
y1 + f
y – y1 = (x – x1)
x1 + g

Note : (i) The equation of normal to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 at any point (x1, y1) is xy1 – x1y = 0
(ii) The equation of any normal to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 is y = mx where m is the slope of normal.
(iii) The equation of any normal to the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is y + f = m(x + g). where m is the
slope of normal
(iv) The normal to the circle always passes through the centre of the circle.
6.3 Length of Tangent : From any point, say P(x1, y1) two tangents can be drawn to a circle which are real,
coincident or imaginary according as P lies outside, on or inside the circle.
Let PQ and PR be two tangents drawn from P(x1, y1) to the
circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0.
S1 Q
Then PQ = PR is called the length of tangent drawn from
P
point P and is given by
(x1, y1)
PQ = PR = x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c = S1 R

6.4 Pair to Tangents : From a given point P(x1, y1) two tangents Q
PQ and PR can be drawn to the circle P
S = x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0. Their combined equation is (x1, y1)
SS1 = T . Where S = 0 is the equation of circle T = 0 is the
2
R
equation of tangent at (x1, y1) and S1 is obtained by replacing x
by x1 and y by y1 in S.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 77
6.5 Angle between two Tangents : From a given point P(x1, y1) two tangents PQ and PR can be drawn to the
circle
S = x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fg + c = 0

If the angle between these tangent is 2q then

r r
2q = 2tan–1 = 2sin–1
S1 CP

6.6 Area of the quadrilitral PQCR is = r S1

Ex.20 Find the equation of the normal to the circle x2 + y2 – 5x + 2y – 48 = 0 at the point (5, 6)
Sol. The equation of the tangent to the circle x2 + y2 – 5x + 2y – 48 = 0 at (5, 6) is

æ x +5 ö æ y +6 ö
5x + 6y – 5 ç ÷ + 2ç ÷ – 48 = 0
è 2 ø è 2 ø
Þ 10x + 12y – 5x – 25 + 2y + 12 – 96 = 0 Þ 5x + 14y – 109 = 0

5 14
\ Slope of the tangent = – Þ Slope of the normal = .
14 5

Hence, the equation of the normal at (5, 6) is

y –6 = (14/5) (x – 5) Þ 14x – 5y – 40 = 0
Ex.21 Find the equations of the tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 which are perpendicular to the line 12x – 5y + 9=0
Also, find the points of contact.
Sol. The slope of a line perpendicular to the line 12x – 5y + 9 = 0 is –5/12. So, the circle x 2 + y2 = 22
Here a = 2 and m = –5/12. So, the equations of the tangents are
2
5 æ 5 ö
y=– x ± 2 × 1 +ç- ÷ Þ 5x + 12y = ±26
12 è 12 ø

æ am a ö æ 10 24 ö
The points of contact are ç ± ,± ÷÷ i.e., ç ± , m ÷
ç 1+ m 2
1 + m2 è 13 13 ø
è ø
Ex.22 Length of the tangent drawn from point (1, 5) to the circle 2x2 + 2y2 = 3 is –
(1) 7 (2) 7 2 (3) 7 2 / 2 (4) None of these
Sol. Dividing the equation of the circle by 2, we get
3 2FG2
Þ x +y -
3 IJ
x2 + y2 =
2 H 2
=0
K
3 3 7 7 2
\ length of the tangent = (1)2 + (5)2 - = 26 - = =
2 2 2 2
Ex.23 The equation of pair of tangents drawn from the point, (0, 1) to the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y = 0 is –
(1) 4x2 – 4y2 + 6xy + 6x + 8y – 4 = 0 (2) 4x2 – 4y2 + 6xy – 6x + 8y – 4 = 0
(3) x2 – y2 + 3xy – 3x + 2y – 1 = 0 (4) x2 – y2 + 6xy – 6x + 8y – 4 = 0

Sol. Let S = x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y then

S1 = 02 + 12 –2.0 + 4.1 = 5
T = x.0 + y.1 – (x +0) + 2 (y + 1) = ( –x + 3y + 2)
\ the equation of the pair of tangent SS1 = T2
(x2 +y2 – 2x + 4x + 4y).5 = (–x + 3y +2)2 Þ 4x2 – 4y2 + 6xy – 6x + 8y – 4 = 0
E
78 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.24 The angle between the two tangents from (a, b) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 is-

æ a ö æ a ö æ S1 ö
(1) tan–1 ç ÷ (2) 2tan–1 ç ÷ (3) 2tan–1 ç ÷ (4) None of these
è S1 ø è S1 ø è a ø
Sol.(2) Let PT and PQ be the tangents drawn from P(a, b) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 and let Ð TPQ = q. If O is the
centre of the circle then Ð TPO = Ð QPO = q/2
T
q OT a
\ tan = =
2 PT S1 q/2 •O
P q/2

q æ a ö æ a ö Q
Þ = tan–1 ç ÷ Þ q = 2tan ç
–1
÷
2 è S1 ø è S1 ø

7. DIRECTOR CIRCLE :

The locus of the point of intersection of two perpendicular tangents to a circle is called the Director circle.
Let the circle be x2 + y2 = a2, then equation of the pair of tangents to a circle from a point (x1, y1), is
(x2 + y2 – a2)(x12 + y12 – a2) = (xx1 + yy1 – a2)2. If this represents a pair of perpendicular lines then coefficient
of x2 + coefficient of y2 =0
i.e. (x12 + y12 – a2 – x12) + (x12+ y12 – a2 – y12) = 0
Þ x12 + y12 = 2a2
Hence the equation of director circle is x2 + y2 = 2a2
Hence director cricle is a concentric circle whose radius is 2 times the radius of the given cricle
Note : (i) Director circle of circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + 2c – g2 – f2 = 0.
eg. Director circle of x2 + y2 = 8 is
x2 + y2 = 8 × 2 Þ x2 + y2 = 16

8. CHORD OF CONTACT :

The chord joining the two points of contact of tangents to a circle drawn from any point P is called chord of
contact of P with respect to the given circle.
C
Let the given point is P(x1, y1) and the circle is S = 0 then
P
equation of the chord of contact is
(x1, y1)
T = xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f(y + y1) + c = 0 B

Note : (i) It is clear from the above that the equation to the chord of contact coincides with the equation of the
tangent, if the point (x1, y1) lies on the circle.

(ii) The length of chord of contact = 2 r 2 - p2

a (x12 + y12 - a 2 )3/ 2

(iii) Area of DPBC is given by (for circle x2 + y2 = a2)
x12 + y12

Ex.25 Find the equation of the chord of contact of tangents drawn from the point (2, –3) to the circle
x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y – 12 = 0
Sol. The required equations is

æ x +2 ö æ y-3 ö
2x – 3y + 4 ç ÷ – 6ç ÷ – 12 = 0
è 2 ø è 2 ø
Þ 2x – 3y + 2x + 4 – 3y + 9 – 12 = 0 Þ 4x – 6y + 1 = 0
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 79
Ex.26 Distance between the chord of contact with respect to point (0, 0) and (g, f) of circle
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is-

1 2 g2 + f 2 + c g2 + f 2 - c
(1) (g + f2 + c) (2) g2 + f2 (3) (4)
2 2 g2 - f 2 2 g2 + f 2

Sol.(4) Chord of contact with respect to (0, 0)

Þ gx + fy + c = 0 ..... (1)
Chord of contact with respect to (g, f)
gx + fy + g(x + g) + f(y + f) + c = 0
Þ 2gx + 2fy + g2 + f2 + c = 0
1 2
Þ gx + fy + (g + f2 + c) = 0 ...... (2)
2
1 2 2
(g + f + c) - c
2 g2 + f 2 - c
Distance between (1) and (2) is = =
g2 + f 2 2 g2 + f 2

9. EQUATION OF A CHORD WHOSE MIDDLE POINT IS GIVEN :

This equation of the chord of the circle x2 + y2 = a2

whose middle point P (x1, y1) is given is
•O
y1 -x1
Slop of line OP = ; slope of AB = A B
x1 y1 P(x1,y1)

–x1
So equation of chord is (y – y1) = (x – x1) or xx1 + yy1 = x12 + y12. Which can be represent by T = S1
y1

Ex.27 The equation of chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 8x bisected at the point (4, 3).
(1) 3y = 1 (2) y = 3 (4) 4x – 3y = 9 (4) None
Sol.(2) T = S1 Þ x(4) + y(3) – 4(x + 4) = 16 + 9 – 32
Þ 3y – 9 = 0 Þ y = 3
Ex.28 Find the locus of the middle points of the chords of the circle x2 + y2 = a2 which subtend a right angle at the
centre.
Sol. Let (h, k) be the mid-point of a chord AB of the circle x2 + y2 = a2. Then, equation of AB is
hx + ky – a2 = h2 + k2 – a2 [using T = S1]
or hx + ky = h + k 2 2

The combined equation of OA and OB is

2
æ hx + ky ö
x2 + y2 = a2 ç 2 2 ÷
è h +k ø

or (h2 + k2) (x2 + y2) – a2(hx + ky)2 = 0

OA and OB will be perpendicular if coeff. of x2 + coeff. of y2 = 0
Þ (h2 + k2)2 – a2h2 + (h2 + k2)2 – a2k2 = 0
Þ 2(h2 + k2) – a2(h2 + k2) = 0 Þ 2(h2 + k2) – a2 = 0
So, locus of (h, k) is 2(x2 + y2) – a2 = 0

E
80 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
10. DIAMETER OF A CIRCLE :
Diameter
The locus of middle point of a system of parallel chords of a circle
B x+my=0
is called the diameter of that circle. The diameter of the circle x2 +
y2 = r2 corresponding to the system of parallel chords y = mx + c 0
• P(h, k)
is x + my = 0
y=mx+c
Note : (i) Every diameter passes through the centre of the circle.
(ii) A diameter is perpendicular to the system of parallel chords. A

Ex.29 The diameter of the circle x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y – 11 = 0 corresponding to a system of chords parallel to the line
x – 2y + 1 = 0
(1) x – 2y + 3 = 0 (2) 2x – y + 3 = 0 (3) 2x + y – 3 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) The centre of the given circle is (2, –1) the equation of the line perpendicular to chord x – 2y + 1 = 0 is
2x + y + k = 0.
Since the line passes through the point (2, –1) therefore k = –3
The equation of diameter is 2x + y – 3 = 0

11. CIRCLE THROUGH THE POINTS OF INTERSECTION :

(i) The equation of the circle passing through the points of intersection of the circle S = 0 and line L = 0 is
S + lL = 0.
(ii) The equation of the circle passing through the points of intersection of the two circle S = 0 and S´ = 0 is
S + lS´ = 0. Where (l ¹ –1)
In the above both cases l can be find out according to the given problem.
Ex.30 If lines y = x + 3 cuts the circle x2 + y2 = a2 in two points A and B, then equation of circle with AB as diameter
is-
(1) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y + a2 + 9 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0 (4) None of these

Sol. The equation of circle passing through the point of intersection of circle and line can be written as
x2 + y2 – a2 + l(x – y + 3) = 0

FG - l , l IJ , which lies on the line y = x + 3

The centre of this circle is
H 2 2K
the circle.
l l
\ - - +3=0
2 2
Þ l=3
Thus equation of the required circle is (x 2 + y2 – a2) + 3(x – y + 3) = 0
x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
Ex.31 Find the equation of the circle through the intersection of the circles x2 + y2 – 8x –2y + 7 = 0 and
x2 + y2 – 4x + 10y + 8 = 0, having its centre on y-axis.
Sol. The equation of any circle through the intersection of the circles S1 = 0 and S2 = 0 is S1 + lS2 = 0
Hence, the equation of the required circle is
(x2 + y2 – 8x – 2y + 7) + l(x2 + y2 – 4x + 10y + 8) = 0 ..... (i)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 81
Þ x2(1 + l) + y2(1 + l) – 4x(l + 2) – 2y(1 – 5l) + 7 + 8l = 0

æ l +2 ö æ 1 - 5l ö 7 + 8l
Þ x2 + y2 – 4 ç ÷ x – 2ç ÷ l+ =0
è l +1 ø è l +1 ø l +1
The coordinates of the centre of this circle are

æ 2l + 4 1 - 5 l ö
ç , ÷
è l +1 l +1 ø
If the centre of this circle lies on y-axis, then

2l + 4
x coordinate of the centre = 0 Þ = 0 Þ l = –2
l +1

putting l = –2 in (i), we get the equation of the required circle as x2 + y2 + 22y + 9 = 0

12. COMMON CHORD OF TWO CIRCLES :

The line joining the points of intersection of two circles is called the common chord. If the equation of two
circle.
P
S1 = x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y + c1 = 0 and
S2 = x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y + c2 = 0, c1 c2
s2=0
then equation of common chord is S1 – S2 = 0 s1=0 Q
Þ 2x (g1 – g2) + 2y(f1 –f2) + c1 – c2 = 0

Note : (i) The length of the common chord is 2 r12 - p12 = 2 r22 - p22 where p1 and p2 are the length of perpendicular

drawn from the centre to the chord.

(ii) While using the above equation of common chord the coefficient of x2 and y2 in both the equation should
be equal.

(iii) Two circle touches each other if the length of their common chord is zero.

(iv) Maximum length of the common chord = diameter of the smaller circle.
Ex.32 If the circle x 2 + y2 + 4x + 22y + c = 0 bisects the circumference of the circle x 2 + y2 – 2x + 8y – d = 0, then
c+d=
(1) 40 (2) 50 (3) 60 (4) 56
Sol. The common chord of the given circle is 6x + 14y + c + d = 0
Since x2 + y2 + 4x + 22y + c = 0 bisects the circumference of the circle x 2 + y2 – 2x + 8y – d = 0. So,
(i) passes through the centre of the second circle i.e. (1, –4).
\ 6 – 56 + c + d = 0 Þ c + d = 50
Ex.33 Find the equation of the common chord of the two circles 2x2 + 2y2 + 7x – 5y + 2 = 0 and
x2 + y2 – 4x + 8y – 18 = 0
Sol. Writing the two circles as
7 5
S1 = x2 + y2 + x– y+1=0 ..... (i)
2 2
S2 = x2 + y2 – 4x + 8y – 18 = 0 ..... (ii)
and subtraction (ii) from (i), the equation of the common chord PQ is S1 – S2 = 0
15x 21
i.e. – y + 19 = 0 Þ 15x – 21y + 38 = 0 ..... (iii)
2 2
E
82 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
The length of the perpendicular from the centre C2(2, –4) of circle (ii) upon common chord (iii) is
30 + 84 + 38 152 P
C2M = =
2
15 + 21 2
666
c1 c2
Radius of the circle (ii) is, C2P = 38 (2, –4)
Q
So, the length of the common chord is given by

2
æ 152 ö 1102
PQ = 2PM = C2 P2 - C2 M2 = 2 38 - ç ÷ =2
è 666 ø 333

13. ANGLE OF INTERSECTION OF TWO CIRCLES :

The angle of intersection between two circles

S = 0 and S' = 0 is defined
as the angle between their tangents at their
point of intersection.
If S º x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y + c1 = 0
S´ º x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y + c2 = 0
are two circles with radii r1, r2 and d be the
distance between their centres then the angle
of intersection q between them is given by

r12 + r22 - d 2
cosq =
2r1r2

2(g1g2 + f1f2 ) - (c1 + c2 )

or cosq =
2 g12 + f12 - c1 g22 + f22 - c2

13.1 Condition of Orthogonality :

If the angle of intersection of the two circle is a right angle (q = 90°) then such circle are called Orthogonal
circle and conditions for their orthogonality is
2g1g2 + 2f1f2 = c1 + c2
Note: When the two circles intersect orthogonally then the length of tangent on one circle from the centre of other
circles is equal to the radius of the other circle.
Ex.34 For what value of k the circles x2 + y2 + 5x + 3y + 7 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8x + 6y + k = 0 cuts orthogonally –
(1) 4 (2) 18 (3) –18 (4) –4
Sol.(3) Let the two circles be x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y + c1 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y + c2 = 0.
where g1 = 5/2, f1 = 3/2, c1 = 7, g2 = –4, f2 = 3 and c2 = k.
If the two circles intersects orthogonally, then

2(g1g2 + f1f2) = c1 + c2 Þ 2 -10 +

FG 9 IJ
H 2 K
= 7 + k Þ 11 = 7 + k = –18

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 83
14. POSITION OF TWO CIRCLES :

NO. OF
CONDITION POSITION DIAGRAM COMMON
TANGENTS

(i) C1C2 > r1 + r2 do not intersect or 4

one outside the other c1 T 1 c2 T2

c2

(ii) C1C2 < |r1 – r2| one inside the other c1 0

T1
(iii) C1C2 = r1 + r2 external touch c1 c2 T2 3

c2

(iv) C1C2 = |r1 – r2| internal touch c1 1

A
(v) |r1 – r2|< C1C2 < r1 + r2 intersection at two c1 B c2 T2 2
real points

l Points of intersection of common tangents : The points T1 and T2 (point of intersection of indirect and
direct common tangents) divides C1C2 internally and externally in the ratio r1 : r2
l Equation of the common tangents at point of contact : S1 – S2 = 0
l Point of contact : The point of contact divides C1C2 in the ratio r1 : r2 internally or externally as the case
may be
Ex.35 The locus of the centre of the circle which touches externally the circle x2 + y2 – 6x – 6y + 14 = 0 and also
touches the y-axis, is –
(1) x2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0 (2) x2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0
(3) y2 – 6x – 10y + 14 = 0 (4) y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
Sol.(4) Let the centre of the required circle C1 º (h, k). Since it touches y-axis, so its radius r 1 = h. For the given circle
centre C2 º (3, 3), radius r2 = 9 + 9 - 14 = 2 . Since the circle touch externally, so C1C2 = r1 + r2
Þ (h – 3) + (k –3) = (h + 2) Þ k2 – 10h – 6k + 14 =0.
2 2 2

Hence the locus of the centre (h, k) will be

y2 – 10x – 6y + 14 = 0
E
84 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.36 The two circles x2 + y2 = ax and x2 + y2 = c2 (with c > 0) touch each other if –
(1) c = |a| (2) 2c = a (3) 2a = |c| (4) None of these
|a|
Sol.(1) The centres of the two circles are C1(–a/2, 0) and C2(0, 0), and their redii are and c. So, the two circles
2
will touch each other if

C1C2 = sum or difference of radii

|a| |a| |a| |a| |a|

Þ (-a / 2 - 0)2 + (0 - 0)2 = c ± Þ = c± Þc± =
2 2 2 2 2

|a| |a| |a| |a|

Þ c– = and c + =
2 2 2 2
Þ c = |a| or c = 0 Þ c = |a| [Q c > 0]
15. RADICAL AXIS & RADICAL CENTRE : A

15.1 Radical Axis : The radical axis of two circle is the locus of a point, P Q

axis
which moves in such a way that the lengths of the tangents
c1 c2
drawn from it to two given circles are equal.
The equation of radical axis of two circle S = 0 and S´ = 0 is written as S – S´ = 0.
Note : (i) Radical axis of two circle is perpendicular to the line joining their centres.
(ii) Radical axis bisects every common tangents of two circles.
(iii) If two circles intersect a third circle orthogonally, then their radical axis passes through the centre of third
circle.
(iv) Radical axis of three circle, taken two at a time meet at a point provided the centre of the circle are not
collinear.
(v) If two circle touch each other, then the equation of the common tangent at the point of contact is
S – S´ = 0, which is also the equation of common chord, thus the common chord and common tangent at
the point of contact are special cases of radical axis.
(vi) For two circles whose centre are not same, radical axis always exist, while common chord and common
tangent may or may not exist.
15.2 Radical Centre : The point where the radical axis of three given
circles taken in pairs meet, is called the radical centre of those
three circles.
Thus the length of the three tangents drawn from the radical centre
C
on the three circles are equal
If S1 = 0, S2 = 0 and S3 = 0 be any three given circles, then to
obtain the radical centre, we solve any two of the following S1 – S2
= 0, S2 – S3 = 0, S3 – S1 = 0
Note : (i) If the centres of three circles are collinear then their radical centre will not exist.
(ii) The circle with centre at radical centre and radius is equal to the length of tangents from radical centre to
any of the circles will cut the three circle orthogonally and is called as Radical circle.
(iii) Circles are drawn on three sides of a triangle as diameter than radical centre of these circles is the
orthocentre of the triangle.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 85
Ex.37 The radical centre of the three circless x 2 + y2 = a2, (x – c)2 + y2 = a2 and x2 + (y –b)2 = a2 is –
(1) (a/2, b/2) (2) (b/2, c/2) (3) (c/2, b/2) (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Radical axis of first and second circle is given by
(x2 + y2) – (x2 + y2 – 2cx + c2) = 0
or x = c/2
Also the radical axis of the first and third circle is given by
(x2 + y2) – (x2 + y2 – 2by + b2) = 0
or y = b/2
\ their redical centre (c/2, b/2)
Ex.40 The equation of the radical axis of two circles x2 + y2 – x + 1 = 0 and 3(x2 + y2) + y – 1 = 0 is –
(1) 3x + y – 4 = 0 (2) 3x – y – 4 = 0 (3) 3x – y + 4 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) The given equations may be written as
3x2 + 3y2 – 3x + 3 = 0
3x2 + 3y2 + y – 1 = 0
Now required equation is given by S – S´ = 0
Þ – 3x + 3 – y + 1 = 0
Þ 3x + y – 4 = 0

16. SOME IMPORTANT POINTS :

(i) Locus of mid point of a chord of a circle x2 + y2 = a2 which subtends an angle a at the centre is
2
é æ a öù
x + y = ê a cos ç ÷ ú .
2 2
ë è 2 øû
(ii) The locus of mid point of chord of circle x2 + y2 = a2 which are making right angle at centre is

a2
x2 + y 2 =
2

(iii) The locus of mid point of chords of circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 which are making right angle at
origin is x2 + y2 + gx + fy + c/2 = 0.
(iv) The area of triangle which is made by coordinate axis and the tangent at a point (x1, y1) of circle

a4
x + y = a is
2 2 2
2|x1. y1 |

(v) If a point is outside, on or inside the circle then number of tangents from the points is 2, 1, 0 respectively
(vi) A variable point moves in such a way that sum of square of distances from the vertices of a triangle
remains constant then its locus is a circle whose centre is the centroid of the triangle.
(vii) If the points where the line a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 meets the coordinate axis are
concyclic then a1a2 = b1b2.

E
86 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 Equation fo the circle having diameters 2x – 3y = 5 and 3x – 4y = 7 and radius 8 is-
(1) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 62 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 2 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 62 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Since centre of circle is the point of intersection of two diameters of the circle
\ solve 2x – 3y – 5 = 0

x y 1
3x – 4y – 7 = 0 Þ = =
21 - 20 –15 + 14 –8 + 9

x y 1
Þ = = Þ x = 1, y = –1
1 –1 1
\ reqd. circle is (x – 1)2 + (y + 1)2 = (8)2
i.e., x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 62 = 0
Hence (1) is the correct answer.
Ex.2 The equation of the circle whose centre lies on y-axis, radius 3 and which passes through origin is-
(1) x2 + y2 + 6y = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 4y = 0 (3) x2 + y2 + 3y = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Let the circle be x + y + 2gx + 2fy = 0
2 2

[Q it passes through the origin]

its centre is (–g, –f)
This lies on y-axis
\ –g = 0 i.e. g = 0
\ circle is x2 + y2 + 2fy = 0
Its radius = |f| = 3 Þ f = ±3
\ circle is x2 + y2 + 6y = 0
\ (1) is the correct answer.
Ex.3 The equation of a circle passing through (–4, 3) and touching the lines x + y = 2, x – y = 2 is –
(1) x2 + y2 – 20x – 55 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 20x + 55 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 20x – 55 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(4) Let the circle be x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
2 2

Passes through (–4, 3)

25 – 8g + 6f + c = 0

-g - f - 2 -g + f - 2
Touches both lines Þ = g2 + f 2 - c =
2 2

\ f=0 \ g2 – 4g – 4 – 2c = 0

Also c = 8g – 25 \ g = 10 ± 3 6 , f = 0, c = 55 ± 24 6
It is easy to see that the answers given are not near to the values of g, f, c. Hence none of these is the correct
option.

Note : Correct answer : x2 + y2 + 2(10 ± 3 6 ) x + (55 ± 24 6 ) = 0

Ex.4 The equation of the circle with centre (3, 1) and touching the line 8x – 15y + 25 = 0 is
(1) x2 + y2 – 6x – 2y + 1 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 6x – 2y + 1 = 0
(2) x2 + y2 – 6x – 2y – + 3 = 0 (3) None of these

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 87
Sol.(3) Circle with centre (3, 1) is
(x – 3)2 + (y – 1)2 = a2

8(3) - 15(1) + 25
This touches 8x – 15y + 25 = 0 \ =a
64 + 225

[Length of the ^ from the centre = radius]

34
Þ = a i.e. a = 2
17

\ circle is (x – 3)2 + (y –1)2 = 4

i.e., x2 + y2 – 6x – 2y + 6 = 0
\ (3) is the correct answer.
Ex.5 The equation of a circle which touches x-axis and the line 4x – 3y + 4 = 0, its centre lying in the third
quadrant and lies on the line x – y – 1 = 0, is -
(1) 9 (x2 + y2) + 6x + 24 y + 1 = 0 (2) 9 (x2 + y2) – 6x – 24y + 1 = 0
(3) 9 (x2 + y2) – 6x + 2y + 1 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Let centre be (–h, – k) equation
(x+ h)2 + (y + k)2 = k2 ..... (1)
Also – h + k = 1 ..... (2) y =0
y +4
\h=k–1 radius = k (touches x - axis) 4 x- 3
0
-1=
Touches the line 4x – 3y + 4 = 0 x-y
x' x
O
r=k
-4h - 3( -k) + 4 (-h,-k)
=k ..... (3)
5
y'
1 4
Solving (2) and (3), h = , k =
3 3
Hence the circle is
2 2 2
æ 1ö æ 4ö æ 4ö
çè x + 3 ÷ø + çè y + 3 ÷ø = çè 3 ÷ø Þ 9 (x2 + y2) + 6x + 24 y + 1 = 0

Ex.6 The equation to a circle passing through the origin and cutting of intercepts each equal to + 5 of the axes is -
(1) x2 + y2 + 5x – 5y = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 5x + 5y = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 5x – 5y = 0 (4) x2 + y2 + 5x + 5y = 0
Sol.(1) Let the circle cuts the x – axis and y – axis at A and B respectively. If O is the origin, then Ð AOB = 90°, and
A (5,0) ; B (0,5) is the diameter of the circle.
Then using diameter from the equation to the circle, we get
(x – 5) (x – 0) + (y – 0) (y – 5) = 0 Þ x2 + y2 – 5x – 5y = 0
Ex.7 The equation of the circle whose radius is 3 and which touches the circle x 2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0 internally
at the point (– 1, – 1) is :-

2 2 2 2
æ 4ö æ 7ö æ 4ö æ 7ö
(1) ç x - ÷ + ç y + ÷ = 32 (2) ç x - ÷ + ç y - ÷ = 32
è 5ø è 5ø è 5ø è 5ø

(3) (x – 8)2 + (y – 1)2 = 32 (4) None of these

E
88 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Sol.(2) Let C be the centre of the given circle and C1 be the centre of the required circle.
Now C = (2, 3),
CP = radius = 5

P(-1,-1)
Q C1P = 3 C C1

Þ CC1 = 2
\ The point C1 divides internally, the line joining C and P in the ratio 2 : 3

æ 4 7ö
\ coordinates of C1 are ç , ÷
è 5 5ø

Hence (2) is the required circle

Ex.8 The greatest distance of the point P (10, 7) from the circle x 2 + y2 – 4x –2y – 20 = 0 is -
(1) 5 (2) 15 (3) 10 (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Since S1 = 10 + 7 – 4 × 10 – 2 × 7 – 20 > 0. So, P lies outside the circle. Join P with the centre C (2,1) of
2 2

the given circle. Suppose PC cuts the circle at A and B. Then, PB is the greatest distance of P from the circle.

We have : PC = (10 - 2)2 + (7 - 1)2 = 10

and CB = radius = 4 + 1 + 20 = 5
\ PB = PC + CB = (10 + 5) = 15
Ex.9 For the circle x2 + y2 + 4x – 7y + 12 = 0 the following statements is true -
(1) the length of tangent from (1,2) is 7 (2) Intercept on y - axis is 2

(3) intercept on x - axis is 2 – 2 (4) None of these

sol.(4) Here
(1) Putting y = 0, x2 + 4x + 12 = 0 imaginary roots, not true
(2) Put x = 0, y2 – 7y + 12 = 0 or (y – 3) (y –4) = 0 intercept = 4 – 3 = 1 ¹ 2

(3) Length of tangent = 1 + 4 + 4 - 14 + 12 = 7

Hence " none of these" is true.

Ex.10 The equation of tangent drawn from the origin to the circle x2 + y2 – 2rx – 2hy + h2 = 0 is -

(1) y = 0 (2) x – y = 0 (3) (h2 – r2) x – 2rhy = 0 (4) None of these

Sol.(3) Equation of tangent line drawn from orgin can be taken as y = mx

The centre of the given circle is (r, h) and radius is = r.

Now by condition of tangency p = r, we have

mr - h h2 - r 2
= ± r Þ m2r2 + h2 – 2mhr = r2 (1 + m2) Þ m =
1 + m2 2hr
Putting this value in y = mx, we get the required equation of tangent
Remark: Since we can write equation of circle in the following form
(x – r)2 + (y – h)2 = r2

Obviously, the other tangent through origin is y-axis i.e. x = 0.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 89
Ex.11 If the squares of the lengths of the tangents from a point P to the circles x2 + y2 = a2, x2 + y2 = b2 and
x2 + y2 = c2 are in A.P., then
(1) a,b,c are in GP (2) a, b, c are in AP (3) a2, b2, c2 are in AP (4) a2, b2 c2 are in GP
Sol.(3) Let P (x1, y1) be the given point and PT1, PT2, PT3 be the lengths of the tangents from P to the circles
x2 + y2 = a2, x2 + y2 = b2 and x2 + y2 = c2 respectively. Then,

PT1 = x12 + y12 - a2 , PT2 = x12 + y12 - b2 and PT3 = x12 + y12 - c2

Now, PT12 , PT22 , PT32 are in AP

Þ 2 PT22 = PT12 + PT32 ( 2 2 2

) (
Þ 2 x 1 + y 1 - b = x 1 + y 1 - a + x 1 + y1 - c
2 2 2 2 2 2
) ( )
Þ 2b2 = a2 + c2 Þ a2, b2, c2 are in AP.
Ex.12 The area of the triangle formed by the tangents from an external point (h, k) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 and the
chord of contact, is-

1 æ h2 + k 2 - a2 ö a(h2 + k 2 - a 2 )3 / 2 a(h2 + k 2 - a2 )3 / 2
(1) a (2) (3) (4) none of these
2 çè h2 + k 2 ÷ø (
2 h2 + k 2 ) (h2 + k 2 )

Sol.(3) Here area of D PQR is required

Now chord of contact w.r. to circle x2 + y2 = a2, Drawn from point (h, k) is hx + ky – a2 = 0
Q
2 2 2 a
h +k -a P
Perp. from (h, k) PN = O N P
2
h +k 2 (h,k)
R
2 2 2
2 2
(a ) 2a h + k - a
Also length QR = 2 a 2 - =
2
h +k 2
h2 + k 2

2 2 2
1 1 h2 + k2 - a2 (h + k - a )
\ D PQR = (QR) (PN) = 2a
2 2 h2 + k 2 h2 + k 2

(h2 + k 2 - a 2 )3 / 2
= a
h2 + k 2
Ex.13 From the origin, chords are drawn to the circle (x – 1)2 + y2 = 1, then equation of locus of middle points of
these chords, is -
(1) x2 + y2 = 1 (2) x2 + y2 = x (3) x2 + y2 = y (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Here equation of the given circle is x2 + y2 – 2x = 0
If (x1, y1) be mid point of the chord then its equation is given by T = S1
xx1 + yy1 – (x + x1) = x12 + y12 – 2x1

or xx1 + yy1 – x = x12 + y12 – x1

This passes through the origin (0, 0)

\ x12 + y12 – x1 = 0

\ Locus reqd. is x2 + y2 = x

E
90 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.14 The equation of the circle passing through the point of intersection of the circle x2 + y2 = 6 and
x2 + y2 – 6x + 8 = 0, and also through the point (1, 1) is :-
(1) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0 (3) x2 + y2 – 6x + 4 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Let the equation of the required circle be
(x2 + y2 – 6x + 8) + l (x2 + y2 – 6) = 0
Since it passes through (1, 1), so we have
1 + 1 – 6 + 8 + l (1 + 1 – 6) = 0 Þ l = 1
\ the required equation is x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0
Ex.15 If y = 2x is a chord of the circle x2 + y2 = 10 x, then the equation of the circle whose diameter is this chord is-
(1) x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 2x – 4y = 0 (3) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Here equation of the circle (x2 + y2 – 10x) + l (y – 2x) = 0
Y
Now centre C (5 + l, –l/2) lies on the chord again
-l -5 l
\ = 2 (5 + l) Þ = 10
2 2
\ l = –4 C

Hence x2 + y2 – 10 x – 4y + 8x = 0 O X

or x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0
Ex.16 The circle S1 with centre C1(a1, b1) and radius r1 touches externally the circle S2 with centre C2 (a2, b2) and
radius r2. If the tangent at their common point passes through the origin, then :-
(1) (a12 + a22) + (b12 + b22) = r12 + r22 (2) (a12 – a22) + (b12 – b22) = r22 – r12
(3) (a12 – b22) + (a22 + b22) = r12 + r22 (4) (a12 – b12) + (a22 + b22) = r12 + r22
Sol.(2) The two circles are
S1 = (x – a1)2 + (y – b1)2 = r12 .... (i)
S2 = (x – a2)2 + (y – b2)2 = r22 .... (ii)
The equation of the common tangent of these two circles is given by S1 – S2 = 0 i.e.,
2x (a1 – a2) + 2y (b1 – b2) + (a22 + b22) – (a12 + b12) + r12 – r22 = 0
If this passes through the origin, then
(a22 + b22) – (a12 + b12) + r12 – r22 = 0 Þ (a22 – a12) + (b22 – b12) = r22 – r12
Ex.17 The length of the common chord of the circles (x – a)2 + y2 = c2 and x2 + (y – b)2 = c2 is :-
(1) c2 + a2 + b2 (2) 4c2 + a2 + b2 (3) 4c2 - a2 - b2 (4) c2 - a2 - b2
Sol.(3) The equation of the common chord is
[(x – a)2 + y2 – c2] – [x2 + (y – b)2 – c2] = 0
Þ 2ax – 2by – a2 + b2 = 0 ..... (1)
Now p = length of perpendicular from (a, 0) on (1)

2a 2 - a 2 + b2 1 2
= = a + b2
2
4a + 4b 2
2

\ length of common chord

2 a 2 + b2
=2 c2 - p2 = 2 c - = 4c2 - a2 - b2
4
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 91
Ex.18 The angle of intersection of the two circles x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0 and x2 + y2 = 4, is :-
(1) 30° (2) 60° (3) 90° (4) 45°
Sol.(4) Here circles are
x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y = 0 ........(1)
x2 + y2 = 4 ........(2)
Now c1 (1, 1)

r1 = 12 + 12 = 2
c2(0 , 0) r2 = 2
If q is the angle of intersection then

r12 + r22 - (c1c2 )2 2 + 4 - ( 2)2 1

cos q = = = = q = 45°
2r1r2 2. 2.2. 2

Ex.19 The circles x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 touch each other :-

(1) externally at (0, 1) (2) internally at (0, 1) (3) externally at (1, 0) (4) internally at (1, 0)
Sol.(1) The centres of the two circles are C1 (–1, 1) and C2 (1, 1) and both have radii equal to 1. We have :
C1C2 = 2 and sum of the radii = 2
So, the two circles touch each other externally. The equation of the common tangent is obtained by subtracting
the two equations.
The equation of the common tangnet is
4x = 0 Þ x = 0
Putting x = 0 in the equation of the either circle, we get
y2 – 2y + 1 = 0 Þ (y – 1)2 = 0 y = 1
Hence, the points where the two circles touch is (0, 1)
Ex.20 The point from which the tangents to the circles x2 + y2 – 8x + 40 = 0, 5x2 + 5y2 – 25 x + 80 = 0 and
x2 + y2 – 8x + 16 y + 160 = 0 are equal in length is-

æ 15 ö æ 15 ö æ 15 ö
(1) ç 8, ÷ (2) ç -8, ÷ (3) ç 8, - ÷ (4) None of these
è 2ø è 2ø è 2ø

Sol.(3) The required point is the radical centre of the three given circles.
The radical axes of these three circles taken in pairs are :
3x – 24 = 0, 16 y + 120 = 0 and –3x + 16y + 80 = 0
Solving any two of these three equations, we get
15
x = 8, y = –
8
æ 15 ö
Hence, the required point is ç 8, - ÷
è 8ø
Ex.21 The total number of common tangents to the two circles x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y + 9 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 6x – 2y + 9 = 0 is-
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
Sol.(4) Here
c1 (1, 3), r1 = 1+9-9 = 1
c2 (–3, 1), r2 = 9 +1- 9 = 1
E
92 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Now c1c2 = (1 + 3)2 + (3 - 1)2 = 16 + 4 = 20

c1c2 > r1 + r2
Hence the circles are non-intersecting externally. Hence 4 tangents, two direct and two transverse tangents
may be drawn
Ex.22 If (4, –2) is a point on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, which is concentric to x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 20 = 0, then
value of c is-
(1) –4 (2) 0 (3) 4 (4) 1
Sol.(1) Since the first circle is concentric to x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 20 = 0, therefore its equation can be written as
x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + c = 0
If it passes through (4, –2), then
16 + 4 – 8 – 8 + c = 0 Þ c = – 4
Ex.23 Let A be the centre of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 20 = 0, and B (1, 7) and D (4, –2) are points on the circle
then, if tangents be drawn at B and D, which meet at C, a then area of quadrilateral ABCD is :-
(1) 150 (2) 75 (3) 75/2 (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Here centre A (1, 2), and Tangent at (1, 7) is
x.1 + y.7 – 1 (x + 1) – 2 (y + 7) – 20 = 0

or y = 7 ..... (1)
Tangent at D (4, –2) is 3x – 4y – 20 = 0 ..... (2)
Solving (1) and (2), C is (16, 7)
Area ABCD = AB × BC

= 5 × 256 + 49 - 32 - 28 - 20 = 5 × 15 = 75 units
Ex.24 The abscissa of two points A and B are the roots of the equation x2 + 2ax – b2 = 0 and their ordinates are the
roots of the equation y2 + 2py – q2 = 0. The radius of the circle with AB as a diameter will be :-

(1) a 2 + b2 + p2 + q2 (2) b2 + q 2 (3) a 2 + b2 - p2 - q 2 (4) a2 + p2

Sol.(1) Let A º (a, b) ; B º (g, d). Then

a + g = – 2a, ag = – b2 and b + d = – 2p, bd = – q2
Now equation of the required circle is
(x – a) (x – g) + (y – b) (y – d) = 0 Þ x2 + y2 – (a + g) x – (b + d) y + ag + bd = 0
Þ x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2py – b2 – q2 = 0

Its radius = a 2 + p2 + b 2 + q 2

Ex.25 Two rods of length a and b slide on the axes in such a way that their ends are always concylic. The locus of
centre of the circle passing through the ends is :-
(1) 4 (x2 – y2) = a2 – b2 (2) x2 – y2 = a2 – b2
(3) x2 – y2 = 4 (a2 – b2) (4) x2 + y2 = a2 + b2
Sol.(1) Let a rod AB of length 'a' slides on x-axis and rod CD of length 'b' slide on y-axis so that ends A, B, C and D are
always concylic.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 93
Let equation of circle passing through these ends is Y
x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
2 2

D
Obviously 2 g2 - c = a and 2 f 2 - c = b (h,k)

\ 4(g2 – f2) = a2 – b2 C
OA X
B
\ 4(–g)2 – (–f)2]= a2 – b2

therefore locus of centre (–g, –f) is 4(x2 – y2) = a2 – b2

Ex.26 An equation of the circle passing through the origin, having its centre of the line x + y = 4 and cutting the
circle x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 4 = 0 orthogonally is-
(1) x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 6x – 2y = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 8x = 0
Sol.(3) Let the centre of the circle lying on the line x + y = 4 be (g, 4 – g). Since the required circle passes through
the origin, equation of the circle is
x2 + y2 – 2gx – 2(4 – g)y = 0
Since it cuts the circle x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 4 = 0 orghogonally,
–2g(–2) – 2(4 – g) (1) = 4 Þ 6g = 12 Þ g = 2
Hence an equation of the required circle is x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y = 0
Ex.27 If the line y = x + 3 meets the circle x2 + y2 = a2 at A and B, then equation of the circle on AB as diameter is-
(1) x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 – 9 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 + 3x + 3y + a2 – 9 = 0 (4) x2 + y2 – 3x + 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
Sol.(1) Equation of any circle passing through the intersection of the given circle and the given line is
x2 + y2 – a2 + l(y – x – 3) = 0 ..... (1)

æl lö
If AB is a diameter of the circle, the centre ç , - ÷ of (i) lies on the given line
è2 2ø
l l
y– x– 3= 0Þ– – –3=0Þl=–3
2 2
So that equation of the required circle is
x2 + y2 + 3x – 3y – a2 + 9 = 0
Ex.28 Equation of the family of circles which have the same radical axis as the circles x 2 + y2 = 4 and
x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y = 6 is-
(1) x2 + y2 + lx + 2ly – (4 + l) = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + l(x – 2y – 1) = 4
(3) x2 + y2 + l(x + 2y – 4) = 1 (4) x2 + y2 + 2lx + ly – (4 + l) = 0
Sol.(1) The radical axis of the given circles is
x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 6 – (x2 + y2 – 4) = 0
Þ 2x + 4y – 2 = 0 Þ x + 2y – 1 = 0
hence the equation of the family of circles having the same radical axis x + 2y – 1 as the given circles is
x2 + y2 – 4 + l(x + 2y – 1) = 0
Þ x2 + y2 + lx + 2ly – (4 + l) = 0
E
94 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.29 A line is drawn through the point P(3, 11) to cut the circle x2 + y2 = 9 at A and B. Then [Link] is equal to-
(1) 9 (2) 121 (3) 205 (4) 139
Sol.(2) From geometry we know PA. PB = (PT)2 where PT is the length of the tangent from P to the circle.

Hence [Link] = (3)2 + (11)2 – 9 = 112 = 121

Alternately

Equation of any line through (3, 11) is

x -3 y - 11
= = r (say)
cos q sin q

Then the coordinates of a point on this line at a distance r from (3, 11) are (3 + rcosq, 11 + rsinq) and if this
lies on the given circle x2 + y2 = 9 then (3 + rcosq)2 + (11 + rsinq)2 = 9

Þ 9 + 121 + 2r(3cosq + 11sinq) + r2 = 9 Þ r2 + 2r(3cosq + 11sinq) + 121 = 0

which is quadratic in r, gives two values of r say r 1 and r2 and hence the distances of the points A and B from P.

Thus, [Link] = r1r2 = 121.

Ex.30 Equation of a circle having radius equal to twice the radius of the circle

x2 + y2 + (2p + 3)x + (3 – 2p)y + p – 3 = 0 and touching it at the origin is-

(1) x2 + y2 + 9x – 3y = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 9x + 3y = 0

(3) x2 + y2 + 18x + 6y = 0 (4) x2 + y2 + 18x – 6y = 0

Sol.(4) Since the given circle passes through the origin p – 3 = 0 Þ p = 3 and the equation of the given circle is

x2 + y2 + 9x – 3y = 0

Equation of the tangent at the origin to this circle is

9x – 3y = 0 ..... (i)

Let the equation of the required circle which also passes through the origin be

x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy = 0

Equation of the tangent at the origin to this circle is

gx + fy = 0 ..... (ii)

If (i) and (ii) represent the same line, then

g f
= = k (say) ..... (iii)
9 -3

2 2
æ 9 ö æ -3 ö
We are given that g2 + f 2 = 2 ç ÷ + ç ÷ = 81 + 9
è2ø è 2 ø

From (iii) we get |k| 92 + 32 = 90 Þ k = ±1

For k = 1, g = 9, f = –3 and the equation of the required circle is

x2 + y2 + 18x – 6y = 0
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 95

Ex.31 The tangents drawn from the origin to the circle x2 + y2 – 2px – 2qy + q2 = 0 are perpendicular if-

(1) p2 + q2 = 1 (2) p2 – q2 = 1 (3) p2 – q2 = 0 (4) None of these

Sol.(3) Equation of the given circle can be written as (x – p)2 + (y – q)2 = p2

This has (p, q) as the centre and p as the radius showing that it touches y-axis.

So one of the tangents from the orgin to the circle is y-axis

Þ Other tangent from the origin to the circle must be x-axis.

which is possible if q = ± p

Þ p2 – q2 = 0

E
96 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the equation of a circle with
(a) Centre (2, 4) and radius 5 (b) Centre (–3, –2) and radius 6

(c) Centre (acosa, asina) and radius a (d) Centre (–a, –b) and radius a2 - b2
2. Find the centre and radius of each of the following circles :
2 2
æ 1ö æ 1ö 1
(i) (x – 3)2 + (y – 1)2 = 9 (ii) ç x - ÷ + ç y + ÷ =
è 2ø è 3ø 16
(iii) (x + 5)2 + (y – 3)2 = 20 (iv) x2 + (y – 1)2 = 2
3. Find the equation of the circle whose centre is (2, –5) and which passes through the point (3, 2).
4. Find the equation of the circle of radius 5 cm, whose centre lies on the y-axis and which passes through
the point (3, 2).
5. Find the equation of the circle whose centre is (2, –3) and which passes through the intersection of the lines
3x + 2y = 11 and 2x + 3y = 4.
6. Show that the equation x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 5 = 0 represents a circle. Find its centre and radius.
7. Show that the equation x2 + y2 + 2x + 10y + 26 = 0 represents a point circle. Also, find its centre.
8. Find the equation of the circle passing through the points
(i) (0, 0), (5, 0) and (3, 3)
(ii) (1, 2), (3, –4) and (5, –6)
Also, find the centre and radius in each case.
9. Find the equation of the circle concentric with the circle x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y + 11 = 0 and passing through
the point P(5, 4).
10. Show that the points A(1, 0), B(2, –7), C(8, 1) and D(9, –6) all lie on the same circle. Find the equation
of this circle, its centre and radius.
11. Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points (1, 3) and (2, –1), and has its centre on
the line 2x + y – 4 = 0.
12. Find the equation of the circle concentric with the circle x2 + y2 – 6x +12y +15 = 0 and of double its area.

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

1. (a) x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 5 = 0 (b) x2 + y2 + 6x + 4y – 23 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2axcos a – 2aysin a = 0 (d) x2 + y2 + 2ax + 2by + 2b2 = 0

æ 1 -1 ö 1
2. (i) Centre (3, 1), radius = 3 (ii) Centre ç , ÷ , radius =
è2 3 ø 4

(iii) Centre (–5, 3), radius = 2 5 (iv) Centre (0, 1), radius = 2
3. x + y – 4x + 10y – 21 = 0
2 2
4. (x + y – 12y + 11 = 0) or (x2 + y2 + 4y – 21 = 0)
2 2

5. x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 3 = 0 6. Centre (2, –3), radius = 3 2 7. Centre (–1, –5)

æ5 1ö 26
8. (i) x2 + y2 – 5x – y = 0, centre ç , ÷ and radius = .
è2 2ø 2
(ii) x2 + y2 – 22 x – 4y + 25 = 0, centre (11, 2) and radius = 10
9. x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y – 85 = 0
10. x2 + y2 – 10x + 6y + 9 = 0, centre C(5, –3) & radius = 5.
11. x2 + y2 – 3x –2y –1 = 0 12. x2 + y2 – 6x + 12y – 15 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 97

CHECK YOUR GRASP CIRCLE EXERCISE-I

STANDARD FORMS OF EQUATION 9. The parametric coordinates of a point on the circle
OF A CIRCLE x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 2 = 0 are-
1. The leng th of the diameter of th e circle (1) (1 – 2 cos a, 1 – 2 sin a)
(2) (1 + 2 cos a, 1 + 2 sin a)
x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y + 4 = 0 is-
(3) (1 + 2 cos a, –1 + 2 sin a)
(1) 9 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 6
(4) (–1+ 2 cos a, 1 + 2 sin a)
2. Which of the following is the equation of a circle ? 10. If the equation
(1) x2 + 2y2 – x + 6 = 0 px2 + (2 – q) xy + 3y2 – 6qx + 30y + 6q =0
(2) x2 – y2 + x + y + 1 = 0 represents a circle, then the values of p and q are-
(1) 2,2 (2) 3,1 (3) 3,2 (4) 3, 4
(3) x2 + y2 + xy + 1 = 0
11. The circle represen ted by t he equat ion
(4) 3(x2 + y2) + 5x + 1 = 0 x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 will be a point circle, if-
3. The equation of the circle passing through (3, 6) (1) g2 + f2 = c (2) g2 + f2 + c = 0
and whose centre is (2, –1) is- (3) g + f > c
2 2
(4) None of these
(1) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y = 45 12. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle
formed by the lines y + 3 x = 6, y – 3 x = 6
(2) x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y + 45 = 0
and y = 0, is-
(3) x2 + y2 + 4x – 2y = 45 (1) x2 + y2 + 4x = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 4y = 0
(4) x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + 45 = 0 (3) x2 + y2 – 4y = 12 (4) x2 + y2 + 4x = 12
4. If (4, 3) and (–12, –1) are end points of a diameter EQUATION OF A CIRCLE IN SOME
of a circle, then the equation of the circle is- SPECIAL CASES
13. A circle touches both the axes and its centre lies in
(1) x2 + y2 – 8x – 2y – 51 = 0
the fourth quadrant. If its radius is 1 then its equation
(2) x2 + y2 + 8x – 2y – 51 = 0 will be -
(3) x2 + y2 + 8x + 2y – 51 = 0 (1) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y + 1 = 0
(4) None of these (2) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 1 = 0
5. The coordinates of any point on the circle (3) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0
(4) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 1 = 0
x2 + y2 = 4 are-
14. The equation to a circle with centre (2, 1) and
(1) (cosa, sina) (2) (4cosa, 4sina) touching x axis is-
(3) (2cosa, 2sina) (4) (sina, cosa) (1) x2 + y2 + 4x + 2y + 4 = 0
6. The circle x + y + 4x – 7y + 12 = 0 cuts an
2 2 (2) x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y + 4 = 0
intercept on y-axis equal to- (3) x2 + y2 – 4x – 2y + 1 = 0
(4) None of these
(1) 1 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 7
15. The equation to the circle whose radius is 4 and
7. The radius of a circle with centre (a, b) and passing
which touches the x-axis at a distance – 3 from the
through the centre of the circle x 2 + y2 – 2gx+f2 =0 origin is-
is- (1) x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y – 9 = 0
(2) x2 + y2 ± 6x – 8y + 9 = 0
(1) (a - g)2 + b2 (2) a 2 + (b – g)2
(3) x2 + y2 + 6x ± 8y + 9 = 0
(3) a 2 + (b - g)2 (4) (a + g)2 + b2 (4) x2 + y2 ± 6x – 8y – 9 = 0
8. If (0, 1) and (1, 1) are end points of a diameter of a 16. The equation of the circle touching the lines x = 0,
circle, then its equation is- y = 0 and x = 2c is-
(1) x2 + y2 – x – 2y + 1 = 0 (1) x2 + y2 + 2cx + 2cy + c2 = 0
(2) x2 + y2 + x – 2y + 1 = 0 (2) x2 + y2 – 2cx + 2cy + c2 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – x – 2y – 1 = 0 (3) x2 + y2 ± 2cx – 2cy + c2 = 0
(4) None of these
(4) x2 + y2 – 2cx ± 2cy + c2 = 0

E
98 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
17. The circle x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y + 4 = 0 is- 26. Position of the point (1,1) with respect to the circle
(1) Touches x-axes only
x2 + y2 – x + y – 1 = 0 is-
(2) Touches both axes
(3) Passes through the origin (1) Outside the circle (2) Inside the circle
(4) Touches y-axes only (3) Upon the circle (4) None of these
18. If a be the radius of a circle which touches x - axis
27. The length of the chord intercepted by the circle
at the origin, then its equation is -
(1) x2 + y2 + ax = 0 (2) x2 + y2 ± 2ya = 0 x2 + y2 = r2 on the line x + y = 1 is –
a b
(3) x2 + y2 ± 2xa = 0 (4) x2 + y2 + ya = 0
19. The point where the line x = 0 touches the circle 2 r 2 (a2 + b2 ) - a 2b2
(1)
x2 + y2 – 2x – 6y + 9 = 0 is- a 2 + b2
(1) (0, 1) (2) (0, 2)
(3) (0, 3) (4) No where r 2 (a2 + b2 ) - a 2 b2
(2) 2
20. If the circle x + y + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 touches
2 2 a2 + b2
x-axis, then-
(1) f2 = c (2) g2 = c r 2 (a 2 + b2 ) - a 2 b2
(3)
(3) g = f (4) g2 + f2 = c a 2 + b2
21. The equation of the circumcircle of the triangle (4) None of these
x y
formed by the lines x = 0, y = 0, - = 1 , is - 28. Th e line 3x – 4y = l to uches t he circle
a b
(1) x2 + y2 + ax – by = 0 x2 + y2 – 4x – 8y – 5 = 0, if the value of l is-
(2) x2 + y2 – ax + by = 0 (1) 20 (2) 15
(3) x2 + y2 – ax – by = 0
(3) 10 (4) 5
(4) x2 + y2 + ax + by = 0
22. Circle x2 + y2 + 6y = 0 touches- 29. The length of the intercept made by the circle
(1) x-axis at the point (3, 0) x2 + y2 =1 on the line x + y = 1 is-
(2) x-axis at the origin
(3) y-axis at the origin (1) 1 / 2 (2) 2 (3) 2 (4) 2 2
(4) The line y + 3 = 0
30. If a circle with centre (0, 0) touches the line
23. The circumcircle of the quadrilateral formed by the
lines x = a, x = 2a, y = – a, y = a is- 5x + 12y = 1 then its equation will be-
(1) x2 + y2 – 3ax – a2 = 0 (1) 13(x2 + y2) = 1 (2) x2 + y2 = 169
(2) x2 + y2 + 3ax + a2 = 0 (3) 169 (x2 + y2) = 1 (4) x2 + y2 = 13
(3) x2 + y2 – 3ax + a2 = 0
(4) x2 + y2 + 3ax – a2 = 0 31. For the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y – 4 = 0, the line
2x – y + 1 = 0 is a-
POSITION OF A POINT & A LINE WITH
W.R.T. CIRCLE (1) chord (2) diameter

24. The equation of the circle of radius 5 in the first (3) tangent line (4) None of these
quadrant which touches the x-axis and the line 32. If y = c is a tangent to the circle
4y = 3x is-
x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 2 = 0 at (1, 1), then the value
(1) x2 + y2 – 30 x – 10 y + 225 = 0
(2) x2 + y2 + 30 x + 10 y – 225 = 0 of c is-
(3) x2 + y2 + 30 x + 10 y + 225 = 0 (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) – 1 (4) – 2
(4) None of these 33. The line y = x + c will intersect the circle x 2 + y2 = 1
25. Line 3x + 4y = 25 touches the circle x + y = 25
2 2
in two coincident points, if-
at the point :-
(1) c = – 2 (2) c = 2
(1) (4, 3) (2) (3, 4)
(3) c = ± 2 (4) None of these
(3) (– 3, – 4) (4) None of these
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 99
34. l x + my + n = 0 is a tangent line to the circle 41. A pair of tangents are drawn from the origin to the
x2 + y2 = r2, if- circle x2 + y2 + 20 (x + y) + 20 = 0. The equation
of the pair of tangents is-
(1) l2 + m2 = n2 r2 (2) l2 + m2 = n2 + r2
(1) x2 + y2 + 5xy = 0 (2) x2 + y2 + 10xy = 0
(3) n2 = r2 (l2 + m2) (4) None of these
(3) 2x2 + 2y2 + 5xy = 0 (4) 2x2 + 2y2 – 5xy = 0
35. The line 3x – 4y = 0
42. The length of the tangent drawn from the point
(1) is a tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 25 (2, 3) to the circle 2(x2 + y2) – 7x + 9y – 11 = 0-
(2) is a normal to the circle x2 + y2 = 25
(1) 18 (2) 14 (3) 14 (4) 28
(3) does not meet the circle x2 + y2 = 25
43. If the lengths of the tangents drawn from the point
(4) does not pass thro' the origin
(1, 2) to the circles x2 + y2 + x + y – 4 = 0 and
36. If the circle x2 + y2 = a2 cuts off a chord of length
3x2 + 3y2 – x – y + k = 0 be in the ratio 4 : 3, then
2b from the line y = mx + c, then- k=
(1) (1 – m2) (a2 – b2) = c2 (1) 21/2 (2) 7/2
(2) (1 + m2) (a2 – b2) = c2 (3) –21/4 (4) 7/4
(3) (1 – m2) (a2 + b2) = c2 44. The equations of the tangents drawn from the point
(4) None of these (0, 1) to the circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y = 0 are-
(1) 2x – y + 1 = 0, x + 2y – 2 = 0
37. The lines 12x – 5y – 17 = 0 and 24x – 10y + 44 = 0
(2) 2x – y – 1 = 0, x + 2y – 2 = 0
are tangents to the same circle. Then the radius of
(3) 2x – y + 1 = 0, x + 2y + 2 = 0
the circle is-
(4) 2x – y – 1 = 0, x + 2y + 2 = 0
1
(1) 1 (2) 1 45. The equations of the normal at the point (4, –1) to
2
the circle x2 + y2 – 40x + 10y = 153 is-
(3) 2 (4) None of these
(1) x + 4y = 0 (2) 4x + y = 3
TANGENT, NORMAL, LENGTH OF TANGENT (3) x – 4y = 0 (4) 4x – y = 0
& DIRECTOR CIRCLE 46. The equation of the tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 25
which is inclined at 60° angle with x-axis, will be-
38. The line ax + by + c = 0 is a normal to the circle
(1) y = 3x ± 10 (2) y = 3x ± 2
x2 + y2 = r2. The portion of the line ax + by + c =0
intercepted by this circle is of length- (3) 3y = x ± 10 (4) None of these
47. The locus of a point which moves such that the
(1) r2 (2) r (3) 2 r (4) r
tangents from it to the two circle x 2 + y2 – 5x – 3=0
39. The equations of tangents to the circle
and 3x2 + 3y2 + 2x + 4y – 6 = 0 are equal, is given
x2 + y2 – 22x – 4y + 25 = 0 which are perpendicular by-
to the line 5x + 12y + 8 = 0 are- (1) 2x2 + 2y2 + 7x – 4y – 3 = 0
(1) 12x – 5y + 8 = 0, 12x – 5y = 252 (2) 17x + 4y + 3 = 0
(2) 12x – 5y – 8 = 0, 12x – 5y + 252 = 0 (3) 4x2 + 4y2 – 3x + 4y – 9 = 0
(3) 12x – 5y = 0, 12x – 5y = 252 (4) 13 x – 4y + 15 = 0
(4) None of these 48. The tangent lines to the circle x2 + y2 – 6x + 4y =12
40. The equation of the normal to the circle x2 + y2 = 9 which are parallel to the line 4x + 3y + 5 = 0 are

from the point

FG 1 , 1 IJ is- given by-

H 2 2K (1) 4x + 3y – 7 = 0, 4x + 3y + 15 = 0
(2) 4x + 3y – 31 = 0, 4x + 3y + 19 = 0
2
(1) x – y = (2) x + y = 0 (3) 4x + 3y – 17 = 0, 4x + 3y + 13 = 0
3
(3) x – y = 0 (4) None of these (4) None of these

E
100 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
49. If the length of tangent drawn from the point (5, 3) CIRCLE THROUGH THE POINT OF
to the circle x2 + y2 + 2x + ky + 17 = 0 is 7, then INTERSECTION
k=
57. The equation of circle passing through the points
(1) –6 (2) –4 (3) 4 (4) 13/2 of intersection of circles x 2 + y 2 = 6 and
50. The equation of the pair of tangents drawn to the x2 + y2 – 6x + 8 = 0 and the point (1, 1) is-
circle x2 + y2 – 2x + 4y + 3 = 0 from (6. –5) is- (1) x2 + y2 – 4y + 2 = 0
(1) 7x + 23 y + 30 xy + 66 x + 50 y – 73 = 0
2 2
(2) x2 + y2 – 3x + 1 = 0
(2) 7x2 + 23 y2 – 30 xy – 66 x – 50 y + 73 = 0 (3) x2 + y2 – 6x + 4 = 0
(3) 7x2 + 23 y2 + 30 xy – 66 x – 50 y – 73 = 0 (4) None of these
(4) None of these 58. The equation of the circle described on the common
chord of the circles x2 + y2 – 8x + y – 15 = 0 and
51. The equation of director circle to the circle
x2 + y2 = 8 is- x2 + y2 – 4x + 4y – 42 = 0 as diameter is-
(1) x2 + y2 – x + 2y + 4 = 0
(1) x2 + y2 = 8 (2) x2 + y2 = 16
(2) x2 + y2 + 10x – 2y – 12 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 = 4 (4) x2 + y2 = 12
(3) x2 + y2 – 12x – 2y + 12 = 0
CHORD OF CONTACT
(4) x2 + y2 – 5x + 3y + 7 = 0
52. The equation of the chord of contact of the circle
x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y – 12 = 0 with respect to the COMMON CHORD OF TWO CIRCLES
point (2, 3) is-
59. The length of the common chord of circle
(1) 4x = 17 (2) 4x + y = 17 x2 + y2 – 6x – 16 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 8y – 9 = 0 is-
(3) 4y = 17 (4) None of these
(1) 10 3 (2) 5 3
53. If OA and OB be the tangents to the circle
x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 21 = 0 drawn from the origin (3) 5 3 / 2 (4) None of these
O then AB =
ANGLE OF INTERSECTION OF TWO CIRCLES
17 4
(1) (2) 21 60. Two given circles x2 + y2 + ax + by + c = 0 and
3 5
x2 + y2 + dx + ey + f = 0 will intersect each other
(3) 11 (4) None of these orthogonally, only when-
54. The equation of the chord of contact, if the tangents (1) ad + be = c + f
are drawn from the point (5, –3) to the circle (2) a + b + c = d + e + f
x2 + y2 = 10, is- (3) ad + be = 2c + 2f
(1) 5x – 3y = 10 (2) 3x + 5y = 10 (4) 2ad + 2be = c + f
(3) 5x + 3y = 10 (4) 3x – 5y = 10 61. If the circles of same radius a and centres at (2, 3)
EQUATIONS OF CHORD WHOSE MIDDLE and (5, 6) cut orthogonally, then a is equal to-
POINT IS GIVEN
(1) 6 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4) 10
55. The equation t o the c hord of the circle
62. Th e angle of intersect ion of circles
x2 + y2 = 16 which is bisected at (2, –1) is –
x + y + 8x – 2y – 9 = 0 & x + y – 2x + 8y – 7 = 0
2 2 2 2
(1) 2x + y = 16 (2) 2x – y = 16
is-
(3) x + 2y = 5 (4) 2x – y = 5
56. The equation o f the chord of the circle (1) 60° (2) 90°
x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y = 0 which is bisected at the point (3) 45° (4) 30°
(5, –3) is- 63. The angle of intersection of two circles is 0° if-
(1) 2x – y + 7 = 0 (1) they are separate
(2) 2x + y – 7 = 0 (2) they intersect at two point
(3) 2x + y + 7 = 0 (3) they intersect only at a single point
(4) 2x – y – 7 = 0 (4) it is not possible

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 101
64. If a circle passes through the point (1, 2) and cuts 67. Circles x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 & x2 + y2 – 8y – 4 = 0
the circle x2 + y2 = 4 orthogonally, then the equa- (1) Touch each other internally
tion of the locus of its centre is- (2) Cuts each other at two points
(1) x + y – 2x – 6y – 7 = 0
2 2
(3) Touch each other externally
(2) x + y – 3x – 8y + 1 = 0
2 2
(4) None of these
(3) 2x + 4y – 9 = 0
68. The number of common tangents of the circle
(4) 2x + 4y – 1 = 0 x2 + y2 – 2x – 1 = 0 and x2 + y2 – 2y – 7 = 0 is-
65. If the two circles 2x + 2y – 3x + 6y + k = 0 and
2 2
(1) 1 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) 4
x2 + y2 – 4x + 10y + 16 = 0 cut orthogonally, then
the value of k is-
(1) 41 (2) 14
(3) 4 (4) 0
POSITION OF TWO CIRCLES
66. Consider the circles
x2 + (y – 1)2 = 9, (x – 1) 2 + y2 =25.
They are such that-
(1) Each of these circles lies outside the other
(2) One of these circle lies entirely inside the other
(3) These circles touch each other
(4) They intersect in two points

CHECK YOUR GRASP Answer-Key Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 4 4 1 2 3 1 1 1 3 3
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 3 1 2 3 4 2 2 3 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 3
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 1 3
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
Que. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 3 2 3
Que. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Ans. 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 1

E
102 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE QUESTIONS EXERCISE-II
1. If a circle passes through points of intersection of 6. Two circles C1 & C2 of radius 5 intersect circle C of
the coordinate axes with the lines lx – y + 1 = radius R such that their common chords is of length
0 and x – 2y + 3 = 0, then the value of l is 6 & 8 respectively. Also centres of three circles are
__________. collinear & distance between centres of C1 & C2 is
14, then R4 is equal to
2. An infinite number of tangents can be drawn from
(1, 2) to the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + l = 0. Then
7. If the circle x2 + y2 – 4x + 2y + c = 0 and
find the value of l.
x2 + y 2 + cx – y – 1 = 0 cuts each other
3. The radius of the smallest circle which touches the orthogonally, then 'c' is equal to
straight line 3x – y = 6 at (1, 3) and also touches
the line y = x is __________. 8. If (2,4) is a point int erio r to the circle
4. The sum of the slopes of the lines tangent of both x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + l = 0, and the circle neither
the circles x2 + y2 = 1 and (x – 6)2 + y2 = 4 is touches nor cuts the axes, then the number of
5. Consider 3 circles of unit radii touching each other integral values of l is
externally such that each circle touches exactly two
other circles. If R is the minimum radius of the circle
which can circum-scribe the 3 given circles such that
1
= 2 3 - k , then |k| is equal to
R

ANSWER KEY Exercise-II

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ans. 2 5 1.5 0 3 625 0 6
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 103

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS CIRCLE EXERCISE-III

1. If the lines 3x – 4y – 7 = 0 and 2x – 3y – 5 = 0 are two 7. The circle x2 + y2 = 4x + 8y + 5 intersects the line
diameters of a circle of area 49p square units, the 3x – 4y = m at two distinct points if :- [AIEEE-2010]
equation of the circle is- [AIEEE-2006]
(1) – 85 < m < – 35 (2) – 35 < m < 15
(1) x + y + 2x – 2y – 62 = 0
2 2

(3) 15 < m < 65 (4) 35 < m < 85

(2) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 62 = 0
(3) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 47 = 0 8. The two circles x2 + y2 = ax and x2 + y2 = c2
(4) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 47 = 0 (c > 0) touch each other if :- [AIEEE-2011]
2. Let C be the circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 3 (1) a = 2c (2) |a| = 2c
units. The equation of the locus of the mid points of (3) 2|a| = c (4) |a| = c
the chords of the circle C that subtend an angle of
9. The equation of the circle passing through the
2p
at its centre is- [AIEEE-2006, IIT-1996] points (1, 0) and (0, 1) and having the smallest radius
3
27 is : [AIEEE-2011]
(1) x2 + y2 = 1 (2) x2 + y2 =
4 (1) x2 + y2 + x + y – 2 = 0
9 3
(3) x2 + y2 = (3) x2 + y2 = (2) x2 + y2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0
4 2
3. Consider a family of circles which are passing (3) x2 + y2 – x – y = 0
through the point (–1, 1) and are tangent to x-axis. (4) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 7 = 0
If (h, k) are the co-ordinates of the centre of the
10. The circle passing through the point (–1,0) and
circles, then the set of values of k is given by the
touching the y-axis at (0,2) also passes through
interval- [AIEEE-2007]
(1) 0 < k < 1/2 (2) k ³ 1/2 the point - [IIT-2011]

(3) –1/2 £ k £ 1/2 (4) k £ 1/2

æ 3 ö æ 5 ö æ 3 5ö
4. The point diametrically opposite to the point (1, 0) (1) ç - ,0÷ (2) ç - ,2÷ (3) ç - , ÷ (4) (–4,0)
è 2 ø è 2 ø è 2 2ø
on the circle x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y – 3 = 0 is-
[AIEEE-2008]
11. The straight line 2x – 3y = 1 divides the circular
(1) (3, –4) (2) (–3, 4) (3) (–3, –4) (4) (3, 4)
region x2 + y2 £ 6 into two parts. If
5. Three distinct points A, B and C are given in the
2–dimensional coordinate plane such that the ratio
ìæ 3 ö æ 5 3 ö æ 1 1 ö æ 1 1 ö ü
of the distance of any one of them from the point S = íç 2, ÷ , ç , ÷ , ç , - ÷, ç , ÷ ý ,
(1, 0) to the distance from the point (–1, 0) is equal îè 4 ø è 2 4 ø è 4 4 ø è 8 4 ø þ
1 then the number of point(s) in S lying inside the
to . Then the circumcentre of the triangle ABC
3
is at the point :- [AIEEE-2009]
smaller part is :- [IIT-2011]

(1) 1 (2) 2
æ5 ö æ5 ö
(1) ç , 0÷ (2) çè , 0÷ø (3) 3 (4) 4
è2 ø 3
12. The length of the diameter of the circle which
æ5 ö
(3) (0, 0) (4) ç , 0÷ touches the x-axis at the point (1, 0) and passes
è4 ø
6. If P and Q are the points of intersection of the circles through the point (2, 3) is : [AIEEE-2012]

x 2 + y 2 + 3x + 7y + 2p – 5 = 0 and (1) 5/3 (2) 10/3

x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – p2 = 0, then there is a circle (3) 3/5 (4) 6/5
passing through P, Q and (1, 1) for :- :-
13. The number of common tangents of the circles
(1) All except two values of p given by x 2 + y 2 – 8x – 2y + 1 = 0 and
(2) Exactly one value of p x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y = 0 is : [AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
(3) All values of p
(1) four (2) two
(4) All except one value of p [AIEEE-2009]
(3) three (4) one
E
104 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
14. The equation of the circle passing through the point 19. A possible equation of L is :- [IIT-2012]
(1, 2) and through the points of intersection of
x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 21 = 0 and 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 (1) x - 3y = 1 (2) x + 3y = 1
is given by :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)]

(1) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y + 11 = 0 (3) x - 3y = -1 (4) x + 3y = 5

(2) x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 11 = 0 20. The circle passing through (1, – 2) and touching
(3) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 7 = 0 the axis of x at (3, 0) also passes through the
(4) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 3 = 0 point : [JEE(Main)-2013]

15. If three distinct points A, B, C are given in the (1) (–5, 2) (2) (2, –5)
2-dimensional coordinate plane such that the ratio (3) (5, –2) (4) (–2, 5)
of the distance of each one of them from the point 21. Circle(s) touching x-axis at a distance 3 from the
1
(1, 0) to the distance from (–1, 0) is equal to , origin and having an intercept of length 2 7 or
2
then the circumcentre of the triangle ABC is at the y-axis is (are) [JEE (Advance) - 2013]
2 2
point :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)] (1) x + y – 6x + 8y + 9 = 0
(2) x2 + y2 – 6x + 7y + 9 = 0
æ1 ö (3) x2 + y2 – 6x – 8y + 9 = 0
(1) ç ,0 ÷ (2) (3, 0)
è3 ø (4) x2 + y2 – 6x – 7y + 9 = 0
22. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius
æ5 ö = 1. If T is the circle centred at (0, y), passing
(3) (0, 0) (4) ç ,0 ÷
è3 ø through origin and touching the circle C externally,

16. If the lin e y = mx + 1 meets the circle then the radius of T is equal to : [JEE(Main)-2014]

x2 + y2 + 3x = 0 in two points equidistant from

3 3 1 1
and on opposite sides of x-axis, then :- (1) (2) (3) (4)
2 2 2 4
[AIEEE-2012 (Online)]

(1) 2m – 3 = 0 (2) 2m + 3 = 0 23. A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and is
(3) 3m + 2 = 0 (4) 3m – 2 = 0 orthogonal to the circles (x – 1)2 + y2 = 16 and
17. The locus of the mid-point of the chord of contact x2 + y2 = 1. Then :- [JEE(Advanced)-2014, 3]
of tangents drawn from points lying on the straight (1) radius of S is 8 (2) radius of S is 7
2 2
line 4x – 5y = 20 to the circle x + y = 9 is- (3) centre of S is (–7, 1) (4) centre is S is (–8, 1)
[IIT-2012] 24. If the poin t (1, 4) lies in side the circle
2 2
(1) 20(x + y ) – 36x + 45y = 0 x2 + y2 – 6x – 10y + p = 0 and the circle does
(2) 20(x2 + y2) + 36x – 45y = 0 not touch or intersect the coordinate axes, then the
2 2
(3) 36(x + y ) – 20x + 45y = 0 set of all possible values of p is the interval:
2 2
(4) 36(x + y ) + 20x – 45y = 0 JEE(Main)-2014]

Paragraph for Question 18 and 19 (1) (25 , 29) (2) (25 , 39)
A tangent PT is drawn to the circle x 2 + y2 = 4 at (3) (9, 25) (4) (0, 25)
25. The set of all real values of l for which exactly two
the point P ( )
3, 1 . A straight line L, perpendicular
common tangents can be drawn to the circles
to PT is a tangent to the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 1. x2 + y2 – 4x – 4y + 6 = 0 and
18. A common tangent of the two circles is [IIT-2012] x2 + y2 – 10x – 10y + l = 0 is the interval
(1) x = 4 (2) y = 2 JEE(Main)-2014]

(1) (18, 48) (2) (12, 24)

(3) x + 3y = 4 (4) x + 2 2y = 6 (3) (18, 42) (4) (12, 32)
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 105

26. For the two circles x 2 + y 2 = 16 and 32. Three circles of radii a, b, c(a < b < c) touch each
x2 + y2 – 2y = 0, there is / are:- JEE(Main)-2014] other externally. If they have x-axis as a common
tangent, then : [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) no common tangent

(2) two pairs of common tangents

1 1 1
(1) = +
a b c
(3) one pair of common tangents
(2) a, b, c are in A. P.
(4) three common tangents
(3) a , b, c are in A. P..
27. The equation of the circle described on the chord
3x + y + 5 = 0 of the circle x2 + y2 = 16 as diameter
1 1 1
is :- (4) = +
b a c
(1) x2 + y2 + 3x + y – 2 = 0
33. If the circles x2 + y2 – 16x–20y + 164 = r2 and
(2) x2 + y2 + 3x + y – 22 = 0 (x–4)2 + (y – 7)2 = 36 intersect at two distinct points,
(3) x2 + y2 + 3x + y + 1 = 0 then:- [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(4) x2 + y2 + 3x + y – 11 = 0 (1) 0 < r < 1 (2) 1 < r < 11

(3) r > 11 (4) r = 11
28. The number of common tangents to the circle
34. If a circle C passing through the point (4,0) touches
x2 + y2 – 4x – 6y – 12 = 0 and the circle x2 + y2 + 4x – 6y = 12 externally at the
x2 + y2 + 6x + 18y + 26 = 0, is : point (1, –1), then the radius of C is :-
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
[JEE(Main)-2015]

(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 1 (4) 2 (1) 57 (2) 4 (3) 2 5 (4) 5

29. If one of the diameters of the circle, given by the 35. If the area of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the
euqation, x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y – 12 = 0, is a chord circle, x 2 + y 2 + 10x + 12y + c = 0 is
of a circle S, whose centre is at (–3, 2), then the 27 3 sq. units then c is equal to :
radius of S is :- [JEE(Main)-2016]
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(1) 10 (2) 5 2 (1) 20 (2) 25

(3) 13 (4) –25
(3) 5 3 (4) 5 36. A square is inscribed inthe circle
30. The centres of those circles which touch the circle, x2 + y2 – 6x + 8y – 103 = 0 with its sides parallel
x2 + y2 – 8x – 8y – 4 = 0, externally and also touch to the corrdinate axes. Then the distance of the
the x-axis, lie on :- [JEE(Main)-2016]
vertex of this square which is nearest to the origin
is :- [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) A parabola
(1) 13 (2) 137
(2) A circle
(3) An ellipse which is not a circle (3) 6 (4) 41
(4) A hyperbola 37. The straight line x + 2y = 1 meets the coordinate
31. The radius of a circle, having minimum area, which axes at A and B. A circle is drawn through A, B and
touches the curve y = 4 – x2 and the lines, y = |x| the origin. Then the sum of perpendicular distances
is :- [JEE(Main)-2017] from A and B on the tangent to the circle at the
origin is : [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) 4 ( 2 + 1) (2) 2 ( 2 + 1)
5 5
(3) 2 ( 2 –1) (4) 4 ( 2 –1)
(1)
4
(2)
2
(3) 2 5 (4) 4 5

E
106 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
38. Two circles with equal radii are intersecting at the 43. The tangent and the normal lines at the point
points (0, 1) and (0, –1). The tangent at the point
(0, 1) to one of the circles passes through the centre
( )
3,1 to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 and the x-axis
form a triangle. The area of this triangle (in square
of the other circle. Then the distance between the units) is : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
centres of these circles is :
1 4 1 2
[JEE(Main)-January,2019] (1) (2) (3) (4)
3 3 3 3
(1) 1 (2) 2 44. The sum of the squares of the lengths of the chords
intercepted on the circle, x2 + y2 = 16, by the lines,
(3) 2 2 (4) 2
x + y = n, n Î N, where N is the set of all natural
39. A circle cuts a chord of length 4a on the x-axis and numbers, is :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019]

passes through a point on the y-axis, distant 2b from (1) 320 (2) 160
the origin. Then the locus of the centre of this circle, (3) 105 (4) 210
is :- [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
45. The common tangent to the circles x2 + y2 = 4 and
(1) A hyperbola (2) A parabola x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y – 24 = 0 also passes through
the point :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(3) A straight line (4) An ellipse
(1) (–4, 6) (2) (6, –2)
40. If a variable line, 3x+4y–l=0 is such that the two
(3) (–6, 4) (4) (4, –2)
circles x 2 + y 2 – 2x – 2y + 1 = 0 and
46. A rectangle is inscribed in a circle with a diameter
x2+y2–18x–2y+78 = 0 are on its opposite sides,
lying along the line 3y = x + 7. If the two adjacent
then the set of all values of l is the interval :-
vertices of the rectang le are
[JEE(Main)-January,2019] (–8, 5) and (6, 5), then the area of the rectangle
(in sq. units) is :- [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(1) [12, 21] (2) (2, 17)
(1) 72 (2) 84 (3) 98 (4) 56
(3) (23, 31) (4) [13, 23] 2 2
47. If a tangent to the circle x + y = 1 intersects the
41. let C 1 and C 2 be the centres of the circles coordinate axes at distinct points P and Q, then the
x2+y2–2x–2y–2 = 0 and x2+y2–6x–6y+14 = 0 locus of the mid-point of PQ is
respectively. If P and Q are the points of intersection [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
of these circles, then th e area 2 2
(1) x + y – 2xy = 0
(in sq. units) of the quadrilateral PC1QC2 is :
(2) x2 + y2 – 16x2y2 = 0
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(3) x2 + y2 – 4x2y2 = 0
(1) 8 (2) 6 (4) x2 + y2 – 2x2y2 = 0
(3) 9 (4) 4 48. The locus of the centres of the circles, which touch
the circle, x2 + y2 = 1 externally, also touch the
42. If a circle of radius R passes through the origin O and
y-axis and lie in the first quadrant, is :
intersects the coordinate axes at A and B, then the locus
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]
of the foot of perpendicular from O on AB is:

[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) y = 1 + 4x , x ³ 0

(1) (x2 + y2)2 = 4Rx2y2 (2) x = 1 + 4y , y ³ 0

(2) (x2 + y2)(x + y) = R2xy
(3) x = 1 + 2y , y ³ 0
(3) (x2 + y2)3 = 4R2x2y2

(4) (x2 + y2)2 = 4R2x2y2 (4) y = 1 + 2x , x ³ 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 107
49. If the circles x2 + y2 + 5Kx + 2y + K = 0 and 53. Let the tangents drawn from the origin to the circle,
x2 + y2 – 8x – 4y + 16 = 0 touch it at the points
2(x2 +y2) + 2Kx + 3y –1 = 0, (K Î R) , intersect
A and B. The (AB)2 is equal to :
at the points P and Q, then th e line
[JEE(Main)-January,2020]
4x + 5y – K = 0 passes through P and Q for :
52 32
[JEE(Main)-April,2019] (1) (2)
5 5
(1) exactly two values of K
(2) exactly one value of K 56 64
(3) (4)
5 5
(3) no value of K.
54. If a line, y = mx + c is a tangent to the circle,
(4) infinitely many values of K (x – 3)2 + y2 = 1 and it is perpendicular to a line
L 1 , where L 1 is the tangent to the circle,
50. The line x = y touches a circle at the point
(1, 1). If the circle also passes through the point æ 1 1 ö
x2 + y2 = 1 at the point ç , ÷ , then
(1, –3), then its radius is : [JEE(Main)-April,2019] è 2 2ø

[JEE(Main)-January,2020]
(1) 3 2 (2) 3 (3) 2 2 (4) 2
(1) c2 – 6c + 7 = 0
51. A circle touching the x-axis at (3, 0) and making an
(2) c2 + 6c + 7 = 0
intercept of length 8 on the y-axis passes through
(3) c2 + 7c + 6 = 0
the point : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(4) c2 – 7c + 6 = 0
(1) (3, 10) (2) (2,3) (3) (1,5) (4) (3,5) 55. A circle touches the y-axis at the point (0, 4) and
passes through the point (2, 0). Which of the
52. If the angle of intersection at a point where the two following lines is not a tangent to this circle ?
circles with radii 5 cm and 12 cm intersect is 90°,
[JEE(Main)-January,2020]
then the length (in cm) of their common chord is :
(1) 3x – 4y – 24 = 0 (2) 3x + 4y – 6 = 0
[JEE(Main)-April,2019] (3) 4x + 3y – 8 = 0 (4) 4x – 3y + 17 = 0
56. If the curves, x 2 – 6x + y 2 + 8 = 0 and
60 120
(1) (2) x2 – 8y + y2 + 16 – k = 0, (k > 0) touch each other at
13 13
a point, then the largest value of k is ______.
[JEE(Main)-January,2020]
13 13
(3) (4)
2 5

P R E V IO U S Y E A R S Q U E S T IO N S A n s w er K ey E xer cis e-III

Q u e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A ns. 3 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 3 4
Q u e. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A ns. 2 2 2 2 4 4 1 4 1 3
Q u e. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A ns. 1 ,3 4 2 ,3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1
Q u e. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A ns. 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 1
Q u e. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
A ns. 4 3 4 4 2 2 3 4 3 3
Q u e. 51 52 53 54 55 56
A ns. 1 2 4 2 3 3 6 .0 0

E
108 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Important Notes

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 109
CONIC SECTION
1. CONIC SECTION :

Definition : The locus of a point which moves in a plane such that the
ratio of its distance from a fixed point to its perpendicular distance from a
fixed straight line is always constant, is known as a conic section or a conic.
The fixed point is called the focus of the conic and this fixed line is called
the directrix of the conic. Also this constant ratio is called the eccentricity
of the conic and is denoted by e.
If e = 1, the conic is called parabola.
If e < 1, the conic is called Ellipse.
If e > 1, the conic is called Hyperbola.
If e = 0, the conic is called Circle.
If e = ¥, the conic is called Pair of straight lines.
In the figure
SP
= constant = e or SP = ePM
PM

2. EQUATION OF CONIC SECTION :

If the focus is (a, b) and the directrix is ax + by + c = 0 then the equation of the conic section whose eccentricity
is e
M P(x, y)
|ax + by + c|
(x - a )2 + (y - b )2 = e.
ax + by + c = 0

(a2 + b2 )

(ax + by + c)2 S(a , b )

or (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = e2.
(a2 + b2 )

Ex.1 Find the locus of a point, which moves such that its distance from the point (0, –1) is twice its distance from
the line 3x + 4y + 1 = 0
Sol. Let P(x1, y1) be the point, whose locus is required.
Its distance from (0, –1) = 2 × its distance from the line 3x + 4y + 1 = 0
|3x1 + 4y1 + 1|
Þ (x1 - 0)2 + (y1 + 1)2 = 2 ×
(32 + 42 )

5 x12 + (y1 + 1)2 = 2|3x1 + 4y1 + 1|

Squaring and simplifying, we have

25(x12 + y12 + 2y1 + 1) = 4(9x12 + 16y12 + 24x1 y1 + 6x1 + 8y1 + 1)

Hence the locus of (x1, y1) is

11x2 + 39y2 + 96xy + 24x – 18y – 21 = 0

3. RECOGNISATION OF CONICS :

The equation of conics represented by the general equation of second degree

ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
Can be recognised easily by the condition given in the tabular form. For this, first we have to find discriminant
of the equation.
E
110 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
We know that the discriminant of above equation is represented by D where
D = abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2
when D ¹ 0
In this case equation (1) represents the Non-degenerate conic whose nature is given in the following tabel:

Condition Naute of Conic

D ¹ 0, h = 0, a = b a circle
D ¹ 0, ab – h = 0
2
a parabola
D ¹ 0, ab – h2 > 0 an Ellipse or empty set
D ¹ 0, ab – h < 0
2
a Hyperbola
D ¹ 0, ab – h2 < 0 and a + b = 0 a Rectangular hyperbola

Ex.2 What conic does 13x2 – 18xy + 37y2 + 2x + 14y – 2 = 0 represent ?

Sol. Compare the given equation with
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
\ a = 13, h = –9, b = 37, g = 1, f = 7, c = –2
then D = abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2
= (13) (37) (–2) + 2(7) (1) (–9) – 13(7)2 – 37(1)2 + 2(–9)2
= – 962 – 126 – 637 – 37 + 162 = – 1600 ¹ 0
and also h2 = (–9)2 = 81 and ab = 14 × 37 = 481
Here ab – h2 = 400 > 0
So we have ab – h 2 > 0 and D ¹ 0.
Hence the given equation represents an ellipse.

4. HOW TO FIND THE CENTRE OF CONICS :

If S º ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0

Partially differentiating w.r.t. x and y, we get

¶S ¶S
= 2ax + 2hy + 2g ; = 2hx + 2by + 2f
¶x ¶y
(Treating y as constant) (Treating x as constant)

¶S ¶S
For centre, =0 and =0
¶x ¶y
\ 2ax + 2hy + 2g = 0 and 2hx + 2by + 2f = 0
or ax + hy + g = 0 and hx + by + f = 0

æ hf - bg gh - af ö
Solving these equations we get the centre (x, y) = ç 2
, 2 ÷
è ab - h ab - h ø
Ex.3 Find the centre of the conic 14x2 – 4xy + 11y2 – 44x – 58y + 71 = 0
Sol. Let f(x, y) º 14x2 – 4xy + 11y2 – 44x – 58y + 71 = 0
Differentiating partially w.r.t. to x and y then

¶f ¶f
= 28x – 4y – 44 and = –4x + 22y – 58
¶x ¶y

¶f ¶f
For centre = 0 and =0 \ 28x – 4y – 44 = 0 and –4x + 22y – 58 = 0
¶x ¶y
Solving (1) and (2) we get x = 2 and y = 3 \ centre is (2, 3)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 111
PARABOLA
1. DEFINITION : Y
A parabola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane such a
M || P(x, y)
way that its distance from a fixed point is equal to its perpendicular L
distance from a fixed straight line. (focus)
S x
Focus : The fixed point is called the focus of the parabola. Z A

Directrix : The fixed line is called the directrix of the parabola. Directrix L'

2. GENERAL EQUATION OF A PARABOLA :

Let S(a, b) be the focus, and lx + my + n = 0 is the equation of the directrix. Let P(x, y) be any point on the
parabola. Then by definition
SP = PM
|lx + my + n|
Þ (x - a)2 + (y - b)2 =
(l2 + m2 )
(lx + my + n)2
Þ (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 =
( l 2 + m2 )

Þ m2x2 + l2y2 – 2lmxy + x term + y term + constant = 0

This is of the form (mx – ly)2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
This equation is the general equation of parabola.
Note : Second degree terms in the general equation of a parabola forms a perfect square.
Ex.1 Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is at (–1, –2) and the directrix is the straight line x – 2y + 3 =0
Sol. Let P(x, y) be any point on the parabola whose focus is S(–1, –2)
and the directrix x – 2y + 3 = 0. Draw PM perpendicular from
P(x, y) on the directrix x – 2y + 3 = 0. Then by definition
SP = PM

2
æ |x - 2y + 3| ö
Þ (SP)2 = (PM)2 Þ (x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2 = ç
ç (1)2 + (–2)2 ÷÷
è ø

Þ 5(x2 + y2 + 2x + 4y + 5) = (x2 + 4y2 – 4xy + 6x – 12y + 9

Þ 4x2 + y2 + 4xy + 4x + 32y + 16 = 0
Ex.2 Find the equation of the parabola whose focus is (4, –3) and
vertex is (4, –1)
Sol. Let A(4, –1) be the vertex and S(4, –3) be the focus.

-3 + 1
\ Slope of AS = =¥
4-4

which is parallel to y-axis

\ Directrix parallel to x-axis.
Let Z(x1, y1) be any point on the directrix, then A is the mid
point of SZ
x1 + 4
\ 4= Þ x1 = 4
2
y1 - 3
and –1 = Þ y1 = 1
2
\ Z = (4, 1)

E
112 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Also directrix is parallel to x-axis and passes through Z(4, 1), so equation of directrix is
y = 1 or y – 1 = 0
Now let P(x, y) be any point on the parabola. Join SP and drawn PM perpendicular to the directrix. Then by
definition
SP = PM
2
æ|y -1|ö
Þ (SP) = (PM) Þ (x – 4) + (y + 3) = ç
2 2 2
÷ 2
Þ (x – 4)2 + (y + 3)2 = (y – 1)2
è 12 ø

or x2 – 8x + 8y + 24 = 0
3. TERMS RELATED TO PARABOLA :

Axis : A straight line passes through the focus and perpendicular to the directrix is called the axis of parabola.
Vertex : The point of intersection of a parabola and its axis is called the vertiex of the Parabola. It is middle
point of the focus and the point of intersection of axis and directrix
Focal Length (Focal distance) : The distance of any point P(x, y) on the parabola from the focus is called
the focal length i.e.
the focal distance of P = the perpendicular distance of the point P from the directrix
Double ordinate : The chord which is perpendicular to the axis of Parabola or parallel to Directrix is called
double ordinate of the Parabola.
Focal Chord : Any chord of the parabola passing through the focus is called focal chord.
Latus Rectum : If a double ordinate passes through the focus of parabola then it is called as latus rectum.
Length of latus rectum : The length of the latus rectum = 2 × perpendicular distance of focus from the
directrix

4. STANDARD FORM OF EQUATION OF PARABOLA :

If we take vertex as the origin, axis as x-axis and distance between vertex and focus as 'a' then equation of the
parabola in the simplest form will be-
y2 = 4ax

y
2 a) L
M L(a, Focal Chord
Directrix x=a
Double ordinate
Fo ance
Di
st
ca
l

axis x
Z A S(a,0)
x+a=0

Latus Rectum
L'
y' L'
(a, –2a)

Parameters of the parabola y2 = 4ax

(i) Vertex A Þ (0, 0) (ii) Focus S Þ (a, 0)
(iii) Directrix Þ x + a = 0 (iv) Axis Þ y = 0 or x-axis
(v) Equation of Latus Rectum Þ x = a (vi) Length of L.R. Þ 4a
(vii) Ends of L.R. Þ (a, 2a), (a, –2a)
(viii) The focal distance Þ sum of abscissa of the point and distance between vertex and L.R.
(ix) If length of any double ordinate of parabola y2 = 4ax is 2l then coordinates of end points of this Double
ordinate are
æ l2 ö æ l2 ö
ç , l ÷ and ç , – l ÷
è 4a ø è 4a ø
E
E
Equation of vertex Focus Equation of Equation of Length of Extremities Equation of Equation of Parametrix Eccen- Figures
Parabolas the axis directrix latus rectum of latus the latus tangent at Co-ordinates tricity
rectum rectum vertex
ALLEN

y2 = 4ax (0, 0) (a, 0) y=0 x+a=0 4a (a, ± 2a) x–a=0 x=0 (at2, 2at) 1

y2 = – 4ax (0, 0) (–a, 0) y=0 x–a=0 4a (–a, ±2a) x+a=0 x=0 (–at2, 2at) 1

x2 = 4ay (0, 0) (0, a) x=0 y+a=0 4a (±2a, a) y–a=0 y=0 (2at, at2) 1

x2 = – 4ay (0, 0) (0, –a) x=0 y–a=0 4a (±2a, –a) y+a=0 y=0 (2at, –at2) 1
JEE(Main)-Mathematics
113
114 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.3 If focus of a parabola is (3, –4) and directrix is x + y – 2 = 0, then its vertex is-
(1) (4/15, –4/13) (2) (–13/4, –15/4) (3) (15/2, –13/2) (4) (15/4, – 13/4)
Sol.(4) First we find the equation of axis of parabola, which is perpendicular to directrix. So its equations is
x – y + k = 0. It passes through focus S(3, –4)
Þ 3 – (–4) + k = 0 Þ k = –7
Let Z is the point of intersection of axis and directrix
Solving equation x + y – 2 = 0 and x – y – 7 = 0 gives Z (9/2, –5/2)
Vertex A is the mid point of Z and S

æ 9 5ö
ç 3 + 2 -4 - 2 ÷ æ 15 13 ö
,–
Þ Aç , ÷ = A çè 4 ÷
è 2 2 ø 4 ø

Ex.4 The equation of the parabola whose vertex is (–3, 0) and directrix is x + 5 = 0 is-
(1) y2 = 8(x + 3) (2) y2 = –8(x + 3) (3) x2 = 8(y + 3) (4) y2 = 8(x + 5)
Sol.(1) A line passing through the vertex (–3, 0) and perpendicular to directrix x + 5 = 0 is x-axis which is the axis of
the parabola by definition. Let focus of the parabola is (a, 0). Since vertex, is the middle point of Z(–5, 0) and
focus S, therefore.

(a - 5)
–3 = Þ a = –1
2

\ Focus = (–1, 0)
Thus the equation to the parabola is
(x + 1)2 + y2 = (x + 5)2
Þ y2 = 8(x + 3)
Ex.5 The equation of the directrix of the parabola y2 = 12x is-
(1) x + 3 = 0 (2) y + 3 = 0 (3) x – 3 = 0 (4) y – 3 = 0
Sol.(1) Here a = 3, so the equation of the directrix is given by x = –a Þ x = –3
Þ x+3=0
Ex.6 The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola x2 = – 12y is-
(1) y = 3 (2) x = 3 (3) y = –3 (4) x = –3
Sol.(3) Here a = 3 so the equation of the L.R. is given by y = –a Þ y = –3

5. REDUCTION TO STANDARD EQUATION :

If the equation of a parabola is not in standard form and if it contains second degree term either in y or in x
(but not in both) then it can be reduced into standard form. For this we change the given equation into the
following forms-
(y – k)2 = 4a(x – h) or (x – p)2 = 4b(y – q)
And then we compare from the following table for the results related to parabola.

Equation Vertex Axis Focus Directrix Equation of L.R. Length

of parabola of LR.

(y – k)2 = 4a(x – h) (h, k) y=k (h + a, k) x+a–h=0 x=a+h 4a

(x – p) = 4b(y – q)
2
(p, q) x=p (p, b + q) y+b–q=0 y=b+q 4b

Ex.7 The axis of the parabola 9y2 – 16x – 12y – 57 = 0 is-

(1) 3y = 2 (2) 2x = 3 (3) x + 3y = 3 (4) y = 3
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 115
Sol.(1) 9y2 – 12y = 16x + 57
2
æ 2ö 16 æ 61 ö
Þ (3y – 2)2 = 16x + 57 Þ ç y - ÷ = çx+ ÷
è 3ø 9 è 16 ø

Which shows that equation of the axis is

y – 2/3 = 0 Þ 3y = 2
Ex.8 Vertex, focus, latus rectum, length of the latus rectum and equation of directrix of the parabola y2 = 4x + 4y
are-
(1) (1, 2), (0, 2), y = 0, 4, x = –2 (2) (–1, 2), (0, 2), x = 0, 4, x = –2
(3) (–1, 2), (1, 2), x = 0, 4, x = 2 (4) (–1, 2) (0, 2), y = 0, 2, y = –2
Sol.(2) Given parabola y = 4x + 4y
2

Þ (y – 2)2 = 4(x + 1)
Þ Y2 = 4X
Here X = x + 1, Y = y – 2
vertex = (X = 0, Y = 0)
Þ (x + 1 = 0, y – 2 = 0) Þ (–1, 2)
Focus (X = 1, Y = 0)
Þ (x + 1 = 1, y – 2 = 0) Þ (0, 2)
Latus rectum Þ X = 1 Þ x = 0
Length of Latus rectum = 4
equation of the directrix is
X = –1 Þ x + 1 = –1 Þ x = –2
Ex.9 The vertex of the parabola x2 – 8y – x + 19 = 0 is-

æ 75 1 ö æ 1 75 ö æ 1 75 ö
(1) ç , ÷ (2) ç , ÷ (3) ç , – ÷ (4) None of these
è 32 2 ø è 2 32 ø è2 32 ø

Sol.(2) The given equation of Parabola can be written as

2 2
æ 1ö 1 æ 1ö 76 - 1
ç x - ÷ – 8y + 19 – = 0 Þ ç x - ÷ = 8y –
è 2ø 4 è 2ø 4

2
æ 1ö æ 75 ö æ 1 75 ö
Þ çx- ÷ = 8çy- ÷ \ Vertex = ç , ÷
è 2ø è 32 ø è 2 32 ø

6. PARAMETRIC EQUATION OF PARABOLA :

The parametric equation Parabola y2 = 4ax are x = at2, y = 2at

Hence any point on this parabola is (at2, 2at) which is called as 't' point.
Note :
(i) Parametrix equation of the Parabola x2 = 4ay is x = 2at, y = at 2
(ii) Any point on Parabola y2 = 4ax may also be written as (a/t2, 2a/t)
(iii) The ends of a double ordinate of a parabola can be taken as (at2, 2at) and (at2, –2at)
(iv) Parametric equations of the parabola (y – h)2 = 4a(x – k)2 is x – k = at2 and y – h = 2at
Ex.10 The parametric equation of the parabola y2 = 8x are-
(1) x = 2t, y = 4t2 (2) x = 2t2, y = 4t (3) x = t2, y = 2t (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Here a = 2; y = 2at Þ y = 2.2 . t = 4t
x = at2 Þ x = 2t2
E
116 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.11 The parametric equation of the parabola (y – 2)2 = 12(x – 4) are-
(1) 6t, 3t2 (2) 2 + 3t, 4 + t2 (3) 4 + 3t2, 2 + 6t (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Here a = 3
y – 2 = 2at Þ y = 2 + 2.3t = 2 + 6t
x – 4 = at2 Þ x = 4 + 3.t2 = 4 + 3t2
Ex.12 Parameter t of a point (4, –6) of the parabola y2 = 9x is-
(1) 4/3 (2) –4/3 (3) –3/4 (4) –4/5
Sol.(2) Parametric coordinates of any point on parabola y2 = 4ax are (at2, 2at)
Here 4a = 9 Þ a = 9/4
\ y coordinate 2at = –6
\ 2(9/4) t = –6 Þ t = –4/3

7. EQUATION OF PARABOLA WHEN ITS VERTEX AND FOCUS ARE GIVEN :

If both lie on either of the coordinate axis : In this case first find distance 'a' between these points and
taking vertex as the origin suppose the equation as y2 = 4ax or x2 = 4ay. Then shift the origin to the vertex
When both do not lie on any coordinate axes : In this case first find the coordinates of Z and equation
of the directrix, then write the equations of the parabola by the definition.
Ex.13 If (0, 4) and (0, 2) are vertex and focus of parabola respectively, then its equation is-
(1) y2 + 8x = 32 (2) y2 – 8x = 32 (3) x2 + 8y = 32 (4) x2 – 8y = 32
Sol.(3) Since vertex and focus are on y-axis, so y-axis is the axis of the parabola.
Distance between vertex and focus = 'a' = 2.
So on taking vertex as origin, the equation of the parabola is x2 = – 4ay
(negative because vertex lies above the focus)
or x2 = –8y
Now shifting the origin to its original position, the required equation will be
x2 = –8(y – 4)
Þ x2 + 8y = 32

8. CHORD :

Equation of chord joining any two points of a parabola :

Let the points are (at12, 2at1) and (at22, 2at2) then equation of chord is-

2at2 - 2at1
(y – 2at1) = (x – at12)
at22 - at12

2
Þ y – 2at1 = (x – at12)
t1 + t2

Þ (t1 + t2)y = 2x + 2at1t2

Note :
(i) If 't1' and 't2' are the parameters of the ends of a focal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax, then t1t2 = –1
(ii) If one end of focal chord of parabola is (at 2, 2at) then other end will be (a/t2, – 2a/t) and length of focal
chord = a(t + 1/t)2
(iii) The length of the chord joining two points 't1' and 't2' on the parabola y2 = 4ax is

a(t1 – t2) (t1 + t2 )2 + 4

4
Length of intercept : a(1 + m2 ) (a - mc) (for y2 = 4 ax)
m2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 117
9. PARAMETRIC RELATION BETWEEN THE CO-ORDINATES OF THE ENDS OF
A FOCAL CHORD OF A PARABOLA :

Let y2 = 4ax be parabola, if PQ be a focal chord

If P º (at12, 2at1) and Q º (at22, 2at2)
Since PQ passes through the focus S(a, 0)
\ Q, S, P are collinear
Slope of PS = Slope of QS

2at1 - 0 0 - 2at 2 2t1 2t

Þ = Þ = 2 2
2
at1 - a a - at22 2
t1 - 1 t2 - 1

Þ t1(t22 –1) = t2(t12 – 1)

Þ t1t2 (t2 – t1) + (t2 – t1) = 0
t2 – t1 ¹ 0 \ t1t2 + 1 = 0

1
t1 t2 = – 1 or t2 = - ..... (1)
t1

which is required relation

æa 2a ö
Note : If one extremity of a focal chord is (at12, 2at1) then the other extremity (at22, 2at2) becomes ç 2 , -
è t1 t1 ÷ø
by virtue of relation (1).
Ex.14 If one extremity of the focal chord of the parabola y2 = 16x is (1, –4) then find other extremity.
Sol. Here 2at = –4 and a = 4

-4 1
Þ t= = – other extremity is
2.4 2

æ 4 -2.4 ö
ç , ÷ = (16, 16)
è 1/ 4 -1/ 2 ø

Ex.15 Find the length of a chord of a parabola y2 = 4x which passes through vertex and makes an angle of 45° with
x-axis.
Sol. Let the equation of chord is y = mx + c
Here m = tan45° = 1
as it passes through vertex (0, 0) c = 0
Hence the equation is y = x and a = 1

l = 4 1(1 + 1) (1 - 0) = 4 2
Ex.16 Length of intercept by the line 4y = 3x – 48 on the parabola y2 = 64x is-

9 1600 160
(1) (2) (3) (4) None of these
1600 9 9

Sol.(2) 4y = 3x – 48 Þ m = 3/4, c = –12

y2 = 64x Þ a = 16
4
Length of intercept = a(1 + m 2 ) (a - mc)
m2
4 æ 9 öæ 3ö 1600
= × 16 16 ç 1 + ÷ ç 16 + 12 ´ ÷ =
9 è 16 ø è 4ø 9

E
118 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
10. POSITION OF A POINT AND A LINE WITH RESPECT TO A PARABOLA :

Position of a point with respect to a parabola : A point (x1, y1) lies inside, on or outside of the region of
the parabola y2 = 4ax according as y12 – 4ax1 <, = or > 0
Line and Parabola : The line y = mx + c will intersect a parabola y2 = 4ax in two real and different
coincident or imaginary point, according as a – mc >, = or < 0
Ex.17 For the parabola y2 = 8x point (2, 5) is-
(1) Inside the parabola (2) Focus
(3) Outside the parabola (4) On the parabola
Sol.(3) (y – 8x)x = 2, y=5 = (5) – 8 × 2 = 9 > 0
2 2

Þ Point (2, 5) is outside parabola y2 = 8x

11. TANGENT TO THE PARABOLA :

Condition of Tangency : If the line y = mx + c touches a parabola y2 = 4ax then c = a/m

Note :
(i) The line y = mx + c touches parabola x2 = 4ay if c = – am2
(ii) The line x cosa + ysina = p touches the parabola y2 = 4ax if asin2 a + pcos a = 0
(iii) If the equation of parabola is not in standard form, then for condition of tangency, first eliminate one
variable quantity (x or y) between equations of straight line and parabola and then apply the condition
B2 = 4AC for the quadratic equation so obtained.
Ex.18 The line y = mx + 1 is a tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x if-
(1) m = 1 (2) m = 4 (3) m = 2 (4) m = 3
Sol.(1) Here a = 1, c = 1, m = m. Now applying condition of tangency c = a/m, we have 1 = 1/m Þ m = 1
Ex.19 If the line 2x – 3y = k touches the parabola y2 = 6x, then the value of k is-
(1) 27/4 (2) –81/4 (3) –7 (4) –27/4

3y + k
Sol.(4) Given x = ..... (1)
2
and y2 = 6x ..... (2)

æ 3y + k ö
Þ y2 = 6 ç ÷ Þ y2 = 3(3y + k)
è 2 ø

Þ y2 – 9y – 3k = 0 ..... (3)
If line (1) touches parabola (2) then roots of quadratic equation (3) is equal
27
\ (–9)2 = 4 × 1 × (–3k) Þ k = –
4

12. EQUATION OF TANGENT :

Point form : The equation of tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point (x1, y1) is yy1 = 2a(x + x1) or T = 0
Note : Equation of tangents of all standard parabola at (x1, y1)
Equations of Parabolas Tangent at (x1, y1)

y2 = 4ax yy1 = 2a(x + x1)

y2 = – 4ax yy1 = –2a(x + x1)

x2 = 4ay xx1 = 2a(y + y1)

x2 = – 4ay xx1 = – 2a(y + y1)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 119
Parametric form : The equation of the tangent to the parabola at t i.e. (at2, 2at) is ty = x + at2
Note : The equation of tangents of all standard parabolas at (t')

Equations of Parabolas Parametric co-ordinates 't' Tangent at 't'

y2 = 4ax (at2, 2at) ty = x + at2

y2 = –4ax (–at2, 2at) ty = –x + at2

x2 = 4ay (2at, at2) tx = y + at2

x2 = –4ay (2at, – at2) tx = –y + at2

Slope form : The equation of the tangent of the parabola y2 = 4ax is

a
y = mx +
m

Note : The equation of tangents, condition of tangency and point of contact in term of slope
(m) of all standard parabolas.

Equation of Point of contact in Equation of tangent Condition of

parabolas terms of slope (m) in terms of slope (m) tangency

æ a 2a ö a a
y2 = 4ax ç 2, ÷ y = mx + c=
èm m ø m m

æ a 2a ö a a
y2 = – 4ax ç- 2 ,– ÷ y = mx – c=–
è m mø m m
x2 = 4ay (2am, am2) y = mx – am2 c = – am2
x2 = –4ay (–2am, –am2) y = mx + am2 c = am2

æ a 2a ö a a
(y – k)2 = 4a(x – h) çh+ 2 , k + ÷ y = mx – mh + k + c + mh = k +
è m mø m m

æ a 2a ö a a
(y – k)2 = –4a(x – h) çh– 2 , k – ÷ y = mx – mh + k – c + mh = k –
è m mø m m

(x – h)2 = 4a(y – k) (h + 2am, k + am2) y = mx – mh + k – am2 c + mh = k – am2

(x – h)2 = –4a(y – k) (h – 2am, k – am2) y = mx – mh + k + am2 c + mh = k + am2

Note :
(i) Point of intersection of tangents at points t1 and t2 of parabola is (at1t2, a(t1 + t2))
(ii) Two perpendicular tangents of a parabola meet on its directrix. So the director circle of a parabola is its
directrix or tangents drawn from any point on the directrix are always perpendicular.
(iii) The tangents drawn at the end points of a focal chord of a parabola are perpendicular and they meet at
the directrix.
Ex.20 The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the points (3, 2) is-
(1) 3y + x + 3 = 0 (2) 3x + y + 3 = 0 (3) 3x = y + 3 (4) 3y = x + 3

E
120 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Sol.(4) Since (3, 2) lies on the parabola y2 = 4ax, so
4 = 12a Þ a = 1/3
Now using T = 0, the equation of the tangent at (3, 2) is
y(2) = 2a(x + 3)
1
Þ y= (x + 3) Þ 3y = x + 3
3
Ex.21 The equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 12x drawn at the upper end of its latus rectum is-
(1) y = x + 3 (2) x + y = 3 (3) y = x – 3 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Here a = 3, so the upper end of LR = (3, 6). Hence the equation of the tangent at this point is y(6) = 6(x +3)
Þ y=x+3
Ex.22 The slope of tangent lines drawn from (3, 8) to the parabola y2 = – 12x are-
(1) –3, –1/3 (2) 3, 1/3 (3) 3, –1/3 (4) –3, 1/3
Sol.(3) Since 8 + 12 × 3 ¹ 0, therefore the point (3, 8) is not on the parabola
2

Now equation of any tangent to the parabola

y2 = –12x is written as

æ3ö
y = mx – ç ÷
èmø
Since this line passes through (3, 8)

æ3ö
\ 8 = 3m – ç ÷ Þ 3m2 – 8m – 3 = 0
èmø

1
Solving this equation, we get m = 3, –
3

Ex.23 If a tangent to the parabola y2 = ax makes an angle of 45° with x-axis, then its point of contact is-

æa aö æa aö æ a aö æ a aö
(1) ç , ÷ (2) ç , ÷ (3) ç – , ÷ (4) ç – , ÷
è 4 2ø è2 2ø è 2 4ø è 4 2ø

Sol.(1) The slope of the tangent = tan45° = 1

\ m = 1 and a º a/4

æ a / 4 2.a / 4 ö æa aö
\ Point of contact = ç 2 , ÷ = ç , ÷
è 1 1 ø è4 2ø
Ex.24 Find the common tangent of the parabola x2 = 4ay and y2 = 4ax(m > 0)
Sol. Equation of tangent for x2 = 4ay is y = mx – am2
as this line also touches y2 = 4ax
\ – am2 = a/m (c = a/m)
Þ m3 = –1 Þ m = – 1
\ equation of tangent Þ x + y + a = 0

13. NORMAL TO THE PARABOLA :

Equation of Normal :
Point Form : The equation to the normal at the point (x1, y1) of the parabola y2 = 4ax is given by

–y1
y – y1 = (x – x1)
2a
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 121

Equation of normals of all standard parabolas at (x1, y1)

Equation of parabolas Normal at (x1, y1)

y1
y2 = 4ax y – y1 = – (x – x1)
2a

y1
y2 = – 4ax y – y1 = (x – x1)
2a

2a
x2 = 4ay y – y1 = – (x – x1)
x1

2a
x2 = – 4ay y – y1 = (x – x1)
x1

Parametric Form : The equation to the normal at the point t is

Equation of Parabolas Parametric co-ordinates 't' Normals at 't'

y2 = 4ax (at2, 2at) y + tx =2at + at3

y2 = –4ax (–at2, 2at) y – tx = 2at + at3

x2 = 4ay (2at, at2) x + ty = 2at + at3

x2 = –4ay (2at, – at2) x – ty = 2at + at3

Slope Form : Equation of normal in terms of slope m is

Equation of Point of normal in Equation of normal Condition of

parabolas terms of slope (m) in terms of slope (m) normal

y2 = 4ax (am2, –2am) y = mx – 2am – am3 c = –2am – am3

y2 = – 4ax (–am2, 2am) y = mx + 2am + am3 c = 2am + am3

æ 2a a ö a a
x2 = 4ay ç- m , 2 ÷ y = mx + 2a + c = 2a +
è m ø m2 m2

æ 2a a ö a a
x2 = –4ay çm,– 2÷ y = mx – 2a – c = – 2a –
è m ø m2 m2

(y – k)2 = 4a(x – h) (h + am2, k – 2am) y – k = m(x – h) – 2am – am3 c = k – mh – 2am – am3

(y – k)2 = –4a(x – h) (h – am2, k + 2am) y – k = m(x – h) + 2am + am3 c = k – mh + 2am + am3

æ 2a a ö a a
(x – h)2 = 4a(y – k) ç h - m ,k + 2 ÷ y – k = m(x – h) + 2a + c = k – mh + 2a +
è m ø m2 m2

æ 2a a ö a a
(x – h)2 = –4a(y – k) çh+ m , k- 2 ÷ y – k = m(x – h) – 2a – c = k – mh – 2a –
è m ø m2 m2

E
122 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Note :
(i) The foot of the normal is (am2, –2am)
(ii) Condition for normal : the line y = mx + c is a normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax
if c = –2am – am3 and x2 = 4ay

a
If c = 2a +
m2
Ex.25 The equation of normal at the point (a/m2, 2a/m) on the parabola y2 = 4ax is-
(1) m3y = m2x – 2am2 – a (2) y = mx – 2am – am3
(3) m3y = 2am2 – m2x + a (4) None of these
Sol.(3) The equation of the normal at (at , 2at) of the parabola y2 = 4ax is written as
2

y + tx = 2at + at3
For the given point t = 1/m, therefore equation of required normal is written as

3
æ1ö æ1ö æ1ö
y + ç ÷ x = 2a ç ÷ + a ç ÷
èmø èmø èmø

Þ m3y = 2am2 – m2x + a

Ex.26 Find the equation of a normal at the parabola y2 = 4x which is parallel to the line y = 3x + 4
Sol. Let the equation is y = 3x + c
This is normal to the parabola y2 = 4x then
c = –2 am – am3 = – 2.3 – 33 (Q a = 1)
= – 33
Hence equation is y = 3x – 33
Ex.27 If the line x + y = 1 is a normal to the parabola y2 = kx, then the value of k is-
Sol. As line y = –x + 1 is the normal to the parabola y2 = kx then
1 = – 2(a) (–1) – a(–1)3
Þ a = 1/3
Þ 4a = k Þ k = 4/3
Ex.28 Find the equation of a normal at the parabola y2 = 4x which passes through (3, 0)
Sol. Equation of Normal y = mx – 2am – am3
Here a = 1 and it passes through (3, 0)
0 = 3m – 2m – m3 Þ m3 – m = 0 Þ m = 0, ±1
for m = 0 Þ y = 0 Þ m = 1 Þ y = x – 3 Þ m = –1 Þ y = –x + 3

14. PROPERTIES OF NORMAL :

(i) The line y = mx + c will normal to parabola y2 = 4ax if c = –2am – am3

y2 = 4ax if c = –2am – am3
(ii) If normal passes through point (x1, y1) which is not on parabola then
y1 = mx1 – 2am – am3
Þ am3 + (2a – x1)m + y1 = 0 ..... (1)
Which gives three values of m
Let three value of m are m1, m2 and m3 then from (1)
m1 + m2 + m3 = 0
2a - x1 y1
m1m2 + m2m3 + m3m1 = and m1m2m3 = –
a a
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 123
In General : From a given point three normal can be drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax. These normal are such
that
(a) The algebraic sum of their slopes is zero.
(b) The algebraic sum of the ordinates of their feet is zero.
(c) Out of these three at least one is real as imaginary normal will always occur in pairs.
(iii) the centroid of a triangle formed by joining the foots of the normal of the parallel lies on its axis and is
given by

æ am12 + am22 + am23 2am1 + 2am2 + 2am3 ö æ am12 + am22 + am32 ö

ç , ÷ = ç , 0÷
è 3 3 ø è 3 ø

(iv) The tangent at one extremity of a focal chord of a parabola is parallel to the normal at the other
extremity.
(v) Normal Chord : If the normal at 't1' meets the parabola
y2 = 4ax again at the point 't2' then this is called as normal

2
chord. Again for normal chord t2 = –t1 –
t1

4a(t12 + 1)3 / 2
(vi) Length of Normal chord is given by a(t1 – t2) (t1 + t2 )2 + 4 =
t12

(vii) If two normal drawn at point 't1' and t2 meet on the parabola then t1t2 = 2
(viii) The normal at the extremities of the latus rectum of a parabola intersect at right angle on the axis of the
parabola.
Ex.29 If the normal of the parabola y2 = 4ax drawn at (a, 2a) meets the parabola again at point (at2, 2at) then t is
equal to-
(1) 3 (2) 1 (3) –1 (4) –3
Sol.(4) If t' be the parameter of the given point, then 2at' = 2a Þ t' = 1

2 2
Now t = –t' – Þ t = –1 – = –3
t' 1
Ex.30 Find the point where the normal at (4, 4) meets the parabola y2 = 4x
Sol. Here a = 1 and at12 = 4 Þ t1 = 2

2
t2 = –2 – = –3
2
Point is (at22 , 2at2) = {(–3)2, 2.1.(–3)} = (9, – 6)
Ex.31 If two of the normal of the parabola y2 = 4x, that pass through (15, 12) are 4x + y = 72, and 3x – y = 33,
then the third normal is-
(1) y = x – 3 (2) x + y = 3 (3) y = x + 3 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Here, If m1, m2, m3 are slopes of normal, then

y1
m1 + m2 + m3 = 0 and m1m2m3 =
a

a = 1 here m1 = –4, m2 = 3
\ –4 + 3 + m3 = 0 Þ m3 = 1
E
124 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

12
Also (–4) (3) (1) = – is satisfied. But (15, 12) satisfies y = x – 3
1

Hence (1) is correct answer

Ex.32 If two normal drawn from any point to the parabola y2 = 4ax makes angle a and b with the axis such that
[Link] = 2, then locus of this point is-
(1) y2 = 4ax (2) x2 = 4ay (3) y2 = – 4ax (4) x2 = –4ay
Sol.(1) Let the point is (h, k). The equation of any normal to the parabola y2 = 4ax is y = mx – 2am – am3
passes through (h, k)
k = mk – 2am – am3
am3 + m(2a – h) + k = 0 ..... (1)
k
m1, m2, m3 are roots of the equation then m1.m2.m3 = –
a
k
but m1m2 = 2, m3 = –
2a
m3 is root of (1)

3
æ k ö k
aç- ÷ – (2a – h) + k = 0 Þ k2 = 4ah
è 2a ø 2a

Thus locus is y2 = 4ax

15. PAIR OF TANGENTS :

If the point (x1, y1) is outside the parabola, then two tangents can
be drawn. The equation of pair of tangents drawn to the parabola
y2 = 4ax is given by SS1 = T2
i.e. (y2 – 4ax) (y12 – 4ax1) = [yy1 – 2a(x + x1)]2

16. LOCUS OF POINT OF INTERSECTION OF TANGENTS :

The locus of point of intersection of tangent to the parabola y2 = 4ax which are having an angle q between
them is given by y2 – 4ax = (a + x)2 tan2 q
Note :
(i) If q = 0° or p then locus is (y2 – 4ax) = 0 which is the given parabola
(ii) If q = 90°, then locus is x + a = 0 which is the directrix of the parabola
Ex.33 The equation of pair of tangents drawn from (1, 4) to the parabola y2 = 12x is-
(1) 3x2 + y2 – 10x + 4y – 3 = 0 (2) 3x2 + y2 – 10x + 4xy + 4y – 3 = 0
(3) 3x2 + y2 + 10x – 4xy – 4y + 3 = 0 (4) x2 + 3y2 + 10x + 4xy – 4y – 3 = 0
Sol.(3) From formula SS1 = T2
(y2 – 12x).4 = (4y – 6x – 6)2
Þ 3x2 + y2 + 10x – 4xy – 4y + 3 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 125
Ex.34 Find the locus of perpendicular tangents of the parabola x2 – 4x + 2y + 3 = 0
Sol. The given equation of parabola can be written as
x2 – 4x + 4 – 4 + 2y + 3 = 0
Þ (x – 2)2 + 2y – 1 = 0 Þ (x – 2)2 = –2(y – 1/2)
Þ 4a = 2 Þ a = 1/2
Directrix Þ y – 1/2 = 1/2 Þ y = 1
is the equation of locus.

17. CHORD OF CONTACT :

The equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point (x1, y1) to the parabola y2 = 4ax is
yy1 = 2a(x + x1)

This equation is same as equation of the tangents at the point (x1, y1)
Note :
(i) The chord of contact joining the point of contact of two perpendicular tangents always passes through
focus.
1
(ii) Length of the chord of contact is (y12 - 4ax1 ) (y12 + 4a2 )
a
1
( y 2 - 4ax1 )
3/ 2
(iii) Area of triangle formed by tangents drawn from (x1, y1) and their chord of contact is
2a 1
Ex.35 The chord of contact drawn from (2, 4) to the parabola y2 = 4x is-
(1) 2y = x – 2 (2) y = 2x + 2 (3) y = 2x – 1 (4) 2y = x + 2
Sol.(4) Here a = 1 equation of chord of contact is yy1 = 2a(x + x1)
4y = 2(x + 2) Þ 2y = x + 2
Ex.36 The area of triangle made by the chord of contact and tangents drawn from point (4, 6) to the parabola
y2 = 8x is-

1 1
(1) (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) None of these
2 2

1
Sol.(2) Area = (y 2 – 4ax1)3/2
2a 1
Here a = 2, (x1, y1) = (4, 6)
1 (4)3 / 2
\ Area of triangle = (36 – 32)3/2 = =2
2.2 4
Ex.37 The length of chord of contact of tangents drawn from point (–2, –1) to the parabola y2 = 4x is-

(1) 2 2 (2) 3 5 (3) 8 (4) None of these

Sol.(2) Here a = 1, (x1, y1) (–2, –1)
Hence length of chord of contact

1
= (y12 - 4ax1 ) (y12 + 4a2 ) = (1 + 4) (1 - 4.1.( -2)) = 5.9 = 3 5
a
E
126 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
18. EQUATION OF THE CHORD WITH GIVEN MIDPOINT :

The equation of the chord at the parabola y2 = 4ax bisected at the point (x1, y1) is given by
T = S1 i.e. yy1 – 2a(x + x1) = y12 – 4ax1
Ex.38 Find the equation of a chord of the parabola y2 = 6x if mid point of the chord is (–1, 1)
Sol. Here a = 3/2

3
y –2 (x – 1) = 1 – 6(–1)
2

Þ y – 3x + 3 = 7 Þ y – 3x = 4
19. GEOMETRICAL PROPERTIES OF THE PARABOLA :

(i) The sub tangent at any point on the parabola is twice the abscissa or proportional to square of the
ordinate of the point.
(ii) The sub normal is constant for all points on the parabola and is equal to its semi latus rectum 2a.
(iii) The semi latus rectum of a parabola is the H.M. between the segments of any focal chord of a parabola

[Link]
i.e. if PQR is a focal chord, then 2a =
PQ + QR

(iv) The tangents at the extremities of any focal chord of a parabola intersect at right angles and their point of
intersection lies on directrix i.e. the locus of the point of intersection of perpendicular tangents is directrix.
(v) If the tangent and normal at any point P of parabola meet the axes in T and G respectively, then
(a) ST = SG = SP
(b) Ð PSK is a right angle, where K is the point where the tangent at P meets the directrix.
(c) The tangent at P is equally inclined to the axis and the focal distance.
(vi) The locus of the point of intersection of the tangent at P and perpendicular from the focus on this tangent
is the tangent at the vertex of the parabola.
(vii) If a circle intersect a parabola in four points, then the sum of their ordinates is zero.
(viii) The area of triangle formed inside the parabola y2 = 4ax is

1
(y – y ) (y – y3) (y3 – y1) where y1, y2, y3 are ordinate of vertices of the triangle.
8a 1 2 2

(ix) If vertex and focus of a parabola are on the x-axis and at distance a and a' from origin respectively then
equation of parabola y2 = 4(a' – a) (x – a)
(x) The area of triangle formed by three points on a parabola is twice the area of the triangle formed by the
tangents at these points.
Ex.39 The latus rectum of a parabola whose focal chord is PSQ such that SP = 3 and SQ = 2 is given by-
(1) 24/5 (2) 6/5 (3) 12/5 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Since the semi-latus rectum of a parabola is the HM of segments of a focal chord

[Link] 12 24
\ Semi-latus rectum = = Þ Latus rectum =
SP + SQ 5 5

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 127
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 The focus of the parabola 4y2 + 12x – 20y + 67 = 0 is-
(1) (–7/2, 5/2) (2) (–3/4, 5/2) (3) (–17/4, 5/2) (4) (5/2, –3/4)
Sol.(3) The given equation of the parabola can be written as
y2 – 5y = –3x – 67/4 Þ (y – 5/2)2 = –3(x + 7/2)
Þ Y2 = 4aX where Y = y –5/2, X = x + 7/2 and a = –3/4
The focus of Y2 = 4aX is (X, Y) = (a, 0) = (–3/4, 0)
Þ x + 7/2 = –3/4, y – 5/2 = 0 Þ x = –17/4, y = 5/2
Therefore, required focus is (–17/4, 5/2)
Ex.2 AB is a chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax with the end A at the vertex of the given parabola. BC is drawn
perpendiculars to AB meeting the axis of the parabola at C. The projection of BC on this axis is-
(1) a (2) 2a (3) 4a (4) 8a
Sol.(3) Draw BD prependicular to the axis of the parabola. Let the y
B(x, y)
coordinates of B be (x, y) then slope of AB is given by
q
tanq = y/x q
• x
Projection of BC on the axis of the parabola is A D C

DC = BD tanq = y(y/x) = y2/x = 4ax/x = 4a

Ex.3 If the focus of a parabola is (1, 0) and its directrix is x + y = 5, then its vertex is-
(1) (0, 1) (2) (0, –1) (3) (2, 1) (4) (3, 2)
Sol.(3) Since axis is a line perpendicular to directrix, so it will be x – y = k. It also passes from focus, therefore k = 1.
So equation of axis is x – y = 1
Solving it with x + y = 5, we get
Z º (3, 2)
If vertex is (a, b), then a = 2, b = 1
Hence vertex is (2, 1)
Ex.4 The length of the chord of parabola x2 = 4ay passing through the vertex and having slope tan a is-
(1) 4a coseca cota (2) 4atana seca (3) 4a cosa cota (4) 4asin a tana
Sol.(2) Let A be the vertex and AP be a chord of x = 4ay such that slope of AP is tan a. Let the coordinates of P be
2

(2at, at2) Then,

at 2 t t
Slope of AP = = Þ tana = Þ t = 2tana
2at 2 2

Now, AP = (2at - 0)2 + (at2 - 0)2 = at 4 + t 2

= 2atana 4 + 4 tan2 a = 4atana seca

Ex.5 The vertex of parabola y2 + 6x – 2y + 13 = 0 is-

(1) (1, –1) (2) (–2, 1) (3) (3/2, 1) (4) (–7/2, 1)
Sol.(2) We have : y + 6x – 2y + 13 = 0
2

Þ y2 – 2y = – 6x – 13
Þ (y – 1)2 = – 6(x + 2)
Clearly, the vertex of this parabola is (–2, 1)

E
128 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.6 If vertex of parabola is (2, 0) and directrix is y-axis, then its focus is-
(1) (2, 0) (2) (–2, 0) (3) (–4, 0) (4) (4, 0)
Sol.(4) Since the axis of the parabola is the line which passes through vertex and perpendicular to the directrix,
therefore x-axis is the axis of the parabola.
Obviously Z º (0, 0)
a +0
Let focus of the parabola is S(a, 0). Since vertex (2, 0) is mid point of ZS, therefore =2Þa=4
2
\ Focus is (4, 0)
Ex.7 The directrix and axis of the parabola 4y2 – 6x – 4y = 5 are respectively-
(1) 8x + 11 = 0 ; y – 1 = 0 (2) 8x – 11 = 0 ; 2y –1 = 0
(3) 8x + 11 = 0 ; 2y –1 = 0 (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Here 4y2 – 4y = 6x + 5
2
æ 1ö 1
Þ 4 ç y - ÷ = 6(x + 1) Put y – = Y, x + 1 = X
è 2ø 2
3
The equation in standard from Y2 = X
2
3 3
4a = Þa =
2 8
Directrix, X + a = 0
3
Þ x+1+ = 0 Þ 8x + 11 = 0
8
1
Axis is Y = 0 Þ y – = 0 Þ 2y – 1 = 0
2
Ex.8 The coordinates of an end point of the latus rectum of the parabola (y – 1)2 = 4(x + 1) are-
(1) (0, –3) (2) (0, –1) (3) (0, 1) (4) (1, 3)
Sol.(2) Shifting the origin at (–1, 1) we have
x = X - 1ü
ý ..... (1)
y = Y + 1þ
Using (1), the given parabola becomes.
Y2 = 4x
The coordinates of the endpoints of latus rectum are
(X = 1, Y = 2) and (X = 1, Y = –2)
Using (1), the coordinates of the end point of the latus rectum are (0, 3) and (0, –1)
Ex.9 The common tangent of the parabola y2 = 8ax and the circle x2 + y2 = 2a2 is-
(1) y = x + a (2) y = x – a (3) y = x – 2a (4) y = x + 2a
2a
Sol.(4) Any tangent to parabola is y = mx +
m
2
æ 2a ö
Solving with the circle x + ç mx + ÷ = 2a2
2
è mø
B2 – 4AC = 0 gives m = ±1 otherwise
Perp. from (0, 0) = radius a 2
(2a / m)
\ = a 2 Þ m = ±1
1 + m2
Tangent y = ±x ± 2a
\ y = x + 2a is correct option
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 129
Ex.10 If the line x + my + am2 = 0 touches the parabola y2 = 4ax, then the point of contact is-

æ a -2a ö
(1) (am2, – 2am) (2) ç 2 , ÷
èm m ø

(3) (–am2, – 2am) (4) The line does not touch.

Sol.(1) Here x = – my – am 2

Putting in y2 = 4ax, we get y2 = 4a (–my – am2)

or y2 + 4amy + 4a2m2 = 0 or (y + 2am)2 = 0
Which is a perfect square, hence the line is a tangent \ y = –2am, also x = am2
the point reqd. is (am2, –2am)
Note : For condition of tangency, solve the equation of line and curve and put B2 – 4AC = 0 for the quadratic
equation obtained by the two, (the line and curve equation)
Ex.11 If a normal chord of the parabola y2 = 4ax subtend a right angle at the vertex, its slope is-
(1) ±1 (2) ± 2 (3) ± 3 (4) None of these
Sol.(2) If P(at , 2at1) be one end of the normal, the other say Q(at , 2at2)
1
2
2
2

2
then t2 = –t1 – ..... (1)
t1 y
2at1 2 P
Again slope of OP = 2
=
at1 t1
2 90° • x
2 2 O
Slope of OQ = t \ × = –1
2 t1 t2
Þ t1t2 = –4 ..... (2) Q
from (1) and (2)

4 2 2
– = –t1 – Þ + t = t1 Þ t12 = 2 Þ t1 = ± 2
t1 t1 1

Note : Slope of the normal at P is (–t1)

Ex.12 Which of the following lines, is a normal to the parabola y2 = 16x
(1) y = x – 11 cosq – 3 cos3q (2) y = x – 11 cosq – cos3q
(3) y = (x – 11) cosq + cos3q (4) y = (x – 11) cosq – cos3q
Sol.(4) Here a = 4
condition of normality c = –2am – am3 (1) and (2) are not clearly the answer as m = 1 for (3), (4) m = cosq
c = –2(4) cosq – 4cos3 q = –8cosq – (3cosq + cos3q) = –11cosq – cos3q
Hence (4) is correct
Ex.13 If the tangents at the extremities of a chord PQ of a parabola intersect at T, then the distances of the focus of
the parabola from the points P, T, Q are in-
(1) A.P. (2) G.P. (3) H.P. (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Let the equation of the parabola be y2 = 4ax and P(at12, 2at1), Q (at22, 2at2) be the extremities of the chord PQ.
The coordinates of T, the point of intersection of the tangents at P and Q are
(at1 t2 , a(t1 + t2)
Now SP = a(1 + t12)
SQ = a(1 + t22)
and ST2 = (at1t2 – a)2 + [a(t1 + t2) – 0]2 = a2(t12 + t22 + t12 t22 + 1)
= a2(1 + t12 ) (1 + t22) = [Link]
So that SP, ST, SQ are in G.P.
E
130 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.14 The slopes of the normals to the parabola y2 = 4ax intersecting at a point on the axis of the parabola at a
distance 4a from its vertex are in
(1) A.P. (2) G.P. (3) H.P. (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Equation of any normal to the parabola y = 4ax is y = mx – 2am – am
2 3

If it passes through (4a, 0), the point on the axis y = 0, at a distance 4a from the vertex = (0, 0) then
m = 0, ± 2
Therefore the slopes of the required normals are – 2 , 0, 2 ; which are in A.P..
Ex.15 Tangents are drawn to the points of intersection of the line 7y – 4x = 10 and parabola y 2 = 4x, then the point
of intersection of these tangents is-

æ7 5ö æ5 7ö æ -5 7ö æ 7 –5 ö
(1) ç , ÷ (2) ç , ÷ (3) ç , – ÷ (4) ç – , ÷
è5 2ø è2 2ø è 2 2ø è 2 2 ø
Sol.(2) Here let the point be (x1, y1)
\ chord of contact yy1 = 2(x + x1)

2x1 – y1 2
compare with the given line = =
-10 7 - 4
Þ x1 = 5/2, y1 = 7/2

æ5 7ö
\ Point reqd. ç , ÷
è2 2ø
Ex.16 The length of latus rectum of a parabola, whose focus is (2, 3) and directrix is the line x – 4y + 3 = 0 is-
7 14 7 14
(1) (2) (3) (4)
17 21 21 17

2 - 4(3) + 3 -14
Sol.(4) The length of latus rectum = 2 × perp. from focus to the directrix = 2 × =
2
(1) + (4) 2 17
14
The numerical length =
17
Ex.17 The locus of the middle point of all focal chords of the parabola y2 = 4ax is-
(1) y2 = 2a(x + a) (2) y2 = 2ax (3) y2 = 2a(x – a) (4) None of these
Sol.(3) Let the middle point be (h, k), then equation of the chord is given by
\ k2 – 4ah = yk –2a(h + a) Since it passes through (a, 0) \ k2 – 4ah = –2a(h + a)
Þ k2 = 2a(h – a)
Hence required locus is y2 = 2a(x – a) which is parabola
Ex.18 The point on y2 = 4ax nearest to the focus has its abscissa equal to-
(1) –a (2) a (3) a/2 (4) 0
Sol.(4) Let P(at , 2at) be a point on the parabola y = 4ax and S be the focus of the parabola.
2 2

Then, SP = a + at2
[Q focal distance = x + a]
Clearly, SP is least for t = 0
Hence, the abscissa of P is at2 = a × 0 = 0
Ex.19 Tangents are drawn from the point (–2, –1) to the parabola y2 = 4x. If a is the angle between these tangents
then tana equals-
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 1/3 (4) 1/2

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 131

Sol.(1) Any tangent to y2 = 4x is y = mx + 1/m

If it is drawn from (–2, –1), then –1 = –2m + 1/m
Þ 2m2 – m – 1 = 0
If m = m1, m2 then m1 + m2 = 1/2, m1m2 = –1/2

m1 - m2 (m1 + m2 )2 - 4m1 m2
\ tana = =
1 + m1m2 1 + m1m2

1/ 4 + 2
=3
1 - 1/ 2
Ex.20 If two parabolas y2 = 4x and x2 = 32y intersect in the point (16, 8) at an angle q, then q is equals-
(1) tan–1(3/5) (2) p (3) tan–1 (4/5) (4) p/2

2a 1
Sol.(1) The slope of tangent at the point (16, 8) to the parabola y2 = 4x is = and slope of tangent to the
y1 4

parabola x2 = 32y is 1.

1 - (1/ 4) 3
\ tanq = =
1 + (1/ 4) 5

Ex.21 From the point (–1, 2) tangents are drawn to parabola y2 = 4x, then the area of the triangle formed by the
chord of contact and the tangent is-

(1) 2 2 (2) 3 2 (3) 4 2 (4) 8 2

Sol.(4) Here chord of contact y(2) = 2(1) (x – 1) or y = x – 1

4
Length of the chord = 1(1 + 1) (1 + 1) = 8
12

1 2 +1 + 1
Area required = × 8 × (perpendicular from (–1, 2) to chord) = 4 × = 8 2
2 1 +1
Ex.22 If line y = 2x + k is normal to the parabola y2 = 4x at the point (t 2, 2t), then-
(1) k = –12, t = –2 (2) k = 12, t = –2 (3) k = 12, t = 2 (4) None of these
Sol.(1) Since normal to the parabola y = 4x at (t , 2t) is y + tx = 2t + t
2 2 3

comparing it with y = 2x + k, we get t = –2, k = 2t + t 3 = – 12

Ex.23 A normal is drawn to the parabola y2 = 4ax at the point (2a, –2 2 a) then the length of the normal chord, is-

(1) 4 2 a (2) 6 2 a (3) 4 3 a (4) 6 3 a

Sol.(4) Here comparing (2a, –2 2 a) with (am2, –2am) we get m = 2

Now length of normal chord
4a 4a
= 2 (1 + m )
2 3/2
= (1 + 2)3/2 = 2a3 3 = 6 3 a
m 2
Ex.24 If the distance of 2 points P and Q from the focus of a parabola y2 = 4ax are 4 and 9 respectively, then the
distance of the point of intersection of tangents at P and Q from the focus is-
(1) 8 (2) 6 (3) 5 (4) 13
Sol.(2) If S is the focus of the parabola and T is the point intersection of tangents at P and Q, then
ST2 = SP × SQ Þ ST2 = 4 × 9 Þ ST = 6

E
132 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.25 The slope of tangents drawn from a point (4, 10) to the parabola y2 = 9x are-
1 3 1 9 1 1
(1) , (2) , (3) , (4) None of these
4 4 4 4 4 3
Sol.(2) The equation of a tangent of slope m to the parabola y2 = 9x is
9
y = mx +
4m
If it passes through (4, 10), then
9
10 = 4m + Þ 16m2 – 40m + 9 = 0
4m
1 9
Þ (4m – 1) (4m – 9) = 0 Þ m = ,
4 4
Ex.26 If P, Q, R are three points on a parabola y2 = 4ax whose ordinates are in geometrical progression, then the
tangents at P and R meet on-
(1) the line through Q parallel to x-axis (2) the line through Q parallel to y-axis
(3) the line joining Q to the vertex (4) the line joining Q to the focus.
Sol.(2) Let the coordinate of P, Q, R be (at , 2ati) i = 1, 2, 3 having ordinates in G.P. So that t 1, t2, t3 are also in G.P.
1
2

i.e. t1t3 = t22. Equation of the tangents at P and R are

x + at12 x + at23
t1y = x + at12 and t3y = x + at32, which intersect at the point = Þ x = at1t3 = at22
t1 t3

Which is a line through Q parallel to Y-axis

Ex.27 M is the foot of the perpendicular from a point P on the parabola y2 = 8(x – 3) to its directrix and S is the focus
of the parabola, if SPM is an equilateral triangle, the length of each side of the triangle is-
(1) 2 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 8
Sol.(4) Since SPM is an equilateral triangle ÐSMP = 60°
Þ ÐSMZ = 30°
From triangle SZM

SZ
= sin30° Þ SM = 2SZ
SM

= 2 ×4 = 8
Hence length of each side of the triangle is 8.

Ex.28 The angle subtended by double ordinate of length 8a at the vertex of the parabola y2 = 4ax is-
(1) 45° (2) 90° (3) 60° (4) 30°
Sol.(2) Let (x1, y1) be any point on the parabola y = 4ax, then length of double ordinate
2

2y1 = 8a Þ y1 = 4a
y12 = 4ax1 Þ x1 = 4a
\ Vertices of double ordinate are P(4a, 4a) ; Q(4a, –4a)
If A is the vertex(0, 0) then
Slope of AP = 1 = m1
Slope of AQ = –1 = m2
\ m1m2 = –1 Þ ÐPAQ = 90°

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 133

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the coordinates of the focus and the vertex, the equations of the directrix and the axis, and length of
the latus rectum of the parabola.
(i) y2 = 12x (ii) y2 = 10x (iii) 3y2 = 8x
2. Find the coordinates of the focus and the vertex, the equations of the directrix and the axis, and length of
the latus rectum of the parabola :
(i) y2 = –8x (ii) y2 = – 6x (iii) 5y2 = – 16x
3. Find the equation of the parabola with vertex at the origin and focus at F(–2, 0).
4. Find the equation of the parabola with focus F(4, 0) and directrix x = –4.
5. Find the equation of the parabola with vertex at the origin and focus F(0, 5).
6. Find the equation of the parabola which is symmetric about the y-axis, and passes through the point
(2,–3).
7. Find equation of parabola having vertex (0, 0) and passing through (2, 3) and axis is along x–axis.
8. Find equation of parabola having vertex (0, 0) and passing through (5, 2) and symmetric with respect to
y–axis.
9. Find equation of the parabola whose focus is the point (2, 3) and directrix is the line x – 4y + 3 = 0.
10. Find the equation of each of the following parabolas
(a) Directrix x = 0, focus at (6, 0) (b) Vertex at (0, 4), focus at (0, 2)
(c) Focus at (–1, –2), directrix x – 2y + 3 = 0
11. If the vertex of the parabola is the point (–3, 0) and the directrix is the line x + 5 = 0, then find equation of
parabola.

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

1. (i) F(3, 0), O(0, 0), x + 3 = 0, y = 0, 12 units

æ5 ö
(ii) F ç ,0 ÷ , O(0, 0), 2x + 5 = 0, y = 0, 10 units
è2 ø

æ2 ö 8
(iii) F ç ,0 ÷ , O(0, 0), 3x + 2 = 0, y = 0, units
è3 ø 3

2. (i) F(–2, 0), O(0, 0), x = 2, y = 0, 8 units

æ -3 ö
(ii) F ç ,0 ÷ , O(0, 0), 2x –3 = 0, y = 0, 6 units
è 2 ø

æ -4 ö 16
(iii) F ç ,0 ÷ , O(0, 0), 5x –4 = 0, y = 0, units
è 5 ø 5

3. y2 = – 8x 4. y2 = 16x 5. x2 = 20y 6. 3x2 = – 4y.

7. 2y2 = 9x 8. 2x2 = 25y 9. 16x2 + y2 + 8xy – 74x – 78y + 212 = 0

10. (a) y2 = 12x – 36 (b) x2 = 32 – 8y (c) 4x2 + y2 + 4x + 32 y + 4xy + 16 = 0

11. y2 = 8 (x + 3)

E
134 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
CHECK YOUR GRASP PARABOLA EXERCISE-I
STANDARD FORM OF EQUATION OF REDUCTION TO STANDARD EQUATION
PARABOLA OF PARABOLA
1. The equation of the directrix of the parabola
12. Vertex of the parabola 9x2 – 6x + 36y + 9 = 0 is-
x2 = –8y is-
(1) x = 2 (2) y = 2 (3) y = –2 (4) x = –2 (1) (1/3, –2/9) (2) (–1/3), 1/2)

2. The equation to the parabola whose focus is (3) (–1/3, –1/2) (4) (1/3, 1/2)
(0, –3) and directrix is y = 3 is-
13. The equation of the latus rectum of the parabola
(1) x2 = –12y (2) x2 = 12y x2 + 4x + 2y = 0 is-
(3) y2 = 12x (4) y2 = –12x
(1) 3y = 2 (2) 2y + 3 = 0
3. If (0, 0) be the vertex and 3x – 4y + 2 = 0 be the
(3) 2y = 3 (4) 3y + 2 = 0
directrix of a parabola, then the length of its latus
rectum is- 14. The focus of the parabola y2 – x – 2y + 2 = 0 is-
(1) 4/5 (2) 2/5 (3) 8/5 (4) 1/5 (1) (1, 2) (2) (1/4, 0)
4. If 2x + y + l = 0 is a focal chord of the parabola (3) (3/4, 1) (4) (5/4, 1)
y2 = – 8x, then the value of l is-
15. Vertex of the parabola y2 + 2y + x = 0 lies in the
(1) –4 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) –2 quadrant-
5. The focal distance of a point(x1, y1) on the parabola
(1) Second (2) First (3) Third (4) Fourth
y2 = 12x is-
16. The equation of the axis of the parabola
(1) x1 + 3 (2) x1 + 6 (3) y1 + 6 (4) y1 + 3
x2 – 4x – 3y + 10 = 0 is-
6. The length of latus rectum of the parabola
x2 = –y is- (1) y + 2 = 0 (2) x + 2 = 0

(1) 1 (2) 1/4 (3) 4 (4) 1/2 (3) x – 2 = 0 (4) y – 2 = 0

7. The distance between the focus and the directrix 17. The vertex of the parabola x2 + 4x + 2y – 7 = 0 is-
of the parabola x2 = –8y, is- (1) (–2, 2) (2) (2, 11)
(1) 8 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 6
(3) (–2, 11) (4) (–2, 11/2)
8. The equation of directrix of the parabola x = –ay
2
18. The latus rectum of the parabola y2 – 4y – 2x – 8 =0
is-
is-
(1) x = a/4 (2) x = –a/2
(1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 1 (4) 4
(3) y = –a/2 (4) y = a/4
19. The point of intersection of the latus rectum and
9. If focus of the parabola is (3, 0) and length of latus axes of the parabola y2 + 4x + 2y – 8 = 0 is-
rectum is 8, then its vertex is-
(1) (5/4, –1) (2) (7/5, 5/2)
(1) (2, 0) (2) (1, 0) (3) (0, 0) (4) (–1, 0)
(3) (9/4, –1) (4) None of these
10. For any parabola focus is (2, 1) and directrix is
2x – 3y + 1 = 0 then equation of the latus rectum is- 20. Which of the following is not the equation of
(1) 3x + 2y + 8 = 0 (2) 2x – 3y – 1 = 0 parabola-

(3) 2x – 3y + 1 = 0 (4) 3x – 2y + 4 = 0 (1) 4x2 + 9y2 – 12xy + x + 1 = 0

11. If (a, b) is the mid point of a chord passing through (2) 4x2 – 12xy + 9y2 + 3x + 5 = 0
the vertex of the parabola y2 = 4x, then- (3) 2x2 + y2 – 4xy = 8
(1) a = 2b (2) 2a = b (3) a2 = 2b (4) 2a = b2
(4) 4x2 + 9y2 – 12xy + x + 1 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 135
PARAMATRIC EQUATION OF PARABOLA 30. Lines y = x and y = –x intersect the parabola
y2 = 4x at A and B other than the origin. The length
21. x –2 = t2, y = 2t are the parametric equations of
AB is-
the parabola-
(1) y2 = – 4x (2) y2 = 4x (1) 12 (2) 8 (3) 4 (4) 16

(3) x2 = –4y (4) y2 = 4(x – 2) 31. The length of the intercept made by the parabola
x2 – 7x + 4y + 12 = 0 on x-axis is-
t t2 (1) 4 (2) 3 (3) 1 (4) 2
22. The equations x = ,y= represents-
4 4
32. Length of the chord intercepted by the parabola
(1) An ellipse (2) A parabola y = x2 + 3x on the line x + y = 5 is-
(3) A circle (4) A hyperbola (1) 6 2 (2) 2
23. Any point on the parabola whose focus is (0, 1)
(3) 6 3 (4) None of these
and the directrix is x + 2 = 0 is given by-
(1) (t2 + 1, 2t + 1) (2) (t2 + 1, 2t – 1) 33. The straight line 2x + y – 1 = 0 meets the parabola
y2 = 4x in-
(3) (t2, 2t) (4) (t2 – 1, 2t + 1)
(1) Two real and different points
24. The value of the parameter t for the point (2, 6) on
the parabola y2 = 18x is- (2) Two imaginary points
(1) 2/3 (2) 1/3 (3) 2/9 (4) 1/9 (3) Two coincident points
EQUATION OF PARABOLA WHEN ITS (4) One real point and one point at infinity
VERTEX AND FOCUS CONDITION OF TANGENCY AND EQUATION
25. If (0, a) be the vertex and (0, 0) be the focus of a OF TANGENT
parabola then its equation will be-
34. If the line x + y – 1 = 0 touches the parabola
(1) y2 = 4a(a + x) (2) x2 = 4a(a – y)
y2 = kx, then the value of k is-
(3) x2 = 4a(a + y) (4) y2 = 4a(a – x)
(1) 2 (2) –4 (3) 4 (4) –2
26. Find the equation of the parabola having the vertex
at (0, 1) and the focus at (0, 0)- 35. The line y = mx + c may touch the parabola
y2 = 4a(x + a), if-
(1) x2 + 4y – 4 = 0 (2) x2 + 4y + 4 = 0
(1) c = am – (a/m) (2) c = a/m
(3) x2 – 4y + 4 = 0 (4) None of these
(3) c = –a/m (4) c = am + (a/m)
CHORD
36. If a tangent to the parabola 4y2 = x makes an angle
27. In the parabola y2 = 6x, the equation of the chord
of 60° with the x-axis, then its point of contact is-
through vertex and negative end of latus rectum,is-
(1) x = 2y (2) y + 2x = 0 æ 3
æ 1
,
1 ö 3ö
(1) ç ÷ (2) ç , ÷
(3) y = 2x (4) x + 2y = 0 è 48 8 3ø è 16 8 ø
28. If (2, –8) is an end of a focal chord of the parabola
y2 = 32x then the other end of the chord is- æ 1 1 ö æ 3 3ö
(3) ç ,– ÷ (4) ç , – ÷
(1) (32, 32) (2) (–2, 8) è 48 8 3ø è 16 8 ø

(3) (32, –32) (4) None of these

37. The equation of the tangent to the parabola
29. The length of the chord of the parabola y = 4x 2
y2 = 4x at the point (1, 2) is-
which passes through the vertex and makes 30°
(1) x – y + 1 = 0 (2) x + y – 1 = 0
angle with x-axis is-
(3) x + y + 1 = 0 (4) x – y – 1 = 0
(1) 3 /2 (2) 3/2 (3) 8 3 (4) 3

E
136 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
38. The point where the line x + y = 1 touches the 47. The equations of the normal at the ends of the latus
parabola y = x – x2, is-
rectum of the parabola y2 = 4ax are given by-

æ1 1ö (1) x2 – y2 – 6ax + 9a2 = 0

(1) ç , ÷ (2) (1, 0)
è2 2ø
(2) x2 + y2 – 6ax + 9a2 = 0
(3) (0, 1) (4) (–1, –2)
(3) x2 – y2 – 6ax – 6ay + 9a2 = 0
39. For what value of k, the line 2y – x + k = 0 touches
the parabola x2 + 4y = 0 (4) None of these

(1) 2 (2) –1/2 (3) –2 (4) 1/2 48. If a normal drawn on the point (t12, 2t1) to the

40. The equation of the tangent at vertex to the parabola y2 = 4x meets again to the parabola on
parabola 4y2 + 6x = 8y + 7 is- the point (t22, 2t2) then-

(1) x = 11/6 (2) y = 2 (1) t1t2 = 1 (2) t1t2 = –1

(3) x = –11/6 (4) y = –2 (3) t1t2 = 2 (4) t1t2 = – (t12 + 2)
41. The equation of the tangent to the parabola
49. Find the equation of the normal to the curve
y = 2 + 4x – 4x2 with slope –4 is-
2y = 3 – x2 at the point (1, 1)
(1) 4x + y – 6 = 0 (2) 4x + y + 6 = 0
(1) x + y + 1 = 0 (2) x + y = 0
(3) 4x – y – 6 = 0 (4) None of these
(3) x – y + 1 = 0 (4) x – y = 0
42. The point on the curve y2 = x the tangent at which
makes an angle of 45° with x-axis will be given by- 50. The equation of the normal to the parabola
(1) (1/2, 1/2) (2) (1/2, 1/4) y2 + 12x = 0 at the upper end of is latus rectum is-

(3) (2, 4) (4) (1/4, 1/2) (1) x – y – 8 = 0 (2) x + y + 9 = 0

43. The point of contact of the line 2x – y + 2 = 0 with
(3) x – y – 9 = 0 (4) x – y + 9 = 0
the parabola y2 = 16x is-
(1) (3, 4) (2) (2, 4) 51. If the line x + y = k is a normal to the parabola
y2 = 4x, then the value of k will be-
(3) (1, 4) (4) (–2, 1)
44. The equation of tangent to the parabola x2 = y at (1) 2 (2) 1 (3) 3 (4) 4
one extremity of latus rectum in the first quadrant is-
52. The coordinates of the point where the normal to
(1) y = 4x + 1 (2) x = 4y + 1 the parabola y2 = 4 ax drawn at its point (2, 4)
(3) 4x + 4y = 1 (4) 4x – 4y = 1 meets it again are-
EQUATION OF NORMAL & PROPERTIES (1) (18, –12) (2) (–18, 12)
OF NORMAL
(3) (18, 12) (4) (–18, –12)
45. The equation of normal on point (2, 4) to the
parabola y2 = 8x is- 53. The slope of normal to the parabola x2 + 4y = 0 at
the point (2, –1) is-
(1) x + y = 6 (2) x – y + 2 = 0
(3) x + y = 2 (4) None of these (1) –1 (2) 1 (3) 3/2 (4) –3/2

46. The equation of the normal to the parabola 54. The maximum number of normals drawn from any
y2 = 16x with slope –1/4 is- interior point of a parabola is-

(1) x + 4y + 1 = 0 (2) 4x + 16y = 33 (1) 2 (2) 1

(3) 4x – 16y = 33 (4) None of these (3) 3 (4) 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 137
GENERAL PROPERTIES OF PARABOLLA 61. The equation of the chord of contact of tangents
55 If PSQ is the focal chord of the parabola y = 8x2 drawn from the point (2, 3) to the parabola
such that SP = 6. Then the length SQ is- y2 + x = 0 is-

(1) 4 (2) 6 (1) 6y –x = 2 (2) 3y + x = 2

(3) 3 (4) None of these (3) 6y + x + 2 = 0 (4) 3y – x = 2
56. The length of the subtangent to the parabola 62. Locus of the middle points of a chords of the
y2 = 16x at the point whose absicca is 4, is- parabola y2 = 4x which are drawn through the
(1) 4 (2) 2 vertex is-
(3) 8 (4) None of these (1) x2 + 4y2 = 16 (2) y2 = 2x
57. The area of triangle formed inside the parabola
(3) y2 = 8x (4) x2 = 2y
y2 = 4x and whose ordinates of vertices are 1, 2,
and 4, will be- 63. The equation of directrix of a parabola is
(1) 5/2 (2) 7/2 (3) 3/2 (4) 3/4 3x + 4y + 15 = 0 and equation of tangent at vertex
58. If normals drawn at two points of parabola is 3x + 4y – 5 = 0. Then the length of latus rectum
y2 = 4ax meet on the parabola then the product of
the ordinates of these points is- is equal to-
(1) 4a (2) 8a2 (3) 8a (4) 4a2 (1) 15 (2) 14
59. The normals drawn at the points 't1' and 't2' to the
parabola y2 = 4ax intersects at the parabola, then (3) 13 (4) 16
t1t2 equls-
64. For the parabola y2 + 8x – 12y + 20 = 0 which of
(1) 1 (2) –1 (3) 0 (4) 2
the following is not correct-
60. If m1 and m2 are slopes of the two tangents that
are drawn from (2, 3) to the parabola y2 = 4x then (1) vertex (2, 6)

1 1 (2) focus (0, 6)

value of + =
m1 m2 (3) length of the latus rectum = 4
2 3
(1) –3 (2) 3 (3) (4) (4) axis is y = 6
3 2

Answ er-Key Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 2 1 3 2 1 1 3 4 2 2
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 4 1 3 4 4 3 4 2 1 3
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 4 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 3 2
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 3 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 2 1
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. 1 4 3 4 1 2 1 4 4 4
Que. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. 3 1 2 3 3 3 4 2 4 2
Que. 61 62 63 64
Ans. 3 2 4 3

E
138 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE QUESTIONS EXERCISE-II
1. y + x = 0 & y – x = 0 are tangents at the vertex & 5. Len gth of latus rectum of t he parabola
axis of a parabola respectively and y = 2x + 3 is a 169[(x – 1)2 + (y – 1)2] = (5x – 12y + 20)2 is-
tangent to the same parabola, the coordinate of
6. The line x + 2y = 36 is normal to the parabola
whose focus is (a, b), then 6(a + b) is equal to
x2 = 12y at the point whose distance from the focus
2. If the focus of the parabola (y – l)2 = 4(x – l) always
of parabola is-
lies between the lines 2x + y = 1 and 2x + y = 3
then the sum of all integral values of l is - 7. If one of three normals drawn from point P(8, – 2)

3. If line 2y – 4x – 3 = 0 is tangent to y2 = 8ax {a > 0}, to parabola y2 = 4ax (0 < a < 3) passes through

then length of latus rectum, is (3a,0), then length of latus rectum of parabola, is

4. If normal at point (h, k) on parabola y2 = 8x meets

parabola again at point (18, 12), then sum of all
possible value of h, is -

ANSWER KEY Exercise-II

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ans. 4 0 12 10 2 15 8
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 139

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS PARABOLA EXERCISE-III

1. The length of the latus rectum of the parabola 9. The point of intersection of the tangents at the ends
x2 – 4x – 8y + 12 = 0 is- [AIEEE-2002] of the latus retum of the parabola y2 = 4x is-
(1) 4 (2) 6 [IIT-1994]
(3) 8 (4) 10 (1) (–1, 0) (2) (1, 0)
2. The equation of tangents to the parabola y2 = 4ax (3) (0, 1) (4) None of these
at the ends of its latus rectum is- [AIEEE-2002]
10. Consider a circle with centre lying on the focus of
(1) x – y + a = 0 (2) x + y + a = 0
(3) x + y – a = 0 (4) both (1) and (2) the parabola y2 = 2px such that it touches the
directrix of the parabola. Then a point of
3. The normal at the point (bt12, 2bt1) on a parabola
meets the parabola again in the point (bt22, 2bt2), intersection of the circle and the parabola is-
then- [AIEEE-2003] [IIT-1995]

(1) (p/2, p) (2) (–p/2, p)

2 2
(1) t2 = t1 + (2) t2 = –t1 – (3) (–p/2, –p) (4) None of these
t1 t1
11. The curve described paramet rically by
2 2 x = t2 + t + 1, y = t2 – t + 1 represents-
(3) t2 = –t1 + (4) t2 = t1 –
t1 t1 [IIT-1991,1999]

4. If a ¹ 0 and the line 2bx + 3cy + 4d = 0 passes (1) a pair of straight line (2) an ellipse
through the points of intersection of the parabolas (3) a parabola (4) a hyperbola
y2 = 4ax and x2 = 4ay, then- [AIEEE-2004]
12. If x + y = k is normal to y2 = 12x, then k is-
(1) d + (2b + 3c) = 0
2 2
[IIT-2000]
(2) d2 + (3b + 2c)2 = 0
(1) 3 (2) 9
(3) d2 + (2b – 3c)2 = 0
(3) –9 (4) –3
(4) d2 + (3b – 2c)2 = 0
5. The locus of the vertices of the family of parabolas 13. If the line x – 1 = 0 is the directrix of the parabola
y2 – kx + 8 = 0, then one of the value of k is-
a3 x2 a2 x
y= + – 2a is- [AIEEE-2006]
[IIT-2000]
3 2
(1) 1/8 (2) 8
3 35
(1) xy = (2) xy = (3) 4 (4) 1/4
4 16
14. Above x-axis, the equation of the common tangents
64 105
(3) xy = (4) xy = to the circle (x – 3)2 + y2 = 9 and parabola y2 = 4x
105 64
is- [IIT-2001]
6. The equation of a tangent to the parabola y2 = 8x
is y = x + 2. The point on this line from which the (1) 3 y = 3x + 1 (2) 3 y = – (x + 3)
other tangent to the parabola is perpendicular to
the given tangents is- [AIEEE-2007] (3) 3y=x+3 (4) 3 y = – (3x + 1)
(1) (–1, 1) (2) (0, 2) 15. The equation of the directrix of the parabola
(3) (2, 4) (4) (–2, 0) y2 + 4y + 4x + 2 = 0 is- [IIT-2001]
7. A parabola has the origin as its focus and the line (1) x = –1 (2) x = 1
x = 2 as the directrix. Then the vertex of the
parabola is at- [AIEEE-2008] 3 3
(3) x = – (4) x =
(1) (0, 2) (2) (1, 0) 2 2
(3) (0, 1) (4) (2, 0
16. The locus of the mid-point of the line segment
8. If two tangents drawn from a point P to the parabola joining the focus to a moving point on the parabola
y2 = 4x are at right angles then the locus of P is :-
y2 = 4ax is another parabola with directrix-
[AIEEE-2010]
[IIT-2002]
(1) x = 1 (2) 2x + 1 = 0 (1) x = –a (2) x = –a/2
(3) x = –1 (4) 2x – 1 = 0
(3) x = 0 (4) x =a/2

E
140 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
23. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the parabola
17. If focal chord of y2 = 16x touches (x – 6)2 + y2 = 2
y2 = 4ax at a point P on it meet its axis at points T
then slope of such chord is- [IIT-2003]
and N, respectively. The locus of the centroid of
the triangle PTN is a parabola whose [IIT-2009]
1
(1) 1, –1 (2) 2, – æ 2a ö
2
(1) vertex is ç ,0÷
è 3 ø
1 (2) directrix is x =0
(3) , –2 (4) 2, –2
2
2a
(3) latus rectum is
18. Angle between the tangents drawn from (1, 4) to 3
(4) focus is (a, 0)
the parabola y2 = 4x is- [IIT-2004]
24. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parabola
p p
(1) (2) y2 = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle
2 3
of radius r having AB as its diameter, then the
p p
(3) (4) slope of the line joining A and B can be-
6 4
19. A tangent at any point P(1, 7) the parabola [IIT-2010]

y = x 2 + 6, which is touching to the circle

1 1
x2 + y2 + 16x + 12y + c = 0 at point Q, then Q is- (1) – (2)
r r
[IIT-2005]
2 2
(1) (–6, –7) (2) (–10, –15) (3) (4) –
r r
(3) (–9, –7) (4) (–6, –3) 25.
2
Consider the parabola y = 8x. Let D1 be the area
20. The equation(s) of common tangent(s) to the of the triangle formed by the end points of its latus
parabola y = x2 and y = – (x – 2)2 [IIT-2006] æ1 ö
rectum and the point P ç , 2 ÷ on the parabola,
(1) y = –4(x – 1) (2) y = 0 è2 ø
(3) y = 4(x – 1) (4) y = –30x – 50 and D2 be the area of the triangle formed by
drawing tangents at P and at the end points of
21. Consider the two curves
D1
C1 : y2 = 4x the latus rectum. Then
D 2 is [IIT-2011]

C2 : x2 + y2 – 6x + 1 = 0 (1) 4 (2) 6
then- [IIT-2008] (3) 2 (4) None of these
2
26. Let (x,y) be any point on the parabola y = 4x.
(1) C1 and C2 touche each other only at one point
Let P be the point that divides the line segment
(2) C1 and C2 touch each other exactly at two points from (0,0) to (x,y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then the
(3) C1 and C2 intersect (but do not touch) at exactly locus of P is - [IIT-2011]
2 2
two points (1) x = y (2) y = 2x
(3) y2 = x (4) x2 = 2y
(4) C1 and C2 neither intersect nor touch each other
27. Let L be a normal to the parabola y2 = 4x. If L
22. Three normals drawn at P, Q and R on the parabola passes through the point (9,6), then L is given
by- [IIT-2011]
y2 = 4x intersect at (3, 0). Then- [IIT-2006]
(1) y – x + 3 =0 (2) y + 3x – 33 = 0
Column-I Column-II (3) y + x – 15 = 0 (4) y – 2x + 12 = 0
(A) Radius of circumcircle (P) 5/2 28. The chord PQ of the parabola y2 = x, where one
end P of the chord is at point (4, –2), is
of DPQR perpendicular to the axis of the parabola. Then the
(B) Area of DPQR (Q) (5/2, 0) slope of the normal at Q is :
[AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
(C) Centroid of DPQR (R) (2/3, 0)
(1) – ¼ (2) – 4
(D) Circumcentre of DPQR (S) 2 (3) ¼ (4) 4

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 141
29. The equation of the normal to the parabola, 37. Equation of a common tangent to the circle,
x2 = 8y at x = 4 is :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)] x2 + y2 – 6x = 0 and the parabola, y2 = 4x, is:
(1) x + 2y = 0 (2) x + y = 2 [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(3) x – 2y = 0 (4) x + y = 6
(1) 2 3 y = 12 x + 1 (2) 2 3 y = – x – 12
30. The area of the triangle formed by the lines joining
the vertex of the parabola, x 2 = 8y, to the (3) 3y = x + 3 (4) 3 y = 3x + 1
extremities of its latus rectum is :- 38. Axis of a parabola lies along x-axis. If its vertex and
[AIEEE-2012 (Online)] focus are at distances 2 and 4 respectively from the
(1) 4 (2) 2 origin, on the positive x-axis then which of the
(3) 1 (4) 8 following points does not lie on it ?
31. Let S be the focus of the parabola y2 = 8x and let PQ [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

be the common chord of the circle x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y = 0 (1) (4, –4) (2) (5, 2 6 )
and the given parabola. The area of the triangle
PQS is . [IIT-2012] (3) (8, 6) (4) ( 6, 4 2 )
39. Let A(4,–4) and B(9,6) be points on the parabola,
Paragraph for Question 32 and 33
y2 = 4x. Let C be chosen on the arc AOB of the
Let PQ be a focal chord of the parabolas y 2 = 4ax. parabola, where O is the origin, such that the area
The tangents to the parabola at P and Q meet at of DACB is maximum. Then, the area (in sq. units)
a point lying on the line y = 2x + a, a > 0.
of DACB, is: [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
32. If chord PQ subtends an angle q at the vertex of
3
y2 = 4ax, then tanq = [JEE (Advanced) 2013] (1) 31 (2) 32
4
2 -2 2 -2 1 1
(1) 7 (2) 7 (3) 5 (4) 5 (3) 30 (4) 31
3 3 3 3 2 4
40. If the parabolas y2=4b(x–c) and y2=8ax have a
33. Length of chord PQ is JEE (Advanced) 2013]
common normal, then which one of the following
(1) 7a (2) 5a (3) 2a (4) 3a is a valid choice for the ordered triad (a,b,c)
34. The slope of the line touching both, the parabolas [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

y2 = 4x and x2 = – 32 y is : [JEE(Main)-2014] æ1 ö
(1) (1, 1, 0) (2) ç ,2,3 ÷
è2 ø
1 3 1 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 2 8 3 æ1 ö
(3) ç ,2,0 ÷ (4) (1, 1, 3)
è2 ø
35. Let O be the vertex and Q be any point on the
parabola, x2 = 8y. If the point P divides the line 41. The length of the chord of the parabola x2 = 4y
segment OQ internally in the ratio 1 : 3, then the having equation x - 2y + 4 2 = 0 is :
locus of P is :- [JEE(Main)-2015]
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) y2 = 2x (2) x2 = 2y
(3) x2 = y (4) y2 = x (1) 2 11 (2) 3 2

36. Let P be the point on the parabola, y2 = 8x which (3) 6 3 (4) 8 2

is at a minimum distance from the cente C of the
42. If the area of the triangle whose one vertex is at
circle, x2 + (y + 6)2 = 1. Then the equation of the
the vertex of the parabola, y2 + 4(x – a2)= 0 and
circle, passing through C and having its centre at
the other two vertices are the points of intersection
P is : [JEE(Main)-2016]
of the parabola and y-a xis, is
(1) x2 + y2 – 4x + 9y + 18 = 0 250 sq. units, then a value of 'a' is :-
(2) x2 + y2 – 4x + 8y + 12 = 0 [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(3) x2 + y2 – x + 4y – 12 = 0 (1) 5 5 (2) (10)2/3

x
(4) x2 + y2 – + 2y – 24 = 0 (3) 5(21/3) (4) 5
4
E
142 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
43. The maximum area (in sq. units) of a rectangle 49. If one end of a focal chord of the parabola,
having its base on the x-axis and its other two y2 = 16x is at (1, 4), then the length of this focal
vertices on the parabola, y = 12–x2 such that the chord is [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
rectangle lies inside the parabola, is :-
(1) 25 (2) 24
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(3) 20 (4) 22
(1) 20 2 (2) 18 3 (3) 32 (4) 36
44. Let P(4, –4) and Q(9, 6) be two points on the 50. If the line ax + y = c, touches both the curves
parabola, y2= 4x and let X be any point on the arc x2 + y2 = 1 and y2 = 4 2 x, then | c | is equal to :
POQ of this parabola, where O is the vertex of this
parabola, such that the area of DPXQ is maximum. [JEE(Main)-April,2019]

Then this maximum area (in sq. units) is : (1) 1/2 (2) 2
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]

125 125 1
(1) (2) (3) 2 (4)
4 2 2
625 75 51. The tangents to the curve y = (x – 2)2 –1 at its points
(3) (4)
4 2 of intersection with the line x – y = 3, intersect at
45. The tangent to the curve y = x2 – 5x + 5, parallel the point : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
to the line 2y = 4x + 1, also passes through the
point. [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
æ 5 ö
(1) ç - , -1 ÷
æ1 7ö æ7 1ö è 2 ø
(1) ç , ÷ (2) ç , ÷
è4 2ø è2 4ø

æ 1 ö æ1 ö æ 5 ö
(3) ç - ,7 ÷ (4) ç , -7 ÷ (2) ç - ,1 ÷
è 8 ø è 8 ø è 2 ø
46. The equation of a tangent to the parabola,
x2 = 8y, which makes an angle q with the positive
æ5 ö
direction of x-axis, is : [JEE(Main)-January,2019] (3) ç , -1 ÷
è2 ø
(1) x = ycotq + 2tanq
(2) x = ycotq – 2tanq
(3) y = xtanq – 2cotq æ5 ö
(4) ç ,1 ÷
(4) y = xtanq + 2cotq è2 ø
47. The tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x at the point
where it intersects the circle x2 + y2 = 5 in the first 52. The locus of a point which divides the line segment
quadrant, passes through the point : joining the point (0,–1) and a point on the parabola,
x 2 = 4y, internally in the ratio
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]
1 : 2, is- [JEE(Main)-January,2020]
æ 1 4ö æ 1 1ö
(1) ç - , ÷ (2) ç - , ÷ (1) 9x2 – 3y = 2
è 3 3ø è 4 2ø
(2) 9x2 – 12y = 8
æ3 7ö æ1 3ö
(3) ç , ÷ (4) ç , ÷ (3) x2 – 3y = 2
è4 4ø è4 4ø
(4) 4x2 – 3y = 2
48. The area (in sq. units) of the smaller of the two circles
that touch the parabola, y2 = 4x at the point (1, 2) 53. Let a line y = mx (m > 0) intersect the parabola,
and the x-axis is :- y2 = x at a point P, other than the origin. Let the
[JEE(Main)-April,2019] tangent to it at P meet the x-axis at the point Q.
If area (DOPQ) = 4 sq. units, then m is equal to
(1) 4p(2 - 2) (2) 8p(3 - 2 2)
__________. [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

(3) 4p(3 + 2) (4) 8p(2 - 2)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 143
54. If one end of a focal chord AB of the parabola 55. If y = mx + 4 is a tangent to both the parabolas,
y2 = 4x and x2 = 2by, then b is equal to :
æ1 ö
y2 = 8x is at A ç , -2 ÷ , then the equation of the
è2 ø [JEE(Main)-January,2020]
tangent to it at B is : [JEE(Main)-January,2020] (1) 128 (2) –64 (3) –128 (4) –32
(1) 2x + y – 24 = 0
(2) x – 2y + 8 = 0
(3) 2x – y – 24 = 0
(4) x + 2y + 8 = 0

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS Answer-Key Exercise-III

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 3 4 2 1 4 4 2 3 1 1
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 3 3 4 3 1 2 1 2,3
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Ans. 2 A ® P ; B ® S ; C ® R; D ® Q 1,4 3,4 3 3 1,2,4
Que. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Ans. 2 4 4 4 4 2 1 2 2 3
Que. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Ans. 3 4 1,2,3,4 3 4 3 1 4 1 3
Que. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Ans. 2 1 3 3 2 0.50 2 3

E
144 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Important Notes

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 145
ELLIPSE
1. DEFINITION :
An ellipse is the locus of a point which moves in a plane so that
the ratio of its distance from a fixed point (called focus) and a
fixed line (called directrix) is a constant which is less than one. N P(x, y)

This ratio is called eccentricity and is denoted by e.

Directrix
For an ellipse, e < 1.
Let S be the focus, QN be the directrix and P be any point S(focus)
Q
on the ellipse.
PS
Then, by definition, = e or
PN
PS = e PN, e < 1, where PN is the length of the perpendicular from P on the directrix QN.
An Alternate Definition An ellipse is the locus of a B P
point that moves in such a way that the sum of its distances
from two fixed points (called foci) is constant. A' e A
S' S
SP + S'P = constant

2. EQUATION OF AN ELLIPSE : B'

2.1 Standard form of equation of ellipse : Let the distance between two fixed points S and S' be 2ae and let
C be the mid point of SS'. Taking CS as x-axis, C as origin let P(h, k) be the moving point Let
SP + S'P = 2a (fixed distance) then

SP + S'P = {(h - ae)2 + k 2 } + {(h + ae)2 + k 2 } = 2a

h2(1 – e2) + k2 = a2(1 – e2)

Hence Locus of P(h, k) is given by

x2 y2
x2(1 – e2) + y2 = a2 (1 – e2) Þ + =1
a2 a 2 (1 - e2 )
Let us assume that a2(1 – e2) = b2

x2 y2
\ The standard equation will be given by 2
+ 2 =1
a b
Y
B(0, b)

M'
x=-a/e

x = a/e

P(x, y) M
Axis

N L
Z' Major Axis
X' X
A'(-a,0) S' C N S A(a,0)
Minor

Z
L'
Directrix

N'
P'
Directrix
B(0, -b)

Y'

E
146 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
2.1.1 Various parameter related with standard ellipse :

b2
(i) Eccentricity : b2 = a2 (1 – e2) or e = 1-
a2

(ii) Axis : The lines AA' and BB' are called the major axis and minor axis respectively of the ellipse. The
length of major axis = AA' = 2a
The length of minor axis = BB' = 2b
(iii) Centre : The point of intersection C of the axes of the ellipse is called the centre of the ellipse. All
chords, passing through C are bisected at C.
(iv) Vertices : The end points A and A' of the major axis are known as the vertices of the ellipse
A º (a, 0) and A' º (–a, 0)
(v) Foci : If S and S' are the two foci of the ellipse and their coordinates are (ae, 0) and (–ae, 0) respectively,
then distance between foci is given by SS' = 2ae.
(vi) Focal chord : A chord of the ellipse passing through its focus is called a focal chord.
(vii) Ordinate and Double Ordinate : Let P be a point on the ellipse. From P, draw PN ^ AA' (major
axis of the ellipse) and produce PN to meet the ellipse at P'. Then PN is called an ordinate and PNP'
is called the double ordinate of the point P.
(viii) Latus Rectum : If LL' and NN' are the latus rectum of the ellipse, then these lines are ^ to the
major axis AA' passing through the foci S and S' respectively.

æ b2 ö æ - b2 ö æ b2 ö æ - b2 ö
L º ç ae, ÷, L ' º ç ae, ÷; N º ç -ae, ÷, N ' º ç -ae, ÷
è a ø è a ø è a ø è a ø

2b2
Length of latus rectum = LL' = = NN ' .
a

æa ö æa ö
By definition SP = ePM = e ç - x ÷ = a – ex and S ' P = e ç + x ÷ = a + ex.
è e ø èe ø
Thus implies that distances of any point P(x, y) lying on the ellipse from foci are : (a – ex) and
(a + ex). In other words SP + S'P = 2a
i.e., sum of distances of any point P(x, y) lying on the ellipse from foci is constant.
a
(ix) Directrices : If ZM and Z' M' are the two directrices of the ellipse and their equations are x =
e
a 2a
and x = – respectively, then the distance between directrices is given by ZZ' =
e e
(x) Auxiliary Circle : The circle drawn on major axis AA' as
diameter is known as the Auxiliary circle.
x2 y2 Q
Let the equation of the ellipse be + = 1. Then the
a 2 b2 P
equation of its auxiliary circle is x2 + y2 = a2. q
X
Let Q be a point on auxiliary circle so that QM, perpendicular A' C M A
to major axis meets the ellipse at P. The points P and Q are
called as corresponding point on the ellipse and auxiliary circle
respectively.
The angle q is known as eccentric angle of the point P on the ellipse.
It may be noted that the CQ and not CP is inclined at q with x-axis.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 147
x2 y2
2.2 Parametric form of the ellipse : Let the equation of ellipse in standard form is + =1
a2 b2
Then the equation of ellipse in the parametric form will be given by x = acosf, y = bsinf where f is the
eccentric angle whose value vary from 0 £ f < 2p. Therefore coordinate of any point P on the ellipse will be
given by (acosf, bsinf).

Ellipse x2 y 2 x2 y 2
+ =1 , a > b + =1 , b > a
a2 b2 a2 b2
Basic fundamentals

Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)

Vertices (±a, 0) (0, ±b)
Length of Major axis 2a 2b
Length of Minor axis 2b 2a
Foci (±ae, 0) (0, ±be)
Equation of directrices x = ±a/e y = ±b/e
Relation in a, b, and e b = a (1 – e )
2 2 2
a2 = b2(1 – e2)
2b2 2a 2
Length of latus rectum
a b

æ b2 ö æ a2 ö
Ends of latus rectums ç ±ae, ± ÷ ç ± , ± be ÷
è a ø è b ø

Parametric co-ordinates (acosf, bsinf) (acosf, bsinf)

Focal distance SP = a – ex1 and SP = b – ey1 and
S'P = a + ex1 S'P = b + ey1
Sum of focal distance SP + S'P = 2a 2b
Distance between foci 2ae 2be
Distance between directrices 2a/e 2b/e
Tangents at the vertices x = a, x = –a y = b, y = –b

2.3 General equation of the ellipse : The general equation of an ellipse whose focus is (h, k) and the directrix
is the line ax + by + c = 0 and the eccentricity will be e. Then let P(x1, y1) be any point on the ellipse which
moves such that SP = ePM

e2 (ax1 + by1 + c)2

Þ (x1 – h2) + (y1 – k)2 =
a 2 + b2

Hence the locus of (x1, y1) will be given by (a2 + b2) [(x – h)2 + (y – k)2] = e2 (ax + by + c)2 .
Which is the equation of second degree from which we can say that any equation of second degree represent
equation of an ellipse
Note : Condition for second degree in x and y to represent an ellipse is that if h2 – ab < 0
and D = abc + 2fgh – af 2 – by2 – ch2 ¹ 0
Ex.1 Find the equation of the ellipse having its centre at the point (2, –3), one focus at (3, –3) and one vertex at
(4, –3)
Sol. C º (2, –3), S º (3, –3) and A º (4, –3)

Now CA = (4 - 2)2 + (–3 + 3)2 = 2 \ a = 2

E
148 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
1 1
Again CS = (3 - 2)2 + (–3 + 3)2 = 1 Q ae = 1 \e= =
a 2
Let the directrix cut the major axis at Q.

AS 1
Then =e=
AQ 2

If Q º (a, b), then SA : AQ = e : 1 = 1 : 2

æ a+ 6 b-6 ö
\ Aºç , = (4, –3)
è 3 3 ÷ø

a +6 b-6
Þ = 4, = –3 \ a = 6, b = –3
3 3
Slope of CA = 0, therefore directrix will be parallel to y-axis.
Since directrix is parallel to y-axis and it passes through Q(6, –3)
\ equation of the directrix is x = 6

1 PS (x - 3)2 + (y + 3)2 1 (x - 3)2 + (y + 3)2

Let P(x, y) be any point on the ellipse, then e = = = \ =
2 PN x-6 4 (x - 6)2
12
or (x – 6)2 = 4[(x – 3)2 + (y + 3)2]
or x2 – 12x + 36 = 4 [x2 – 6x + 9 + y2 + 6y + 9]
or 3x2 + 4y2 – 12x + 24y + 36 = 0
Ex.2 Find the centre the length of the axes eccentricity and the foci of the ellipse 12x2 + 4y2 + 24x – 16y + 25= 0
Sol. The given equation can be written in the form 12(x + 1)2 + 4(y – 2)2 = 3

(x + 1)2 (y - 2)2
Þ + =1 ..... (1)
1/ 4 3/4
Co-ordinates of centre of the ellipse are given by x + 1 = 0 and y – 2 = 0
Hence centre of the ellipse is (–1, 2)
If a and b be the lengths of the semi major and semi-minor axes, then b2 = 3/4, a2 = 1/4

\ Length of major axis = 2b = 3

Length of minor axis = 2a = 1
3 1
\ b= , a=
2 2
Since a2 = b2 (1 – e2) \ 1/4 = 3/4 (1 – e2)

3 2 1
Þ e= 2/ 3 \ be = × =
2 3 2
Coordinates of foci are given by x + 1 = 0, y – 2 = ± be
æ 1 ö
Thus foci are ç –1, 2 ± ÷
è 2ø
Ex.3 Find the equation of an ellipse whose focus is (–1, 1) eccentricity
is 1/2 and the directrix x – y + 3 = 0 M P(x, y)
x–y+3=0

Sol. Let P(x, y) be any point on the ellipse

whose focus is S(–1, 1) and the directrix is x – y + 3 = 0
S(–1, 1)
PM perpendicular from P(x, y) on the directrix x – y + 3 = 0
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 149
Then by definition SP = ePM

2
1 ìx - y +3ü
Þ (SP) = e (PM)
2 2 2
Þ (x + 1) + (y – 1) =
2 2
í ý
4 î 2 þ

Þ 8(x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y + 2) = x2 + y2 + 9 – 2xy + 6x – 6y Þ 7x2 + 7y2 + 2xy + 10x – 10y + 7 = 0

which is the required equation of the ellipse
Ex.4 The foci of an ellipse are (±2, 0) and its eccentricity is 1/2, find its equation.

x2 y2
Sol. Let the equation of the ellipse be + = 1, Then coordinates of foci are (±ae, 0).
a2 b2

1 é 1ù
\ ae = 2 Þ a × =2 êQ e = 2 ú
2 ë û
Þ a=4

æ 1ö
We have b2 = a2 (1 – e2) \ b2 = 16 ç 1 - ÷ = 12
è 4ø

x2 y2
Thus, the equation of the ellipse is + =1
16 12
3. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT TO AN ELLIPSE :

x2 y2
Let P(x1, y1) be any point and let 2 + = 1 is the equation of an ellipse.
a b2
x12 y12
The point lies outside, on or inside the ellipse as if S1 = 2 + 2 – 1 > 0, = 0, < 0
a b
Ex.5 Find the position of the point (4, –3) relative to the ellipse 5x2 + 7y2 = 140.
Sol. 5(4)2 + 7(–3)2 – 140 = 80 + 63 – 140 = 3 > 0 so the point (4, –3) lies outside the ellipse 5x 2 + 7y2 = 140.

4. ELLIPSE AND A LINE :

x2 y2
Let the ellipse be + = 1 and the given line be y = mx + c.
a2 b2
Solving the line and ellipse whose

x2 (mx + c)2
+ =1
a2 b2
i.e. (a2m2 + b2)x2 + 2mca2 x + a2(c2 – b2) = 0
above equation being a quadratic in x.
\ discriminant = 4m2c2a4 – 4a2(a2m2 + b2) (c2 – b2) = –b2{c2 – (a2m2 + b2)} = b2{(a2m2 + b2) – c2}
Hence the line intersects the ellipse in 2 distinct points if a2m2 + b2 > c2, in one point if c2 = a2m2 + b2, and
does not intersect if a2m2 + b2 < c2.

\ y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 + b2 ) touches the ellipse and condition for tangency c2 = a2 m2 + b2

x2 y2 æ ± a2 m m b2 ö
Hence y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 + b2 ) , touches the ellipse + = 1 at ç 2 2 2, 2 2 2÷
a2 b2 çè a m + b a m + b ÷ø
Note-1 : xcos a + ysina = p is a tangent if p2 = a2 cos2 a + b2 sin2a.
Note-2 : lx + my + n = 0 is a tangent if n2 = a2l2 + b2m2

E
150 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
5. EQUATION OF TANGENT IN DIFFERENT FORMS :
x2 y2
(i) Point Form : The equation of the tangent to the ellipse + = 1.
a 2 b2
xx1 yy1
at the point (x1, y1) is + 2 =1
a2 b
x2 y 2
(ii) Parametric Form : The equation of the tangent to the ellipse + = 1 at the point
a 2 b2
x y
(acosq, bsin q) is cos q + sin q = 1.
a b

x2 y 2
(iii) Slope Form: The equation of tangent to the ellipse + = 1 in terms of slope 'm' is
a 2 b2

y = mx ± a 2 m2 + b2

æ a2 m b2 ö
ç
The coordinates of the points of contact are ç ± , m ÷÷
è a2 m2 + b2 a2 m 2 + b 2 ø
Number of Tangent Drawn From a Point : Two tangents can be drawn from a point to an ellipse.
The two tangents are real and distinct or coincident or imaginary according as the given point lies outside
on or inside the ellipse.
Ex.6 For what value of l does the line y = x + l touches the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144.

x2 y2
Sol. Q Equation fo ellipse is 9x2 + 16y2 = 144 or + =1
16 9

x2 y2
Comparing this with + =1
a2 b2
then we get a2 = 16 and b2 = 9
and comparing the line y = x + l with y = mx + c
\ m = 1 and c = l
If the lin y = x + l touches the ellipse 9x2 + 16y2 = 144, then c2 = a2m2 + b2
Þ l2 = 16 × 12 + 9 Þ l2 = 25 \ l = ±5
Ex.7 Find the equation of the tangents to the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 which are perpendicular to the line y + 2x= 4.
Sol. Let m be the slope of the tangent, since the tangent is perpendicular to the line y + 2x = 4

1 x2 y2
\ m × –2 = –1 Þ m = . Since 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 or + =1
2 4 3

x2 y2
Comparing this with + =1
a2 b2
\ a2 = 4 and b2 = 3

1 1
So the equation fo the tangents are y = x± 4x +3
2 4

1
Þ y= x±2 or x – 2y ± 4 = 0
2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 151
Ex.8 Find the equation of the tangents to the ellipse x2 + 16y2 = 16 each one of which makes an angle of 60° with
the x-axis

x2 y2
Sol. We have, x2 + 16y2 = 16 Þ + =1 (0,b) B b2
42 12 P ae, a

A'(–a,0) S A(a, 0)
x2 y2
comparing this equation 2 + 2 = 1 where a2 = 16 and b2 = 1 B'(0, –b)
4 1

Slope of tangent m = 3

So, the equations of the tangents are

y = mx ± a 2 m2 + b2 i.e. y = 3x± 48 + 1 Þ y = 3x±7

6. EQUATION OF NORMAL IN DIFFERENT FORMS :

2 2
(i) Point Form : The equation of the normal to the ellipse x + y = 1 at the point (x1, y1) is
a 2 b2

a2 x b2 y
- = a 2 - b2
x1 y1

x2 y 2
(ii) Parametric Form : The equation of the normal to the ellipse + =1
a 2 b2
at the point (acos q, bsin q) is ax secq – by cosec q = a2 – b2.

or ax by
- = a 2 - b2
cos q sin q
2 2
(iii) Slope Form : The equation of normal to the ellipse x + y = 1 in terms of slope 'm' is
a 2 b2

m(a2 - b2 )
y = mx ±
a 2 + b2 m 2
Notes :

æ a2 mb2 ö
· The coordinates of the points of normal are çç ± 2 , ± ÷÷
è a + b2 m 2 a 2 + b2 m 2 ø

x2 y 2 m2 (a2 - b2 )2
· Condition for normality : The line y = mx + c is normal to the ellipse + = 1 if c 2
=
a 2 b2 (a2 + b2 m2 )

· Number of Normals : In general, four normals can be drawn to an ellipse from a point in its plane
i.e., there are four points on the ellipse, the normals at which it will pass through a given point. These
four points are called the co-normal points.

x2 y2
Ex.9 Find the condition that the line lx + my = n may be a normal to the ellipse 2
+ 2 =1
a b
ax by
Sol. Equation of normal to the given ellipse at (acosq, bsinq) is – =a2 – b2 ..... (1)
cos q sin q

E
152 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
If the line lx + my = n is also normal to the ellipse then there must be a value of q for which line (1) and line
lx + my = n are identical For that value of q we have

1 m n l an
= = 2 2 or cosq = ..... (2)
æ a ö æ b ö
–ç (a -b ) a l.(a2 - b2 )
ç cos q ÷ ÷
è ø è sin q ø

-bn
and sinq = ..... (3)
m.(a2 - b2 )
Squaring and adding (2) and (3), we get

n2 æ a 2 b2 ö
1= 2 2 ç 2
+ 2÷
(a - b ) è l
2
m ø

which is the required condition.

7. PAIR OF TANGENTS :

x2 y2
Let P(x1, y1) be any point lies outside the ellipse + = 1, and let a pair of tangents PA, PB can be drawn
a2 b2
to it from P.

x2 y2
Then the equation of pair of tangents of PA and PB is SS1 = T2 where S º + –1=0
a2 b2

x2 y2 xx1 yy1
S1 º 2
+ 2
– 1 = 0 , T º 2 + 2 –1 = 0
a b a b
Director Circle : It is the locus of points from which perpendicular tangents are drawn to the ellipse. The
equation of Director Circle of the ellipse.

x2 y 2
+ = 1 is x2 + y2 = a2 + b2.
a 2 b2

x2 y 2
The product of perpendicular from the foci on any tangent to the ellipse + = 1 is equal to b2.
a 2 b2
8. EQUATION OF CHORD WITH MID POINT (x 1, y1) :

x2 y2
The equation of the chord of the ellipse + = 1, whose mid point be (x1, y1) is T = S1
a2 b2

xx1 yy1 x12 y12

Where T º + –1, S º + –1
a2 b2 1
a2 b2
9. CHORD OF CONTACT :

x2 y 2
The equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point P(x1, y1) to the ellipse + = 1 is
a 2 b2

xx1 yy1
T = 0, where T º + 2 -1.
a2 b
A

Chord of
P(x, y)
Contact

B
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 153
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 If latus rectum of an ellipse is half of its minor axis, then its eccentricity is-
3 2 3 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 3 2 3
2b2
Sol.(3) As given =b
a

Þ 2b = a Þ 4b2 = a2 Þ 4a2(1 – e2) = a2 Þ 1 – e2 = 1/4 \ e= 3 /2

Ex.2 The conic represented by
x = 2 (cos t + sin t), y = 5 (cos t – sin t) is
(1) a circle (2) a parabola (3) an ellipse (4) a hyperbola

x y
Sol.(3) From given equations = cos t + sin t ; = cos t - sin t
2 5

x2 y2 2 2
Eliminating t from (1) and (2), we have + = 2 Þ x + y = 1 which is an ellipse.
4 25 8 50
Ex.3 The equation of the ellipse which passes through origin and has its foci at the points (1, 0) and (3, 0) is-
(1) 3x2 + 4y2 = x (2) 3x2 + y2 = 12x (3) x2 + 4y2 = 12x (4) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12x
Sol.(4) Centre being mid point of the foci is

æ 1+ 3 ö
ç 2 , 0 ÷ = (2, 0)
è ø
Distance between foci 2ae = 2
ae = 1 or a2 – b2 = 1 ..... (1)

(x - 2)2 y2
If the ellipse + = 1, then as it passes from (0, 0)
a2 b2
4
= 1 Þ a2 = 4
a2
(x - 2)2 y2
from (1) b = 3 Hence
2
+ =1
4 3
or 3x2 + 4y2 – 12x = 0
x2 y2
Ex.4 The distance of a point on the ellipse + = 1 from the centre is 2. Then eccentric angle of the point is-
6 2
p p 3p p
(1) ± (2) ±p (3) , (4) ±
2 4 4 4

Sol.(3) Any point on the ellipse is ( )

6 cos f, 2 sin f , where f is an eccentric angle.

It's distance from the center (0, 0)is given 2

6cos2f + 2sin2f = 4 or 3cos2f + sin2f = 2 or 2cos2 f = 1
1 p 3p
Þ cosf = ± ; f= ,
2 4 4
a2 x2 y2
Ex.5 If tanq1 tanq2 = – 2
, then the chord of two point q1 and q2 on the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 will subtend a right
b a b
angle at-
(1) Focus (2) Centre (3) End of the major axes (4) End of minor axes
E
154 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Sol.(2) Let P(acosq1, bsinq1) and Q(acosq2, bsinq2) be two points on the ellipse. Then
b b
m1 = Slope of OP (O is a centre) = tanq1 ; m2 = Slope of OQ = tanq2
a a
b b
\ m1m2 = tanq1 . tanq2
a a

b2 æ - a ö
2
b2 a2
= tanq tanq (Q tanq tanq = – ) = ç 2 ÷ = –1 ÐPOQ = 90°
a2 1 2 1 2
b2 a2 è b ø
Hence PQ makes a right angle at the centre of the ellipse.
x2 y 2
Ex.6 A chord PQ of the ellipse + = 1 subtends right angle at its centre. The locus of the point of intersection
9 4
of tangents drawn at P and Q is-
(1) a circle (2) a parabola (3) an ellipse (4) a hyperbola
Sol.(3) Let the point of intersection be R(x1, y1). Then PQ is the chord of contact of the ellipse with respect to R and

xx1 yy1
its equation will be + =1
9 4
Now combined equation of lines joining P, Q to centre O(0, 0) is [It is obtained making x2/9 + y2/4 = 1
2
x2 y2 æ xx1 yy1 ö
homogeneous with help of (1)] + =ç + - 1÷
9 4 è 9 4 ø

æ x12 1 ö æ y2 1 ö
As given OP ^ OQ, so coeffficient of x + coeffficient of y = 0 Þ ç 81 - 9 ÷ + ç 16 - 4 ÷ = 0
2 2
è ø è ø

x2 y 2 13
Hence locus of (x1, y1) is + = , which is an ellipse.
81 16 36

x2 y 2
Ex.7 If the chords of contact of tangents from two points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) to the ellipse + = 1 are at right
a 2 b2
x1 x 2
angles, then is equal to-
y1 y 2

a2 b2 a4 b4
(1) (2) (3) - (4) -
b2 a2 b4 a4
Sol.(3) The equation of the chords of contact of tangents drawn from (x1,y1) and (x2, y2) to the ellipse

x2 y 2 xx1 yy1
+ 2 = 1 are + 2 =1 .....(i)
a 2
b a2 b

xx 2 yy 2
+ 2 =1 ....(ii)
a2 b
It is given that (i) and (ii) are at right angles.

- b 2 x1 - b 2 x 2 x1 x2 a4
\ x = - 1 Þ = -
a 2 y1 a 2 y 2 y1 y 2 b4

x2 y 2
Ex.8 If a, b are eccentric angles of end points of a focal chord of the ellipse + = 1 , then tan a/2. tan b/2 is
a 2 b2
equal to-

e -1 1-e e +1
(1) (2) (3) (4) None of these
e +1 1+ e e -1

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 155

x a+b y a +b a -b
Sol.(1) Equation of line joining points ‘a’ and ‘b’ is cos + sin = cos
a 2 b 2 2

If it is a focal chord, then it passes through focus (ae, 0), so

a-b a -b a+b
cos cos - cos
a +b a -b 2 = e 2 2 = e -1
e cos = cos Þ Þ a - b a + b e +1
2 2 a+b 1 cos + cos
cos
2 2 2
2sin a / 2 sin b / 2 e - 1 a b e -1
Þ = Þ tan tan =
2cos a / 2 cos b / 2 e + 1 2 2 e +1
x2 y2
Ex.9 P,Q,R be three points a, b, g on the ellipse + = 1. Show that the area of the triangle formed by the
a2 b2
1 1 1
tangents at P, Q, R is abtan (b – g) tan (g – a) tan (a – b)
2 2 2
x cos a y sin a x cos b y sin b
Sol. Equation of tangents at P(a), Q(b) are + = 1 and + =1
a b a b
These intersects in (x1, y1), then x1 = acos1/2(a + b)/cos1/2(a – b) ; y1 = bsin1/2 (a + b)/cos1/2(a – b)
Similarly, other points of intersections.

x2 y2
Ex.10 The eccentric angles of the extremities of latus rectum of the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1 is-
a b

æ ±ae ö æ ±ae ö æ ±b ö æ ±a ö
(1) tan–1 ç ÷ (2) tan–1 ç ÷ (3) tan–1 ç ÷ (4) tan–1 ç ÷
è b ø è a ø è ae ø è be ø
x2 y2
Sol.(3) The coordinate of any point on the ellipse + = 1 whose eccentric angle q are (acosq, bsinq). The
a2 b2
coordinate of the end point of latus rectum are
æ b2 ö b2 b æ b ö
ç ae, ± ÷ acosq = ae and bsinq = ± tanq = ± Þ 0 = tan–1 ç ± ÷
è a ø a ae è ae ø

x2 y2
Ex.11 The line x = at2 meets the ellipse + = 1 in the real points if-
a2 b2

(1) |t| < 2 (2) |t| £ 1 (3) |t| > 1 (4) None of these
Sol.(2) Putting x =at in the equation of the ellipse, we get
2

a 2 t2 y2
2 + 2 = 1 Þ y2 = b2(1 – t4) Þ y2 = b2 (1 – t2) (1 + t2)
a b
This will give real values of y if (1 – t 2) ³ 0 Þ |t| £ 1

E
156 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the (i) lengths of major and minor axes, (ii) coordinates of the vertices, (iii) coordinates of the foci,
(iv) eccentricity, and (v) length of the latus rectum of each of the following ellipses.

x2 y2 x2 y 2
(a) + =1 (b) + = 1 (c) 16x2 + 25y2 = 400
25 9 49 36

x2 y 2 x2 y2
(d) + =1 (e) + =1
4 25 9 16

2. Find the equation of the ellipse whose vertices are at (±6, 0) and foci at (±4, 0).
3. Find the equation of the ellipse the ends of whose major and minor axes are (±4, 0) and (0, ±3) respectively.

1
4. Find the equation of the ellipse whose foci are (±2, 0) and the eccentricity is .
2

1
5. Find the equation of the ellipse whose foci are at (±1, 0) and e = .
2

6. Find the equation of the ellipse, whose length of the major axis is 20 and foci are (0, +5).

7. Find the equation of the ellipse, with major axis along the x–axis and passing through the points (4,
3) and (–1, 4).
8. Find equation of ellipse, if length of major axis 26 and foci (+5, 0).
9. Find equation of ellipse, if length of minor axis 16 and foci (0, +6).
10. Find equation of ellipse, if centre is at (0, 0), major axis on the y-axis and passes through the points
(3, 2) and (1,6).
11. Find equation of ellipse, if major axis on the x-axis and passes through the points (4, 3) and (6, 2).
12. If the latus rectum of an ellipse is equal to half of minor axis, then find its eccentricity.

5
13. If the eccentricity of an ellipse is and the distance between its foci is 10, then find latus rectum of
8
the ellipse.

2
14. Find the equation of ellipse whose eccentricity is latus rectum is 5 and the centre is (0, 0).
3

2
15. Find the equation of the set of all points whose distance from (0, 4) are of their distance from the
3

line y = 9.
16. Find equation of the ellipse whose focus is (1, –1), the directrix the line x – y – 3 = 0 and eccentricity

1
is .
2

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 157

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

4
1. (a) (i) 10 units, 6 units (ii) A(–5, 0) and B(5, 0) (iii) F1(–4, 0) and F2(4, 0) (iv) e = (v) 3.6 units
5

13 72
(b) (i) 14 units, 12 units (ii) A(–7, 0) and B(7, 0) (iii) F1(– 13 , 0) and F2( 13 , 0) (iv) e = (v) units
7 7

3 32
(c) (i) 10 units, 8 units (ii) A(–5, 0) and B(5, 0) (iii) F1(–3, 0) and F2(3, 0) (iv) e = (v) units
5 5

21 8
(d) (i) 10 units, 4 units (ii) A(0, –5) and B(0, 5) (iii) F1(0, – 21 ) and F2(0, 21 ) (iv) e = (v) units
5 5

7 9
(e) (i) 8 units, 6 units (ii) A(0, –4) and B(0, 4) (iii) F1(0, – 7 ) and F2(0, 7 ) (iv) e = (v) units
4 2

x2 y2 x2 y2
2. + =1 3. + =1
36 20 16 9

x2 y2 x2 y 2
4. + =1 5. + =1
16 12 4 3

x2 y2
6. + =1 7. 7x2 + 15y2 = 247.
75 100

x2 y2 x2 y2
8. + =1 9. + =1
169 144 64 100

x2 y 2 x2 y 2
10. + =1 11. + =1
10 40 52 13

3 39
12. 13.
2 4

x2 y 2 1
14. + = 15. 9x2 + 5y2 = 180
81 45 4

16. 7x2 + 2xy + 7y2 – 10x + 10y + 7 = 0

E
158 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
CHECK YOUR GRASP ELLIPSE EXERCISE-I
EQUATION OF ELLIPSE & VARIOUS x2 y2
PARAMETER OF THE ELLIPSE 10. If S and S' are two foci of an ellipse 2 + =1
a b2
1. The eccentricity of the ellipse 9x2 + 5y2 – 30 y = 0 (a < b) and P(x1, y1) a point on it, then SP + S'P is
is- equal to-
(1) 1/3 (2) 2/3 (1) 2a (2) 2b (3) a + ex1 (4) b + ey1
(3) 3/4 (4) None of these EQUATION OF TANGENT &
2. If distance between the directrices be thrice the EQUATION OF NORMAL
distance between the foci, then eccentricity of ellipse 11. The position of the point (4, –3) with respect to the
is- ellipse 2x2 + 5y2 = 20 is-
(1) outside the ellipse (2) on the ellipse
(1) 1/2 (2) 2/3 (3) 1/ 3 (4) 4/5
(3) on the major axis (4) None of these
3. The equation ax + 2hxy + by + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
2 2

represents an ellipse if- x y x2 y2

12. If + = 2 touches the ellipse 2 + 2 = 1,
(1) D = 0, h2 < ab (2) D ¹ 0, h2 < ab a b a b
(3) D ¹ 0, h > ab
2
(4) D ¹ 0, h2 = ab then its eccentric angle q is equal to-
4. Equation of the ellipse whose focus is (6, 7) directrix (1) 0 (2) 90° (3) 45° (4) 60°

is x + y + 2 = 0 and e = 1/ 3 is- x2 y2
13. If any tangent to the ellipse + = 1
(1) 5x2 + 2xy + 5y2 – 76x – 88y + 506 = 0 a2 b2
(2) 5x2 – 2xy + 5y2 – 76x – 88y + 506 = 0 intercepts lengths h and k on the axes then-
(3) 5x2 – 2xy + 5y2 + 76x – 88y + 506 = 0
h2 k2 h2 k2
(4) None of these (1) + =1 (2) + =2
a2 b2 a2 b2
5. The parametric representation of a point on the
ellipse whose foci are (–1, 0) and (7, 0) and a2 b2 a2 b2
(3) + = 1 (4) + =2
eccentricity 1/2 is- h2 k2 h2 k2
14. The equation of the tangent at the point (1/4, 1/4)
(1) (3 + 8cosq, 4 3 cosq)
x2 y2
(2)(3+ 8cosq, 4 3 sinq) of the ellipse + = 1, is-
4 12
(1) 3x + y = 48 (2) 3x + y = 3
(3) (3 + 4 3 cosq, 8sinq)
(4) None of these (3) 3x + y = 16 (4) None of these
6. The equation of the ellipse whose centre is at origin 15. An ellipse passes through the point (4, –1) and
and which passes through the points (–3, 1) and (2, touches the line x + 4y – 10 = 0. If its axes coincide
–2) is (a > b) - with co-ordinate axes, then its equation is (a > b)-
(1) 5x2 + 3y2 = 32 (2) 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 x2 y2 x2 y2
(1) + =1 (2) + =1
(3) 5x – 3y = 32
2 2
(4) 3x2 + 5y2 + 32 = 0 16 15 80 5
7. Latus rectum of ellipse 4x2 + 9y2 – 8x –36y + 4 =0
x2 y2 x2 y2
is- (3) + =1 (4) + =1
20 5 5 16
5 16. The line xcosa + ysina = p will be a tangent to the
(1) 8/3 (2) 4/3 (3) (4) 16/3
3
x2 y2
8. The latus rectum of an ellipse is 10 and the minor conic 2 + = 1, if-
axis is equal to the distance between the foci. The a b2
equation of the ellipse is- (1) p2 = a2 sin2a + b2 cos2a
(2) p2 = a2 + b2
(1) x2 + 2y2 = 100 (2) x2 + 2 y2 = 10 (3) p2 = b2sin2a + a2cos2a
(3) x2 – 2y2 = 100 (4) None of these (4) None of these
x2 y2
9. The length of the latus rectum of the ellipse 17. If y = mx + c is tangent on the ellipse + =1,
9 4
then the value of c is-
x2 y2
+ = 1 is- (1) 0 (2) 3/m
36 49
(1) 98/6 (2) 72/7 (3) 72/14 (4) 98/12 (3) ± 9m 2 + 4 (4) ±3 1 + m2
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 159
MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTY OF THE ELLIPSE 24. The eccentricity of an ellipse is 2/3, latus rectum is
5 and centre is (0, 0). Then equation of the ellipse
18. The equation of the chord of the ellipse 2x2 + 5y2 = is (a > b) -
20 which is bisected at the point (2, 1) is-
x2 y2 4x2 4y2
(1) 4x + 5y + 13 = 0 (2) 4x + 5y = 13 (1) + =1 (2) + =1
81 45 81 45
(3) 5x + 4y + 13 = 0 (4) None of these x2 y2 x2 y2
19. The angle between the pair of tangents drawn to (3) + =1 (4) + =5
9 5 81 45
the ellipse 3x2 + 2y2 = 5 from the point (1, 2) is- 25. The equation of the ellipse whose one of the vertices
is (0, 7) and the corresponding directrix is y = 12,
æ 12 ö is-
(1) tan–1 ç ÷ (2) tan–1 (6 5 )
è 5 ø (1) 95x2 + 144y2 = 4655
(2) 144x2 + 95y2 =4655
æ 12 ö (3) 95x2 + 144y2 = 13680
(3) tan–1 ç ÷ (4) tan–1 (12 5 )
è 5 ø (4) None of these
26. The foci of the ellipse 25(x + 1)2 + 9(y + 2)2 = 225,
20. If the normal at one end of the latus rectum of an are at-
(1) (–1, 2) and (–1, –6) (2) (–2, 1) and (–2, 6)
x2 y2 (3) (–1, –2) and (–2, –1) (4) (–1, –2) and (–1, –6)
ellipse + = 1 passes through the one end
a2 b2 x2 y2
27. The equation + = 1 represents an
of the minor axis, then- 10 - a 4-a
(1) e4 – e2 + 1 = 0 (2) e2 – e + 1 = 0 ellipse if-
(1) a < 4 (2) a > 4
(3) e2 + e + 1 = 0 (4) e4 + e2 – 1 = 0
(3) 4 < a < 10 (4) a > 10
x2
21. If a tangent having slope of –4/3 to the ellipse 28. If the straight line y = 4x + c is a tangent to the
18
x2 y2
y2 ellipse + = 1, then c will be equal to-
+ = 1 intersects the major and minor axes in 8 4
32
points A and B respectively, then the area of the (1) ±4 (2) ±6 (3) ±1
(4) ± 132
DOAB is equal to- 29. Two perpendicular tangents drawn to the ellipse
(1) 12 sq. units (2) 48 sq. units x2 y2
(3) 64 sq. units (4) 24 sq. units + = 1 intersect on the curve-
25 16
22. The locus of the point of intersection of mutually (1) x = a/e (2) x2 + y2 = 41
x2 y2 (3) x2 + y2 = 9 (4) x2 – y2 = 41
perpendicular tangent to the ellipse 2 + = 1,
a b2 30. From the point (l, 3) tangents are drawn to
is- x2 y2
(1) A straight line (2) A parabola + = 1 and are perpendicular to each other
9 4
(3) A circle (4) None of these then l =
23. The equation of ellipse whose distance between the (1) ±1 (2) ±2 (3) ±3 (4) ±4
foci is equal to 8 and distance between the directrix 31. The number of real tangents that can be drawn to
is 18, is (a > b) - the ellipse 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 and 25x2 + 9y2 = 450
passing through (3, 5) is-
(1) 5x2 – 9y2 = 180 (2) 9x2 + 5y2 = 180
(1) 0 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
(3) x2 + 9y2 = 180 (4) 5x2 + 9y2 = 180

ANSWER KEY Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 3 3 4 3 3 3 2 3 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 4 3 4 2 2 1 1 4 2 2
Que. 31
Ans. 3
E
160 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE QUESTIONS EXERCISE-II

x 2 y2
1. Circle x2 + y2 + 8y = 9 intersects ellipse + =1 3. The length of the latus rectum of the ellipse
16 7
x 2 y2
at points A and B. Tangents and normals are drawn + = 1 is 16, then number of possible
16 b 2
to the ellipse at A & B such that tangents intersect
value(s) of b is
at P and normals intersect at Q. Then PQ is equal
4. An ellipse with focii (1,4) and (a,b) touches x-axis
to -
at (5,0). Then value of (a – b) is
2. Area of quadrilateral formed by joining focii of

x2 y2 x2 y2
ellipses + = 1 and + = 1 is -
16 12 12 16

(in sq. units)

ANSWER KEY Exercise-II

Que. 1 2 3 4
Ans. 10 8 0 5
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 161

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS ELLIPSE EXERCISE-III

1. If distance between the foci of an ellipse is equal to
x2 y2
its minor axis, then eccentricity of the ellipse is- 8. Let P be a variable point on the ellipse 2 + =1
a b2
[AIEEE-2002]
with foci F1 and F2. If A is the area of the triangle
1 1
PF1 F2 , then the maximum value of A is-
(1) e = (2) e =
2 3 [IIT-1994]

1 (1) 2 abe (2) abe

1
(3) e = (4) e =
4 6 1
(3) abe (4) None of these
2. The equation of an ellipse, whose major axis = 8 2
and eccentricity = 1/2 is (a > b)- [AIEEE-2002]
x2 y2
(1) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 (2) 3x2 + 4y2 = 48 9. Let E be the ellipse + = 1 and C be the
9 4
(3) 4x2 + 3y2 = 48 (4) 3x2 + 9y2 = 12
circle x2 + y2 = 9. Let P and Q be the points (1, 2)
3. The eccentricity of an ellipse, with its centre at the
and (2, 1) respectively. Then- [IIT-1994]
origin, is 1/2. If one of the directirices is x = 4,
(1) Q lies inside C but outside E
then the equation of the ellipse is- [AIEEE-2004]
(2) Q lies outside both C and E
(1) 3x2 + 4y2 = 1 (2) 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 (3) P lies inside both C and E
(3) 4x2 + 3y2 = 12 (4) 4x2 + 3y2 = 1 (4) P lies inside C but outside E
4. An ellipse has OB as semi minor axis, F and F' its 10. The radius of the circle passing through the foci of
focii and the angle FBF' is a right angle. Then the x2 y2
eccentricity of the ellipse is-[AIEEE-2005, IIT-1997] the ellipse + =1 and having its centre
16 9
(0, 3) is- [IIT-1996] ; [JEE(Main)-2013]
1 1
(1) (2)
2 2 (1) 4 (2) 3

1 1 7
(3) (4) (3) 12 (4)
4 3 2

5. In an ellipse, the distance between its foci is 6 and 11. If P(x, y), F1 = (3, 0), F2(–3, 0) and 16x2 + 25y2
minor axis is 8. Then its eccentricity is- [AIEEE-2006] = 400, then PF1 + PF2 equals- [IIT-1996]
(1) 8 (2) 6
1 4 (3) 10 (4) 12
(1) (2)
2 5 12. On the ellipse 4x2 + 9y2 = 1, the points at which
the tangents are parallel to 8x = 9y are- [IIT-1996]
1 3
(3) (4)
5 5 æ2 1ö æ 2 1ö æ2 1ö
(1) ç , ÷ (2) ç – , ÷ or ç , – ÷
è5 5ø è 5 5 ø è 5 5ø
6. A focus of an ellipse is at the origin. The directrix is
the line x = 4 and the eccentricity is 1/2. Then the
length of the semi-major axis is- [AIEEE-2008] æ 2 -1 ö æ –3 –2 ö
(3) ç – , ÷ (4) ç , ÷
(1) 8/3 (2) 2/3 è 5 5 ø è 5 5 ø
(3) 4/3 (4) 5/3 13. The Number of values c such that the straight line y
7. The ellipse x + 4y = 4 is inscribed in a rectangle
2 2

aligned with the coordinate axes, which in turn is x2

= 4x + c touches the curve + y2 = 1 is-
inscribed in another ellipse that passes through the 4
point (4, 0). Then the equation of the ellipse is :- [IIT-1998]
[AIEEE-2009]
(1) 0 (2) 1
(1) 4x2 + 48y2 = 48 (2) 4x2 + 64y2 = 48
(3) 2 (4) infinite
(3) x2 + 16y2 = 16 (4) x2 + 12y2 = 16
E
162 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
14. Locus of middle point of segment of tangent to Paragraph for Question 18 to 20
ellipse x + 2y = 2. Which is intercepted between
2 2 Tangents are drawn from the point P(3, 4) to the
the coordinate axes is- [IIT-2004]
x2 y2
ellipse + = 1 touching the ellipse at points
9 4
1 1 1 1
(1) + =1 (2) + =1 A andB. [IIT-2010]
2x 2 4y2 4x 2
2y 2
18. The coordinates of A and B are
(1) (3, 0) and (0, 2)
x2 y2 x2 y2
(3) + =1 (4) + =1
2 4 4 2 æ 8 2 161 ö æ 9 8ö
(2) çç - , ÷÷ and ç - , ÷
è 5 15 ø è 5 5ø
15. A tangent is drawn at some point P of the ellipse

x2 y2 æ 8 2 161 ö
+ 2 = 1 is intersecting to the coordinate (3) çç - , ÷ and (0, 2)
a2 b è 5 15 ÷ø

axes at points A and B the minimum area of the

æ 9 8ö
DOAB is- [IIT-2005] (4) (3, 0) and ç - , ÷
è 5 5ø
a 2 + b2 19. The orthocenter of the triangle PAB is
(1) ab (2)
2
æ 8ö æ 7 25 ö
(1) ç 5, ÷ (2) ç , ÷
a2 + b2 - ab è 7ø è5 8 ø
a 2 + b2
(3) (4)
4 3
æ 11 8 ö æ 8 7ö
16. The line passing through the extremity A of the (3) ç , ÷ (4) ç , ÷
è 5 5ø è 25 5 ø
major axis and extremity B of the minor axis of the
20. The equation of the locus of the point whose
ellipse x2 + 9y2 = 9 meets its auxiliary circle at the
distances from the point P and the line AB are
point M. Then the area of the triangle with vertices equal, is
at A, M and the origin O is :- [IIT-2009] (1) 9x2 + y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y + 241 = 0
(2) x2 + 9y2 + 6xy – 54x + 62y – 241 = 0
31 29
(1) (2) (3) 9x2 + 9y2 – 6xy – 54x – 62y – 241 = 0
10 10 2 2
(4) x + y – 2xy + 27x + 31y – 120 = 0

21 27 21. Equation of the ellipse whose axes are the axes of

(3) (4) coordinates and which passes through the point
10 10

17. The normal at a point P on the ellipse x2+4y2=16 (–3, 1) and has eccentricity 2 / 5 is :-
meets the x–axis at Q. If M is the mid point of the (1) 3x2 + 5y2 – 15 = 0 [AIEEE-2011]

line segment PQ, then the locus of M intersects the (2) 5x2 + 3y2 – 32 = 0

latus rectums of the given ellipse at the points (3) 3x2 + 5y2 – 32 = 0
[IIT-2009] (4) 5x2 + 3y2 – 48 = 0
22. An ellipse is drawn by taking a diameter of the circle
æ 3 5 2ö æ 3 5 19 ö (x – 1)2 + y2 = 1 as its semi-minor axis and a
(1) ç ± 2 , ± 7 ÷ (2) ç ± 2 ± 4 ÷
è ø è ø diameter of the circle x2 + (y – 2)2 = 4 as its semi-
major axis. If the centre of the ellipse is at the origin
and its axes are the coordinate axes, then the
æ 1ö æ 4 3ö equation of the ellipse is : [AIEEE-2012]
(3) ç ±2 3, ± ÷ (4) ç ±2 3, ± 7 ÷
è 7ø è ø (1) 4x2 + y2 = 16 (2) 4x2 + y2 = 4
(3) x2 + 4y2 = 8 (4) None of these

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 163
28. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose centre is at the
æ 3ö x2 y2
23. The normal at ç 2, ÷ to the ellipse, + =1 1
è ø 2 16 3 origin is . If o ne of its directices is
2
touches a parabola, whose equation is : x= –4, then the equation of the normal to it at
[AIEEE-2012 (Online)] æ 3ö
ç 1, ÷ is :- [JEE(Main)-2017]
(1) y2 = 26x (2) y2 = 14x è 2ø
(3) y2 = –104x (4) y2 = –14x (1) x + 2y = 4 (2) 2y – x = 2
24. If P 1 and P 2 are two points on the ellipse (3) 4x – 2y = 1 (4) 4x + 2y = 7
x2 29. If tan gent s are drawn to t he ellipse
+ y 2 = 1 at which the tangents are parallel to x2 + 2y2 = 2 at all points on the ellipse other than
4
its four vertices then the mid points of the tangents
the chord joining the points (0, 1) and (2, 0), then
intercepted betwen the coordinate axes lie on the
the distance between P1 and P2 is :-
curve : [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
[AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
x2 y2 x2 y2
(1) + =1 (2) + =1
(1) 10 (2) 2 2 2 4 4 2

(3) 5 (4) 2 3 1 1 1 1
(3) + =1 (4) + =1
2x2 4y2 4x2 2y2
x 2 x2
25. The ellipse E1 : + = 1 is inscribed in a 30. Let the length of the latus rectum of an ellipse with
9 4 its major axis along x-axis and centre at the origin,
rectangle R whose sides are parallel to the
be 8. If the distance between the foci of this ellipse
coordinate axes. Another ellipse E2 passing through
is equal to the length of its minor axis, then which
the point (0,4) circumscribes the rectangle R. The
one of the following points lies on it ?
eccentricity of the ellipse E2 is - [IIT-2012]
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(1)
2
(2)
3 (
(1) 4 3, 2 3 ) (
(2) 4 3, 2 2 )
2 2
(
(3) 4 2, 2 2 ) (
(4) 4 2, 2 3 )
1 3 31. Let S and S' be the foci of the ellipse and B be any
(3) (4) one of the extremities of its minor axis. If DS'BS is
2 4
a right angled triangle with right angle at B and area
26. The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from (DS'BS) = 8 sq. units, then the length of a latus
the centre of the ellipse x2 + 3y2 = 6 on any tangent rectum of the ellipse is :
to it is : [JEE(Main)-2014]
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2 (1) 2 2 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 4 2
(2) (x2 – y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2
32. In an ellipse, with centre at the origin, if the
(3) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 + 2y2 difference of the lengths of major axis and minor
(4) (x2 + y2)2 = 6x2 – 2y2
27. The area (in sq. units) of the quadrilateral formed (
axis is 10 and one of the foci is at 0, 5 3 , then)
by the tangents at the end points of the latera recta
the length of its latus rectum is:
x2
y 2 [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
to the ellipse + = 1 is : [JEE(Main)-2015]
9 5 (1) 10 (2) 8 (3) 5 (4) 6
33. If the tangents on the ellipse 4x + y = 8 at the
2 2

27 points (1, 2) and (a, b) are perpendicular to each

(1) (2) 27
2 other, then a2 is equal to : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]

27 64 2 128 4
(3) (4) 18 (1) (2) (3) (4)
4 17 17 17 17

E
164 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
34. If the tangent to the parabola y2 = x at a point
39. If 3x + 4y = 12 2 is a tangent to the ellipse
(a, b ), (b > 0) is also a tangent to the ellipse,
x2 + 2y2 = 1, then a is equal to : x 2 y2
+ = 1 for some a Î R, then the distance
[JEE(Main)-April,2019] a2 9
between the foci of the ellipse is :
(1) 2 2 + 1 (2) 2 -1 [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

(3) 2 +1 (4) 2 2 - 1 (1) 4 (2) 2 7

35. The tangent and nor mal to t he ellipse
(3) 2 5 (4) 2 2
3x2 + 5y2 = 32 at the point P(2, 2) meet the x-axis
at Q and R , respectively. Then th e area 40. Let the line y = mx and the ellipse 2x2 + y2 = 1
intersect at a ponit P in the first quadrant. If the
(in sq. units) of the triangle PQR is :
normal to this ellipse at P meets the co-ordinate
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]

14 16 68 34 æ 1 ö
(1) (2) (3) (4) axes at ç - ,0 ÷ and (0,b), then b is equal to
3 3 15 15 è 3 2 ø
36. If the line x – 2y = 12 is tangent to the ellipse [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

2 2
x 2 y2 æ -9 ö (1) (2)
2 2
(3) (4)
2
+ = 1 at the point ç 3, 2 ÷ , then the length 3 3 3 3
a 2 b2 è ø
41. The length of the minor axis (along y-axis) of an
of the latus recturm of the ellipse is :
4
[JEE(Main)-April,2019] ellipse in the standard form is . If this ellipse
3
(1) 9 (2) 8 3 (3) 12 2 (4) 5
touches the line, x + 6y = 8; then its eccentricity
37. An ellipse, with foci at (0, 2) and (0, –2) and minor is : [JEE(Main)-January,2020]
axis of length 4, passes through which of the
5 1 11 1 11 1 5
following points ? [JEE(Main)-April,2019] (1) (2) (3) (4)
6 2 3 3 3 2 3
(1) (1, 2 2) (2) (2, 2)
42. If the distance between the foci of an ellipse is 6
(3) (2, 2 2) (4) ( 2, 2) and the distance between its directrices is 12, then
38. If the normal to the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12 at a point the length of its latus rectum is :
[JEE(Main)-January,2020]
P on it is parallel to the line, 2x + y = 4 and the
tangent to the ellipse at P passes through Q(4, 4) 3
(1) 3 (2) 2 3 (3) 3 2 (4)
then PQ is equal to : [JEE(Main)-April,2019] 2
221 157 61 5 5
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 2 2 2

PREVIOUS YEARS QUESTIONS Answer-Key Exercise-III

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 1 2 2 1 4 1 4 2 4 1
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 3 1 1 4 3 4 3 1
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 3 1 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 2
Que. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 3 3 2 3 3 1 4 4 2 4
Que. 41 42
Ans. 2 3

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 165
HYPERBOLA
1. DEFINITION :

A hyperbola is the locus of a point which moves in a plane so that the ratio of its distances from a fixed point
(called focus) and a fixed line (called directrix) is a constant which is greater than one. This ratio is called
eccentricity and is denoted by e. For a hyperbola e > 1.
Let S be the focus, QN be the directrix and P be any point on the hyperbola. Then, by definition
PS
e= or PS = e PN, e > 1,
PN
where PN is the length of the perpendicular from P on the directrix QN.
An Alternate Definition
A hyperbola is the locus of a point which moves in such a way that the difference of its distances from two
fixed points (called foci) is constant.
SP – SP' = constant

2. EQUATION OF HYPERBOLA :

2.1 Standard form of Equation of Hyperbola : Let the distance between two fixed points S and S' be 2ae
and let C be the mid point of SS'. Taking CS as x-axis, C as origin let P(h, k) be the moving point Let
SP – SP' = 2a (fixed distance) then

SP – S'P = {(h - ae)2 + k 2 } – {(h + ae)2 + k 2 } = 2a

h2(e2 – 1) – k2 = a2(e2 – 1)
Hence Locus of P(h, k) is given by

x2 y2
x2(e2 – 1) – y2 = a2 (e2 – 1) Þ 2 – =1
a a (e2 - 1)
2

Let us assume that a2(e2 –1) = b2

x2 y2
\ The standard equation will be given by – =1
a2 b2

N M' P(x, y) L
M
Axis

Rectum

X' X
A' Z' C
Conjugate

S' Z S(ae, 0)
A(a, 0)
(-a, 0)

(-ae, 0)
Latus
Directrix

x = a/e
Directrix

N' L'
x=-a/e
B'
Y'

E
166 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
2.1.1. Various parameter related with standard hyperbola :
b2
(i) Eccentricity : b2 = a2 (e2 – 1) or e = 1+
a2
(ii) Axes The lines AA' and BB' are called the transverse axis and conjugate axis respectively of the hyperbola.

The length of transverse axis = AA' = 2a

The length of conjugate axis = BB' = 2b

(iii) Centre The point of intersection C of the axes of hyperbola is called the centre of the hyperbola. All chords,
passing through C, are bisected at C.

(iv) Vertices The points A º (a, 0) and A' º (–a, 0) where the curve meets the line joining the foci S and S', are
called the vertices of the hyperbola.

(v) Foci : If S and S' are the two foci of the hyperbola and their coordinate are (ae, 0) and (–ae, 0) respectively,
then distance between foci is given by SS' = 2ae.

(vi) Focal Chord A chord of the hyperbola passing through its focus is called a focal chord.

(vii) Focal Distances of a Point The difference of the focal distances of any point on the hyperbola is constant
and equal to the length of the transverse axis of the hyperbola. If P is any point on the hyperbola, then

|S'P – SP| = 2a = Transverse axis.

(viii) Latus Rectum If LL' and NN' are the latus rectum of the hyperbola then these lines are perpendicular to the
transverse axis AA', passing through the foci S and S' respectively.

æ b2 ö æ - b2 ö
L º ç ae, ÷ L ' º ç ae, ÷
è a ø, è a ø,

æ b2 ö æ - b2 ö
N º ç -ae, ÷ N ' º ç -ae, ÷
è a ø, è a ø

2b2
Length of latus rectum = LL' = = NN'.
a
a
(ix) Directries ZM and Z' M' are the two directrices of the hyperbola and their equations are x = and
e

a 2a
x=– respectively, then the distance directrices is given by zz' =
e e
2.2. Parametric Form of the Hyperbola :

x2 y2
Since coordinates x = a sec q and y = b tan q satisfy the equation - =1
a 2 b2
for all real values of q therefore, x = a sec q, y = b tan q are the parametric equations of the hyperbola

x2 y2
- = 1 , where the parameter 0 £ q < 2p.
a 2 b2

x2 y2
Hence, the coordinates of any point on the hyperbola - = 1 may be taken as (a sec q, b tan q). This
a 2 b2
point is also called the point 'q'.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 167
Hyperbola Conjugate Hyperbola

x2 y2 - x2 y 2 x2 y2
Standard equation - =1 + = 1 or - = -1
a 2 b2 a2 b2 a 2 b2

Centre (0, 0) (0, 0)

Equation of transverse axis y=0 x=0
Equation of conjugate axis x=0 y=0
Length of transverse axis 2a 2b
Length of Conjugate axis 2b 2a
Foci (± ae, 0) (0, ± be)
Equation of directrices x = ± a/e y = ± b/e
Vertices (± a, 0) (0, ± b)

a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
Eccentricity e= e=
a2 b2

2b2 2a2
Length of latus rectum
a b

Parameter Coordinates (a sec q, b tan q) (atan q, bsec q)

Focal distance SP = ex1 – a and SP = ey1 – b and S'P = ey1 + b
S'P = ex1 + a
Difference of focal distance 2a 2b
(S'P – SP)
Tangent at the vertices x=±a y=±b

2.3 General equation of the hyperbola :

The general equation of an hyperbola whose focus is (h, k) and the directrix is the line ax + by + c = 0 and the
eccentricity will be e. Then let P(x1, y1) be any point on the hyperbola which moves such that SP = ePM
Þ (x1 – h2) + (y1 – k)2

e2 (ax1 + by1 + c)2

=
a 2 + b2

Hence the locus of (x1, y1) will be given by (a2 + b2) [(x – h)2 + (y – k)2] = e2 (ax + by + c)2 .
Which is the equation of second degree from which we can say that any equation of second degree represent
equation of an hyperbola
Note : Condition for second degree in x and y to represent an hyperbola is that if h2 – ab > 0
and D = abc + 2fgh – af 2 – by2 – ch2 ¹ 0

E
168 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.1 Find the eccentricity of the conic represented by x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0.
Sol. We have x2 – y2 – 4x + 4y + 16 = 0
Þ (x2 – 4x) – (y2 – 4y) = 16 Þ (x2 – 4x + 4) – (y2 – 4y + 4) = – 16

(x - 2)2 (y - 2)2
Þ (x – 2)2 – (y – 2)2 = –16 Þ - =1
42 42
X2 Y2
Shifting the origin at (2, 2), we obtain - = -1 , where x = X + 2, y = Y + 2
42 42
This is rectangular hyperbola, whose eccentricity is always 2.

Ex.2 Find the equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is 2x + y = 1, focus (1, 2) and eccentricity 3.
Sol. Let P(x, y) be any point on the hyperbola and PM is perpendicular from P on the directrix.
Then by definition
SP = e PM
Þ (SP)2 = e2 (PM)2
2
ì 2x + y - 1 ü
Þ (x – 1) + (y – 2) = 3 í
2 2
ý
î 4 +1 þ
Þ 5(x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y + 5) = 3(4x2 + y2 + 1 + 4xy – 2y – 4x)
Þ 7x2 – 2y2 + 12 xy – 2x + 9y – 22 = 0
which is the required hyperbola.
Ex.3 Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola 16x2 – 32x – 3y2 + 12y = 44.
Sol. We have, 16(x2 – 2x) – 3 (y2 – 4y) = 44

(x - 1)2 (y - 2)2
Þ 16(x – 1)2 – 3 (y – 2)2 = 48 Þ - =1
3 16

This equation represents a hyperbola with eccentricty given

2
æ Conjugate axis ö æ 4 ö 19
e = 1+ç ÷ = 1+ç ÷ =
è Transverse axis ø è 3ø 3

3. POSITION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT TO A HYPERBOLA :

x2 y2
The point P(x 1 , y 1 ) lies outside, on o r inside the hyperbola - = 1 accord ing as
a 2 b2

x12 y12
- - 1 < 0 , = 0 or > 0
a 2 b2

4. A LINE AND A HYPERBOLA :

x2 y2
Let the hyperbola be – =1 ..... (1)
a2 b2

and the given line be y = mx + c ..... (2)

Eliminating y from (1) and (2),

x2 (mx + c)2
– =1
a2 b2

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 169
Þ b2x2 – a2 (mx + c)2 = a2b2
Þ (a2m2 – b2)x2 + 2mca2 + a2(b2 + c2) = 0 ..... (3)
Above equation being a quadratic in x givens two value of x. It show that every straight line will cut the
hyperbola in two points, may be real, coincident of imaginary according as discriminant of (3) >, =, < 0
i.e, 4m2c2a4 – 4(a2m2 – b2)a2 (b2 + c2) >, =, < 0
or –a2m2 + b2 + c2 >, =, < 0
or c2 >, =, < a2m2 – b2 ..... (4)

\ y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 - b2 ) touches the hyperbola and condition for tangency c2 = a2m2 – b2

x2 y2 æ a2 m b2 ö
Hence y = mx ± (a 2 m 2 - b2 ) , touches the hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 at çç ± , ± ÷÷
a b è a2 m2 - b2 a 2 m 2 - b2 ø
x2 y2
Ex.4 Show that the line x cos a + y sin a = p touches the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 if a2 cos2 a – b2 sin2 a = p2.
a b
Sol. The given line is
x cos a + y sin a = p
Þ y sin a = – x cos a + p
Þ y = – x cot a + p cosec a
Comparing this line with y = mx + c
m = – cot a, c = p cosec a
x2 y2
Since the given line touches trhe hyperbola - = 1 then
a 2 b2
c2 = a2m2 – b2 Þ p2 cosec2 a = a2 cot2 a – b2 or p2 = a2 cos2 a – b2 sin2 a

5. EQUATION OF TANGENT IN DIFFERENT FORMS :

x2 y2 xx1 yy1
Point Form The equation of the tangent to the hyperbola - 2 = 1 at the point (x1, y1) is 2 - 2 = 1
a 2
b a b
2 2
x y
Parametric Form The equation of the tangent to the hyperbola 2 - 2 = 1 at the point (a secq, b tanq)
a b
x y
is sec q - tan q = 1
a b
x2 y2
Slope Form The equation of tangent to the hyperbola - = 1 in terms of slope 'm' is
a 2 b2
y = mx ± a 2 m 2 - b2
æ a2 m b2 ö
The coordinates of the points of contact are çç ± , ± ÷
2 2 2 2 2 2 ÷
è a m -b a m -b ø
Number of Tangents From a Point Two tangents can be drawn from a point to a hyperbola. The two
tangents are real and distinct or coincident or imaginary according as the given point lies outside, on or inside
the hyperbola.

6. EQUATION OF NORMAL IN DIFFERENT FORMS :

x2 y2
(i) Point Form The equation of the normal to the hyperbola - = 1 at the point (x1, y1) is
a 2 b2
a 2 x b2 y
+ = a 2 + b2
x1 y1

E
170 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

x2 y2
(ii) Parametric Form The equation of the normal to the hyperbola - = 1 at the point
a 2 b2
ax by
(a secq, b tanq) is + = a 2 + b2
sec q tan q
x2 y2
(iii) Slope Form The equation of normal to the hyperbola - = 1 in terms of slope 'm' is
a 2 b2
m(a2 + b2 )
y = mx ±
a2 - b2 m2
Notes :
æ a2 mb2 ö
· The coordinates of the points of normal are çç ± 2 , m ÷÷
è a - b2 m 2 a2 - b2 m2 ø

· Number of Normals In general, four normals can be drawn to a hyperbola from a point in its plane i.e.,
there are four points on the hyperbola, the normals at which will pass through a given point. These four points
are called the co-normal points.

7. PAIR OF TANGENTS :

x2 y2
The equation of the pair of tangents drawn from a point P(x1, y1) to the hyperbola - = 1 is SS1 = T2
a 2 b2
x2 y2 x12 y12
where Sº - -1 , S1 º - -1
a2 b2 a 2 b2
xx1 yy1
and Tº - 2 -1
a2 b
Director Circle It is the locus of points from which parpedicular tangents are drawn to the hyperbola. The
x2 y2
equation of director circle of the hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 is x2 + y2 = a2 – b2.
a b
8. CHORD WITH A GIVEN MID POINT :

2 2
The equation of chord of the hyperbola x - y = 1 with P(x1, y1) as its middle point is given by T = S1 where
a 2 b2
xx1 yy1 x12 y12
Tº - - 1 and S1 º - -1
a2 b2 a 2 b2
Ex.5 Find the locus of the mid points of the chords of the circle x2 + y2 = 16, which are tangent to the hyperbola
9x2 – 16y2 = 144.

x2 y 2
Sol. Any tanget to hyperbola - = 1 is y = mx + (16m 2 - 9) ....(i)
16 9
Let (x1, y1) be the mid-point of the chord of the circle x 2 + y2 = 16, then equation of the chord is (T = S1)

xx1 + yy1 – (x12 + y12) = 0 ....(ii)

Since (i) and (ii) are same, comparing, we get

m 1 16m2 - 9 x
=- = Þ m = – 1 , (x12 + y12)2 = y12 (15m2 – 9)
x1 y1 2 2
-(x1 + y1 ) y1

Eliminating m and generalizing (x1, y1) required locus is (x2 + y2)2 = 16x2 – 9y2.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 171

9. CHORD OF CONTACT :

x2 y2
The equation of chord of contact of tangents drawn from a point P(x1, y1) to the hyperbola - = 1 is
a 2 b2
xx1 yy1
T = 0, where T º - 2 -1
a2 b
10. ASYMPTOTES OF HYPERBOLA :

x2 y 2 bx
The lines - 2 = 0 i.e., y = ± are called the asymptotes of the hyperbola.
a 2
b a

The curve comes close to these lines as x ® ¥ or x ® –¥ but never meets them. In other words, asymtote to
a curve touches the curve at infinity.

Note :

x2 y2 æ bö
· The angle between the asymptotes of - 2 = 1 is 2tan–1 ç ÷
a 2
b èaø

· A hyperbola and its conjugate hyperbola have the same asymptotes.

· The asymptotes pass through the centre of the hyperbola.

· Any line drawn parallel to the asymptote of the hyperbola would meet the curve only at one point.

11. RECTANGULAR HYPERBOLA :

If asymptotes of the standard hyperbola are perpendicular to each other, then it is known as Rectangular
Hyperbola.

b p
Then 2tan–1 =
a 2

Þ b = a or x2 – y2 = a2

is general form of the equation of the rectangular hyperbola.

If we take the coordinate axes along the asymptotes of a rectangle hyperbola, then equation of rectangular
hyperbola becomes : xy = c2, where c is any constat.

In parametric form, the equation of rectangular hyperbola

x = ct, y = c/t, where t is the parameter.

The point (ct, c/t) on the hyperbola xy = c2 is generally referred as the point 't'.

Properties of Rectangular Hyperbola, x2 – y2 = a2

· The equations of asymptotes of the rectangular hyperbola are y = ± x.

· The transverse and conjugate axes of a rectangular hyperbola are equal in length.

b2
· Eccentricity, e = 1+ = 2
a2

E
172 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex.1 The eccentricity of the conjugate hyperbola to the hyperbola x2 – 3y2 = 1 is-

(1) 2 (2) 2 / 3 (3) 4 (4) 4/3

Sol.(1) Equation of the conjugate hyperbola to the hyperbola x2 – 3y2 = 1 is

x2 y2
–x2 + 3y2 =1 Þ - + =1
1 1/ 3

Here a2 = 1, b2 = 1/3

\ eccentricity e= 1 + a 2 / b2 = 1 + 3 = 2

Ex.2 The area of a triangle formed by the lines x – y = 0, x + y = 0 and any tangent to the hyperbola x2 – y2 = a2
is-
(1) a2 (2) 2a2 (3) 3a2 (4) 4a2
Sol.(1) Any tangent to the hyperbola at P(a sec q, a tan q) is x sec q – y tan q = a ...(i)
Also x–y=0 ..... (ii)
x+ y = 0 ..... (iii)
Solving the above three lines in pairs, we get the point A, B, C as

æ a a ö
ç sec q - tan q , sec q - tan q ÷
è ø

æ a -a ö
ç sec q + tan q , sec q + tan q ÷
è ø

and (0, 0)

1
Since the one vertex is the origin therefore the area of the triangle ABC is (x y – x2y1)
2 1 2

a2 æ -1 1 ö a
2
= - = ( -2) = - a2 = a2
2 çè sec2 q - tan2 q sec2 q - tan2 q ÷ø 2

x2 y2
Ex.3 The number of normals which can be drawn from an external point on the hyperbola - = 1 is-
a 2 b2

(1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 8

Sol.(2) Equation of any normal to the hyperbola is

m(a2 + b2 )
y = mx –
a2 - b2 m2

Þ (a2 – b2m2) (y – mx)2 = m2(a2 + b2)2

If it passes through the point (x1, y1) then (a2 – b2m2) (y1 – mx1)2 = m2(a2 + b2)2
It is 4 degree equation in m, so it gives 4 values of m. Corresponding to there 4 values, for normals can be
drawn from the point (x1, y1)

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 173

x2 y2 y2 x2
Ex.4 The equation of the common tangents to the two hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 and 2 - 2 = 1 are-
a b a b

(1) y = ± x ± b2 - a2 (2) y = ± x ± a2 - b2 (3) y = ± x ± (a2 – b2) (4) y = ± x ± a2 + b2

x2 y2
Sol.(2) Any tangent to the hyperbola - = 1 is y = mx ± a 2 m 2 - b2
a 2 b2

or y = mx + c where c = ± a 2 m 2 - b2

y2 x2
This will touch the hyperbola - =1
a 2 b2

(mx + c)2 x2
if the equation - 2 = 1 has equal roots or x2(b2m2 – a2) + 2b2 mcx + (c2 – a2) b2 = 0 is an quadratic
a2 b
eqaution have equal roots
then 4b4 m2c2 = 4(b2m2 – a2) (c2 – a2)b2
or c2 = a2 – b2m2
a2m2 – b2 = a2 – b2m2 put (c2 = a2m2 – b2)
m2(a2 + b2) = a2 + b2 Þ m=±1

Hence, the eqaution of the common tangents are y = ± x ± a2 - b2

Ex.5 For what value of l does the line y = 2x + l touches the hyperbola 16x2 – 9y2 = 144?

(1) ±2 5 (2) 5 (3) ±3 5 (4) ±4 5

x2 y2
Sol.(1) Q Equation of hyperbola is 16x2 – 9y2 = 144 or - =1
9 16

x2 y2
Comparing this with - =1
a 2 b2
we get a2 = 9, b2 = 16 and comparing this line y = 2x + l with y = mx + c ; m = 2 & c = l.
If the line y = 2x + l touches the hyperbola 16x2 – 9y2 = 144

then c2 = a2 m2 – b2 Þ l2 = 9(2)2 – 16 = 36 – 16 = 20 ; \ l=±2 5

2 2
Ex.6 Find the equation of the tangent to the hyperbola x – 4y = 36 which is perpendicular to the line x – y + 4 = 0.

(1) x – y + 3 = 0 (2) x + y ± 3 3 =0 (3) 2x + y ± 3 3 =0 (4) x – y – 3 3 =0

Sol.(2) Let m be the slope of the tangent since the tangent is perpendicular to the line x – y + 4 = 0.
\ m × 1 = –1 Þ m = –1

x2 y 2
since x2 – 4y2 = 36 or - =1
36 9

x2 y2
Comparing this with - = 1;
a 2 b2
\ a2 = 36 & b2 = 9 so the equation of tangents are

y = (–1) x ± 36x( -1)2 - 9

Þ y = –x ± 27

or x + y ± 3 3 = 0

E
174 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
Ex.7 The product of the length of perpendiculars drawn from any point on the hyperbola x2 – 2y2 – 2 = 0 to its
asymptotes is
1 2 3
(1) (2) (3) (4) 2
2 3 2

Sol.(2) Any point on the given hyperbola is P( 2 sec q, tan q)

Asymptotes are x – 2y = 0 , x+ 2y = 0
Product of perpendiculars from P on these asymptotes
( 2 sec q - 2 tan q)( 2 sec q + 2 tan q) 2sec2 q - 2 tan2 q 2
= = =
1+ 2 3 3
x2 y2
Ex.8 If foci of a hyperbola are foci of the ellipse + = 1 . If the eccentricity of the hyperbola be 2, then its
25 9
equation is-

x2 y 2 x2 y 2 x2 y 2
(1) - =1 (2) - =1 (3) + =1 (4) None of these
4 12 12 4 12 4

4
Sol.(1) For ellipse e = , so foci = (±4, 0)
5

ae 4
For hyperbola e = 2, so a = = = 2, b = 2 4 - 1 = 2 3
e 2
x2 y 2
Hence equation of the hyperbola is - =1
4 12

Ex.9 Distance between directrices of the hyperbola x = 8 sec q, y = 8 tan q

(1) 16 2 (2) 8 2 (3) 6 2 (4) 4 2

2 2
Sol.(2) Hyperbola is x – y = 64 which is rectangular hyperbola.

So its e = 2

2a 2(8)
Here a = 8. Hence distance between directrices = = =8 2
e 2

Ex.10 The locus of the point of intersection of the lines 3x - y - 4 3 k = 0 and 3 kx + ky - 4 3 = 0 for different
values of k is-
(1) Ellipse (2) Parabola (3) Circle (4) Hyperbola
Sol.(4) 3x - y = 4 3 k ..... (i)

K( 3 x + y) = 4 3 ..... (ii)
To find the locus of their point of intersection eliminate the variable K between the equations from

3x - y
(i) K= and putting in (ii), we get
4 3

( 3x - y)( 3x + y) = (4 3)2
3x2 – y2 = 48

x2 y2
or - =1
16 48
hence the locus is hyperbola.

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 175

NCERT BASED QUESTIONS

1. Find the (i) lengths of the axes, (ii) coordinates of the vertices, (iii) coordinates of the foci, (iv) eccentricity
and (iv) length of the latus rectum of each of the following hyperbola.

x2 y2 x2 y 2 y2 x2
(a) - =1 (b) - = 1 (c) 25x2 – 9y2 = 225 (d) - =1
9 16 25 4 9 27

2. Find the equation of the hyperbola with vertices at (±6, 0) and foci at (±8, 0).
3. Find the equation of the hyperbola with vertices at (0, ±5) and foci at (0, ±8).

4. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (± 29 , 0) and the transverse axis is of the length 10.

5. Find the equation of the hyperbola whose foci are (± 3 5 , 0) & length of the latus rectum is 8 units.
6. Find equation of hyperbola, if foci (+ 5, 0), the transverse axis is of length 8.
7. Find equation of hyperbola, if foci (0, +13), the conjugate axis is of length 24.
8. Find equation of hyperbola, if foci (+ 4, 0), the latus rectum is of length 12.
9. Find equation of hyperbola, if vertices (+ 7,0) and e =4/3.
10. Find equation of hyperbola, if foci (0, ± 10 ), passing through (2, 3)
11. Find the equation of the hyperbola where foci are (0, +12) and the length of the latus rectum is 36.
12. The length of the transverse axis along x-axis with centre at origin of a hyperbola is 7 and it passes
through the point (5, –2). Find the equation of the hyperbola.
x2 y 2
13. Find the eccentricity of hyperbola - = 1 which passes through the points (3, 0) and (3 2 , 2).
a 2 b2
14. If the distance between the foci of a hyperbola is 16 and its eccentricity is 2 ,then obtain the
equation of the hyperbola.
15. Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola 9y2 – 4x2 = 36.
3
16. Find the equation of the hyperbola with eccentricity and foci at (± 2, 0).
2

HINTS & SOLUTIONS

5 32
1. (a) (i) 6 units, 8 units (ii) A(–3, 0), B(3, 0) (iii) F1(–5, 0), F2(5, 0) (iv) e = (v) units
3 3

29 8
(b) (i) 10 units, 4 units (ii) A(–5, 0), B(5, 0) (iii) F1(– 29 , 0), F2( 29 , 0) (iv) e = (v) units
5 5

34 50
(c) (i) 6 units, 10 units (ii) A(–3, 0), B(3, 0) (iii) F1(– 34 , 0), F2( 34 , 0) (iv) e = (v) units
3 3
(d) (i) 6 units, 6 3 units (ii) A(0, –3), B(0, 3) (iii) F1(0, –6), F2(0, 6) (iv) e = 2 (v) 18 units

x2 y2 y2 x2 x2 y 2 x2 y 2
2. - =1 3. - =1 4. - =1 5. - =1
36 28 25 39 25 4 25 20

x2 y2 y2 x2 x2 y2 x 2 9y2
6. - =1 7. - =1 8. - =1 9. - =1
16 9 25 144 4 12 49 343

y2 x2 4 2 51 2 13
10. - =1 11. 3y2 – x2 = 108 12. x - y = 1 13. e =
5 5 49 196 3

13 x2 y 2 4
14. x2 – y2 = 32 15. 16. - =
2 4 5 9

E
176 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
CHECK YOUR GRASP HYPERBOLA EXERCISE-I
x2 y 2 8. The foci of the hyperbola 4x2 – 9y2 – 36 = 0 are
1. The eccentricity of the hyperbola – + = 1 is
given by -
a 2 b2
(
(1) ± 11,0 ) (
(2) ± 12,0 )
(3) ( ± 13,0 ) (4) ( 0, ± 12 )
a2 + b2 a 2 - b2
(1) e = + (2) e = +
a2 a2 9. The equation of hyperbola whose foci are the foci
x2 y2
b2 - a 2 a2 + b2 of the ellipse + = 1 and the eccentricity is 2, is-
(3) e = + (4) e = + 25 9
a2 b2
2. If the length of the transverse and conjugate axes x2 y 2 x2 y 2
(1) + =1 (2) - =1
4 12 4 12
of a hyperbola be 8 and 6 respectively, then the
difference of focal distances of any point of the x2 y 2 x2 y 2
(3) + =1 (4) - =1
12 4 12 4
hyperbola will be -
10. If e and e' be the eccentricities of two conics S and
(1) 8 (2) 6 S' such that e2 + e'2 = 3 then both S and S' are
(3) 14 (4) 2 (1) ellipse (2) Parabolas
3. The equation of the hyperbola whose directrix is (3) hyperbolas (4) None of these
11. The length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola
2x + y = 1, focus (1, 1) and eccentricity = 3 is - x2 y2
- = – 1 is-
(1) 7x2 + 12xy – 2y2 – 2x + 4y – 7 = 0 a2 b2
(2) 11x2 + 12xy + 2y2 – 10x – 4y + 1 = 0 2a2 2b2 b2 a2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
b a a b
(3) 11x2 + 12xy + 2y2 – 14x – 14y + 1 = 0
12. The length of the transvere axis of a hyperbola is 7
(4) none of these
and it passes through the point (5, – 2). The
4. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum equation of the hyperbola is-
is 8 and conjugate axis is equal to half the distance 4 2 196 2
(1) x – y =1
between the foci, is- 49 51

4 4 2 49 2 51 2
(1) (2) (3) (4) None (2) x - y =1
3 3 3 196 196

5. If the centre, vertex and focus of a hyperbola be 4 2 51 2

(3) x - y =1
(0, 0), (4, 0) and (6, 0) respectively, then the equation 49 196
of the hyperbola is- (4) none of these
13. The locus of the point of intersection of the straight
(1) 4x2 – 5y2 = 8 (2) 4x2 – 5y2 = 80
x y x y 1
(3) 5x2 – 4y2 = 80 (4) 5x2 – 4y2 = 8 lines + = l and - = (l is a variable) is
a b a b l
6. If the latus rectum of an hyperbola be 8 and (1) a circle (2) a parabola
(3) an ellipse (4) a hyperbola
3 14. The equation of the hyperbola whose foci are
eccentricity be , then the equation of the
5 (6, 5), (–4, 5) and eccentricity 5/4 is-
hyperbola is
(x - 1)2 (y - 5)2
(1) 4x – 5y = 100
2 2
(2) 5x – 4y = 100
2 2 (1) - =1
16 9
(3) 4x + 5y = 100
2 2
(4) 5x2 + 4y2 = 100
x2 y 2
(2) - =1
x2 (y - 2)2 16 9
7. Foci of the hyperbola - = 1 are -
16 9
(x - 1)2 (y - 5)2
(3) - = -1
(1) (5, 2) (– 5, 2) (2) (5, 2) (5, – 2) 16 9
(3) (5, 2) (– 5, – 2) (4) None of these (4) None of these

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 177
15. The vertices of a hyperbola are at (0, 0) and 22. The line y = x + 2 touches the hyperbola
(10, 0) and one of its foci is at (18, 0). The equation
of the hyperbola is 5x2 – 9y2 = 45 at the point-
(1) (0, 2) (2) (3, 1)
x2 y2
(1) - =1 (3) (– 9/2, – 5/2) (4) None of these
25 144

(x - 5)2 y2 23. The eccentricity of the conic x2 – 4y2 = 1, is-

(2) - =1
25 144
2 3 2 5
2 2 (1) (2) (3) (4)
x (y - 5) 3 2 5 2
(3) - =1
25 144
24. If e and e' be the eccentricities of a hyperbola and
(x - 5)2 (y - 5)2
(4) - =1
25 144 1 1
its conjugate, then + 2 =
16. Equation of the hyprbola with eccentricity 3/2 and e2 e'

foci at (± 2, 0) is -
(1) 0 (2) 1
2 2 2 2
x y 4 x y 4 (3) 2 (4) None of these
(1) - = (2) - =
4 5 9 9 9 9
x2 y2 25. The tangents from (1, 2 2 ) to the hyperbola
(3) - =1 (4) None of these
4 9 16x2 – 25y2 = 400 include between them an angle=

x2 y2 (1) p/6 (2) p/4

17. The equation + = 1 represents -
12 - l 8 - l (3) p/3 (4) p/2
(1) a hyperbola if l < 8
26. The equation 9x2 – 16y2 – 18x + 32y – 151 = 0
(2) an ellipse if l > 0
represent a hyperbola-
(3) a hyperbola if 8 < l < 12
(1) The length of the transverse axes is 4
(4) None of these
(2) Length of latus rectum is 9
x2 y2 21 11
18. The equation - = 1 , k > 1 represents - (3) Equation of directrix is x = and x = –
1-k 1+k 5 5
(4) None of these
(1) Circle (2) Ellipse
27. The value of m for which y = mx + 6 is a tangent to
(3) Hyperbola (4) None of these
x2 y2
19. What will be the equation of the chord of hyperbola the hyperbola - = 1 is
100 49
25x2 – 16y2 = 400, whose mid point is (5, 3) -
17 20 3 3
(1) 115x – 117y = 17 (2) 125x – 48y = 481 (1) (2) (3) (4)
20 17 20 20
(3) 127x + 33y = 341 (4) 15x + 121y = 105
x2 y2
28. Equation of normal to the hyperbola - =1
20. The slope of the tangent to the hyperbola a 2 b2
2x2 – 3y2 = 6 at (3, 2) is- at the point (a sec q, b tan q) is-

(1) –1 (2) 1 ax by
(1) - = a 2 - b2
sec q tan q
(3) 0 (4) 2
ax by
21. Line lx + my + n = 0 is a tangent to the hyperbola (2) + = a 2 + b2
sec q tan q
x2 y2
- = 1 if- ax by
a 2 b2 (3) + = a 2 - b2
sec q tan q
(1) a2l2 – b2m2 = n2 (2) a2l2 + m2 = n2b2 ax by
(4) - = a-b
(3) a2 + b2 = n2 (l2 + m2) (4) a2l2 + b2m2 = n2 sec q tan q

E
178 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
29. If the straight line x cos a + y sina = p be a tangent x2 y2
30. The angle between the asymptotes of - =1
x2 y2 a 2 b2
to the hyperbola - = 1 then - is equal to-
a 2 b2
(1) a2 cos2 a + b2 sin2 a = p2 æaö
æbö
(1) 2 tan -1 ç ÷ (2) tan -1 ç ÷
(2) a2 cos2 a – b2 sin2 a = p2 èaø èbø
(3) a2 sin2 a + b2 cos2 a = p2 æaö æbö
(3) 2 tan -1 ç ÷ (4) tan -1 ç ÷
(4) a2 sin2 a – b2 cos2 a = p2 èbø èaø
31. The equation of the transverse and conjugate axis
of the hyperbola 16x2 – y2 + 64x + 4y + 44 = 0
are-
(1) x = 2, y + 2 = 0 (2) x = 2, y = 2
(3) y = 2, x + 2 = 0 (4) None of these

ANSWER KEY Exercise-I

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 4 1 1 3 3 1 1 3 2 3
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 3 4 1 2 1 3 4 2 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 1 3 4 2 4 3 1 2 2 1
Que. 31
Ans. 3
E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 179

NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE QUESTIONS EXERCISE-II

x 2 y2 y2 x 2 k
1. The number of points on + = 1 from which 3. If the two conics 2
- = 1 and y 2 = - x
4 3 k 4 2
two mutually perpendicular tangents can be drawn intersect, then number of integers in the range of
'k' is -
x 2 y2
to - = 1 is 4. If the distance of one focus of hyperbola from its
4 1
directrices is 5 & 3, then its eccentricity
2. From a point on the line x – y + 2 = 0 tangents are
is-
x 2 y2
drawn to the hyperbola - = 1 such that the
6 2
chord of contact passes through a fixed point (l, m).
l
Then is equal to
m

ANSWER KEY Exercise-II

Que. 1 2 3 4
Ans. 2 3 0 2
E
180 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS HYPERBOLA EXERCISE-III
1. The latus rectum of the hyperbola 16x2 – 9y2 = 144 8. Let P (a sec q, b tan q) and Q(a sec f, b tan f) where
is- [AIEEE-2002]
p
(1) 16/3 (2) 32/3 q + f = , be two points on the hyperbola
2
(3) 8/3 (4) 4/3

x2 y2 x2 y 2
2. The foci of the ellipse + 2 = 1 and the - = 1. If (h, k) is the point of intersection of
16 b a 2 b2
the normals at P and Q, then k is equal to-
x2 y2 1
hyperbola – = coincide. Then the [IIT-2000]
144 81 25
value of b2 is- [AIEEE-2003] ; [AIEEE-2012 (Online)] a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
(1) (2) -
(1) 9 (2) 1 a a
(3) 5 (4) 7
a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
3. The locus of a point P(a, b) moving under the (3) (4) -
b b
condition that the line y = ax + b is a tangent to
x2 y2 9. The equation of common tangent of the curve y2
the hyperbola 2 - 2 =1 is- [AIEEE-2005] = 8x and xy = –1 is [IIT-2002]
a b
(1) 3y = 9x + 2 (2) y = x + 2
(1) a hyperbola (2) a parabola
(3) 2y = x + 8 (4) y = 2x + 1
(3) a circle (4) an ellipse
10. The point at which the line 2x + 6 y = 2 touches
x2 y2
4. For the hyperbola 2
- 2 = 1 , which of the curve x – 2y = 4, is-
2 2
[IIT-2004]
cos a sin a
the following remains constant when a varies ? (1) (4, – 6 ) (2) 6 , 1)
[AIEEE-2007, IIT-2003]
æ1 1 ö æp ö
(1) Abscissae of vertices (2) Abscissae of foci (3) ç , ÷ (4) ç , p ÷
è2 6 ø è6 ø
(3) Eccentricity (4) Directrix
5. If a circle cuts the rectangular hyperbola xy = 1 in 11. If a hyperbola passes through the focus of the
the points (xr, yr) where r = 1,2,3,4 then [IIT-98]
x2 y2
(1) x1x2x3x4 = 2 + = 1 and its transverse and conjugate
25 16
(2) x1x2x3x4 = 1 axes coincide with the major and minor axis of
(3) x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 = 0 ellipse, and product of eccentricities is 1, then-
(4) y1 + y2 + y3 + y4 = 0 [IIT-2006]

6. If x = 9 is the chord of contact of the hyperbola (1) Focus of hyperbola is (5, 0)

x2 – y2 = 9, then the equation of the corresponding (2) Focus of hyperbola is (5 3 , 0)
pair of tangents is- [IIT-99]
x2 y2
(3) The equation of hyperbola is – =1
(1) 9x2 – 8y2 + 18x – 9 = 0 9 25
(2) 9x2 – 8y2 – 18x + 9 = 0 x2 y2
(4) The equation of hyperbola is – =1
(3) 9x2 – 8y2 – 18x – 9 = 0 9 16
(4) 9x2 – 8y2 + 18x + 9 = 0 12. A hyperbola, having the transverse axis of length
2sinq, is confocal with the ellipse 3x2 + 4y2 = 12.
7. At which of the following points of the hyperbola Then its equation is- [IIT-2007]
x2 – y 2 = 3, tangent is parallel to the line (1) x2cosec 2 q – y2 sec2 q = 1
2x + y + 8 = 0 ? [REE 99] (2) x2sec 2 q – y2cosec2q = 1
(1) (2, 1) (2) (2, –1) (3) x2sin2q – y2cos2q = 1
(3) (–2, –1) (4) None of these (4) x2cos 2q – y2sin2 q = 1

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 181
13. Con sider a branch of th e hyperbola x2 y2
18. If the eccentricity of a hyperbola - = 1 , which
x2 – 2y2 – 2 2 x – 4 2 y – 6 = 0 with vertex at 9 b2
the point A. Let B be one of the end points of its 13
latus rectum. If C is the focus of the hyperbola nearest passes through (k, 2) is , then the value of k2
3
to the point A. then the area of the triangle ABC is :- [AIEEE-2012 (Online)]
is- [IIT-2008]
(1) 2 (2) 8
2 3 (3) 18 (4) 1
(1) 1 – (2) –1
3 2
x 2 y2
19. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola - = 1,
2 3 9 4
(3) 1 + (4) +1
3 2 parallel to the straight line 2x – y = 1. The points
14. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x – 2y =1 2 2 of contact of the tangents on the hyperbola are
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse is [IIT-2012]

reciprocal f that of the hyperbola. If the axes of the

æ 9 1 ö æ 9 1 ö
ellipse are along the coordinate axes, then (1) ç , ÷ (2) ç - ,- ÷
è2 2 2 ø è 2 2 2ø
[IIT-2009]
(1) equation of ellipse is x + 2y =2
2 2

(2) the foci of ellipse are (±1, 0)

(3) equation of ellipse is x2 + 2y2 =4
(
(3) 3 3, - 2 2 ) (4) ( -3 3, 2 2 )
(4) the foci of ellipse are ± 2,0( ) 20. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose length of
the latus rectum is equal to 8 and the length of its
conjugate axis is equal to half of the distance
x2 y 2 between its foci, is : [Jee(Main)2016]
15. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola - =1
a2 b2
4 4 2
be reciprocal to that of the ellipse x2 + 4y2 = 4. (1) 3 (2) (3) (4)
If the hyperbola passes through a focus of the 3 3 3
ellipse, then - [IIT-2011]

2 2
21. A hyperbola passes through the point P ( 2, 3 )
x y
(1) the equation of the hyperbola is - =1 and has foci at (± 2, 0). Then the tangent to this
3 2 hyperbola at P also passes through the point :
(2) a focus of the hyperbola is (2,0) [Jee(Main)2017]

(3) the eccentricity of the hyperbola is

5 (
(1) - 2, - 3 ) (
(2) 3 2, 2 3 )
3
(4) the equation of the hyperbola is x2 – 3y2 = 3 (
(3) 2 2, 3 3 ) (4) ( 3, 2 )
16. Let P(6, 3) be a point on t he hyperbola
22. A hyperbola has its centre at the origin, passes
2 2 through the point (4,2) and has transverse axis of
x y
- = 1 . If the normal at the point P intersects length 4 along the x-axis. Then the eccentricity of
a 2 b2 the hyperbola is : [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
the x-axis at (9,0), then the eccentricity of the
hyperbola is - [IIT-2011]
2 3
(1) (2)
3 2
5 3
(1) (2) (3) 2 (4) 3 (3) (4) 2
2 2 3

17. The equation of the hyperbola whose foci are 23. The equation of a tangent to the hyperbola
4x2–5y2 = 20 parallel to the line x–y = 2 is :
(–2,0) and (2, 0) and eccentricity is 2 is given
by : [AIEEE-2011] [JEE(Main)-January,2019]

(1) –3x2 + y2 = 3 (2) x2 – 3y2 = 3 (1) x–y+9 = 0 (2) x–y+7 = 0

(3) 3x2 – y2 = 3 (4) –x2 + 3y2 = 3 (3) x–y+1 = 0 (4) x–y–3 = 0

E
182 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN
28. If the eccentricity of the standard hyperbola passing
ì y2 x2 ü
24. Let S = í( x,y ) Î R 2 : - = 1ý , wh ere through the point (4,6) is 2, then the equation of
î 1+ r 1- r þ the tangent to the hyperbola at (4,6) is -
r ¹ ±1. Then S represents :
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) 2x – y – 2 = 0
2 (2) 3x – 2y = 0
(1) A hyperbola whose eccentricity is , where
r +1
(3) 2x – 3y + 10 = 0
0 < r < 1.
(4) x – 2y + 8 = 0
1
(2) An ellipse whose eccentricity is , where
r +1 29. If the line y = mx + 7 3 is normal to the hyperbola
r>1 x 2 y2
- = 1 , then a value of m is
2 24 18
(3) A hyperbola whose eccentricity is , when [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
1- r
0 < r < 1. 3
5
(1) (2)
2 5
2
(4) An ellipse whose eccentricity is , when
r +1 2 15
r>1 (3) (4)
5 2
25. Equation of a common tangent to the parabola
y2 = 4x and the hyperbola xy = 2 is : 30. If 5x + 9 = 0 is the directrix of the hyperbola
16x2 – 9y2 = 144, then its corresponding focus is:
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
[JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(1) x + 2y + 4 = 0
(2) x – 2y + 4 = 0 æ 5 ö
(1) ç - ,0 ÷ (2) (5, 0)
(3) x + y + 1 = 0 è 3 ø

(4) 4x + 2y + 1 = 0 æ5 ö
(3) (–5, 0) (4) ç ,0 ÷
26. If a hyperbola has length of its conjugate axis equal
è3 ø
to 5 and the distance between its foci is 13, then 31. If a directrix of a hyperbola centred at the origin
the eccentricity of the hyperbola is :-
and passing through the point ( 4, -2 3 ) is
[JEE(Main)-January,2019]
5x = 4 5 and its eccentricity is e, then :

13 [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
(1) 2 (2)
6 (1) 4e4 – 24e2 + 35 = 0

13 13 (2) 4e4 + 8e2 – 35 = 0

(3) (4)
8 12 (3) 4e4 – 12e2 –27 = 0

27. If the vertices of a hyperbola be at (–2, 0) and (4) 4e4 –24e2 + 27 = 0

(2, 0) and one of its foci be at (–3, 0), then which
32. The equation of a common tangent to the curves,
one of the following points does not lie on this
y2 = 16x and xy = –4 is : [JEE(Main)-April,2019]
hyperbola? [JEE(Main)-January,2019]
(1) x + y + 4 = 0
(1) ( 4, 15 ) (2) ( -6,2 10 ) (2) x – 2y + 16 = 0
(3) 2x – y + 2 = 0
(3) ( 6,5 2 ) (4) ( 2 6,5)
(4) x – y + 4 = 0

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 183
33. Let P be the point of intersection of the common 35. If e1 and e2 are the eccentricities of the ellipse,
tangents to the parabola y2 = 12x and the hyperbola x 2 y2 x2 y2
8x2 – y2 = 8. If S and S' denote the foci of the + = 1 and the hyperbola, - =1
18 4 9 4
hyperbola where S lies on the positive x-axis then
respectively and (e1, e2) is a point on the ellipse,
P divides SS' in a ratio: [JEE(Main)-April,2019] 15x2 + 3y2 = k, then k is equal to :
(1) 5:4 (2) 14:13 [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

(3) 2:1 (4) 13:11 (1) 15 (2) 14 (3) 17 (4) 16

34. If a hyperbola passes through the point P(10,16)
and it has vertices at (±6,0), then the equation of
the normal to it at P is
(1) x + 2y = 42 [JEE(Main)-January,2020]

(2) 3x + 4y = 94
(3) 2x + 5y = 100
(4) x + 3y = 58

Previous Year Question ANSWER KEY Exercise-III

Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 1
Que. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1, 4 1 2 1,2 2, 4 2 3 3 1, 2 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 3 1 3 4 1 4 3 1 3 3
Que. 31 32 33 34 35
Ans. 1 4 1 3 4
E
184 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Important Notes

E
 ALLEN JEE(Main)-Mathematics 185

Important Notes

E
186 JEE(Main)-Mathematics ALLEN

Important Notes